Publication Date 19 Dec 2011
Copyright © 2006– 2011 Novell, Inc. and contributors. All rights reserved.
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or (at your option) version 1.3; with the Invariant Section being this copyright notice and license. A copy of the license version 1.2 is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.
For Novell trademarks, see the Novell Trademark and Service Mark list http://www.novell.com/company/legal/trademarks/tmlist.html. Linux* is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds. All other third party trademarks are the property of their respective owners. A trademark symbol (®, ™ etc.) denotes a Novell trademark; an asterisk (*) denotes a third party trademark.
All information found in this book has been compiled with utmost attention to detail. However, this does not guarantee complete accuracy. Neither Novell, Inc., SUSE LINUX Products GmbH, the authors, nor the translators shall be held liable for possible errors or the consequences thereof.
Contents
udev/dev Directoryuevents and udevudev Daemonudev RulesudevList of Figures
List of Tables
List of Examples
udev Rules/etc/resolv.conf/etc/hosts/etc/networks/etc/host.conf/etc/nsswitch.conf-n CommandVirtualHost EntriesVirtualHost DirectivesVirtualHost DirectivesVirtualHost ConfigurationThis manual gives you a general understanding of openSUSE®. It is intended mainly for system administrators and home users with basic system administration knowledge. Check out the various parts of this manual for a selection of applications needed in everyday life and in-depth descriptions of advanced installation and configuration scenarios.
Learn how to deploy openSUSE from a remote location and become acquainted with complex disk setup scenarios.
Understand how to install or remove software with either YaST or using the command line, how to use the 1-Click Install feature, and how to keep your system up-to-date.
Learn how to configure and upgrade openSUSE, how to administrate your system in text mode, and get to know some important utilities for Linux administrators.
Get an introduction to the components of your Linux system and a deeper understanding of their interaction.
Learn how to configure the various network and file services that come with openSUSE.
Get an introduction to mobile computing with openSUSE, get to know the various options for wireless computing and power management.
Many chapters in this manual contain links to additional documentation resources. These include additional documentation that is available on the system, as well as documentation available on the Internet.
For an overview of the documentation available for your product and the latest documentation updates, refer to http://www.novell.com/documentation/opensuse114 or to the following section.
We provide HTML and PDF versions of our books in different languages. The following manuals for users and administrators are available on this product:
Guides you step-by-step through the installation of openSUSE from DVD, or from an ISO image, gives short introductions to the GNOME and KDE desktops including some key applications running on it. Also gives an overview of LibreOffice and its modules for writing texts, working with spreadsheets, or creating graphics and presentations.
Gives you a general understanding of openSUSE and covers advanced system administration tasks. It is intended mainly for system administrators and home users with basic system administration knowledge. It provides detailed information about advanced deployment scenarios, administration of your system, the interaction of key system components and the set-up of various network and file services openSUSE offers.
Introduces basic concepts of system security, covering both local and network security aspects. Shows how to make use of the product inherent security software like AppArmor (which lets you specify per program which files the program may read, write, and execute) or the auditing system that reliably collects information about any security-relevant events.
An administrator's guide for problem detection, resolution and optimization. Find how to inspect and optimize your system by means of monitoring tools and how to efficiently manage resources. Also contains an overview of common problems and solutions and of additional help and documentation resources.
This manual offers an introduction to setting up and managing
virtualization with KVM (Kernel-based Virtual Machine) on
openSUSE. Also shows how to manage VM Guests with libvirt and
QEMU.
Find HTML versions of most product manuals in your installed system under
/usr/share/doc/manual or in the help centers of your
desktop. Find the latest documentation updates at
http://www.novell.com/documentation where you can download
PDF or HTML versions of the manuals for your product.
Several feedback channels are available:
To report bugs for a product component, or to submit enhancement requests, please use https://bugzilla.novell.com/. For documentation bugs, submit a bug against the component for the respective product.
If you are new to Bugzilla, you might find the following articles helpful:
We want to hear your comments and suggestions about this manual and the other documentation included with this product. Use the User Comments feature at the bottom of each page in the online documentation or go to http://www.novell.com/documentation/feedback.html and enter your comments there.
The following typographical conventions are used in this manual:
/etc/passwd: directory names and filenames
placeholder: replace
placeholder with the actual value
PATH: the environment variable PATH
ls, --help: commands, options, and
parameters
user: users or groups
Alt, Alt+F1: a key to press or a key combination; keys are shown in uppercase as on a keyboard
, +: menu items, buttons
Dancing Penguins (Chapter Penguins, ↑Another Manual): This is a reference to a chapter in another manual.
This book is written in Novdoc, a subset of DocBook (see
http://www.docbook.org). The XML source files were
validated by xmllint, processed by
xsltproc, and converted into XSL-FO using a customized
version of Norman Walsh's stylesheets. The final PDF is formatted through
XEP from RenderX. The open source tools and the
environment used to build this manual are available in the package
susedoc that is shipped with
openSUSE.
The source code of openSUSE is publicly available. Refer to http://en.opensuse.org/Source_code for download links and more information.
With a lot of voluntary commitment, the developers of Linux cooperate on a global scale to promote the development of Linux. We thank them for their efforts—this distribution would not exist without them. Furthermore, we thank Frank Zappa and Pawar. Special thanks, of course, goes to Linus Torvalds.
Have a lot of fun!
Your SUSE Team
Contents
Contents
Abstract
Install your openSUSE® system with YaST, the central tool for installation and configuration of your system. YaST guides you through the installation process and the basic configuration of your system. During the installation and configuration process, YaST analyzes both your current system settings and your hardware components and proposes installation settings based on this analysis. By default, YaST displays an overview of all installation steps on the left hand side of the window and provides online help texts for each step. Click to view the help text.
If you are a first-time user of openSUSE, you might want to follow the default YaST proposals in most parts, but you can also adjust the settings as described here to fine-tune your system according to your preferences. Many parts of the basic system configuration, such as user accounts or system language, can also be modified after the installation process.
When installing openSUSE, choose from several media available either online or in the retail box:
One DVD containing the openSUSE distribution for 32bit and 64bit systems. The second medium contains proprietary add-on software.
This installation option does not require any network access for installation, nor do you need to set up external repositories to install the full openSUSE. You can, however, make the contents of the DVD available on an installation server and make them available all across your network.
One DVD5, available via download for 32bit or 64bit systems.
Choose this installation option if you want a fully-fledged openSUSE system. Beyond the downloading of the DVD ISO, there is no network connection required to make use of this installation option. Once the medium has been fully downloaded and the physical medium created, you can go ahead with the installation. You can also make the contents of the DVDs available on an installation server and make them available all across your network.
The LiveCD versions, available via download, include the KDE4 or GNOME desktops together with the most popular applications for 32-bit or 64-bit systems.
Choose this medium option for a first look at openSUSE. The LiveCD version runs on your computer using RAM without touching your hard drive and no installation is needed. However, you can also install openSUSE from the running live system. There is no network connection required beyond the mere downloading of the medium.
![]() | Booting the LiveCD from an USB Stick |
|---|---|
Live CD iso images can also be used as boot images for USB sticks. Create a bootable USB stick by using the command-line program dd with the following syntax: dd if= dd is available on Linux and MacOS by default. A Microsoft Windows* version can be downloaded from http://www.chrysocome.net/dd. Warning: Using this dd command will erase all data on the USB device! | |
The Mini CD contains the minimal Linux system needed to run the installation. The installation system itself and the installation data are loaded from a network source. To install from a network providing SLP, please start the installation as described in Section 1.2.1, “Installing from a Network Server Using SLP”. To install from a HTTP, FTP, NFS, or SMB server, follow the instructions in Section 1.2.2, “Installing from a Network Source without SLP”.
![]() | Add-On CDs—Installing Additional Software |
|---|---|
Although add-on CDs (extensions or third-party products) cannot be used as stand-alone installation media, they can be embedded as additional software sources during the installation. Currently CDs with additional languages and non open source software are available as add-on CDs for openSUSE. Refer to Section 1.7.1, “Add-On Products” for more information. | |
After having selected the installation medium, determine the suitable installation method and boot option that best matches your needs:
Choose this option if you want to perform a stand-alone installation and do not want to rely on a network to provide the installation data or the boot infrastructure. The installation proceeds exactly as outlined in Section 1.3, “The Installation Workflow”.
In order to install from a LiveCD, boot the live system from CD. In the running system, launch the installation routine by clicking on the icon on the desktop. Phase one of the installation will be carried out in a window on the desktop. It is not possible to update an existing system with a LiveCD, you can only perform a new installation (with automatic configuration).
Choose this option if you have an installation server available in your network or want to use an external server as the source of your installation data. This setup can be configured to boot from physical media (Floppy, CD/DVD, or hard disk) or configured to boot via network using PXE/BOOTP. Refer to Section 1.2.1, “Installing from a Network Server Using SLP”, Section 1.2.2, “Installing from a Network Source without SLP”, or Chapter 2, Remote Installation for details.
openSUSE 12.1 Installer from
Windows
Choose this installation option if you prefer a smooth transition from
using Windows to using Linux. openSUSE 12.1
Installer allows you to boot into the openSUSE
installation right from a running Windows by modifying the Windows
boot loader. This installation option is only available from the DVD
media. Refer to Section 1.2.3, “Installing with the openSUSE 12.1 Installer from Windows”
for details.
openSUSE supports several different boot options from which you can
choose, depending on the hardware available and on the installation
scenario you prefer. Booting from the
openSUSE media or using openSUSE 12.1
Installer are the most straightforward options, but special
requirements might call for special
setups:
Table 1.1. Boot Options¶
|
Boot Option |
Description |
|---|---|
|
DVD |
This is the easiest boot option. This option can be used if the system has a local DVD-ROM drive that is supported by Linux. |
|
openSUSE 12.1 Installer |
openSUSE 12.1 Installer is installed under Microsoft Windows and makes it possible to boot directly into the installation |
|
PXE or BOOTP |
Booting over the network must be supported by the system's BIOS or firmware, and a boot server must be available in the network. This task can also be handled by another openSUSE system. See http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:PXE_boot_installation for more information.Refer to Chapter 2, Remote Installation for more information. |
|
Hard Disk |
openSUSE installation can also be booted from the hard disk. To
do this, copy the kernel ( |
![]() | Booting from DVD on UEFI machines |
|---|---|
►amd64 em64t: DVD1 can be used as a boot medium for machines equipped with UEFI (Unified Extensible Firmware Interface). Refer to your vendor's documentation for specific information. If booting fails, try to enable CSM (Compatibility Support Module) in your firmware. ◄ | |
If your network setup supports OpenSLP and your network installation source has been configured to announce itself via SLP (described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”), boot the system, press F4 in the boot screen and select from the menu.
The installation program configures the network connection with DHCP and retrieves the location of the network installation source from the OpenSLP server. If the automatic DHCP network configuration fails, you are prompted to enter the appropriate parameters manually. The installation then proceeds as described below with the exception of the network configuration step that is needed prior to adding additional repositories. This step is not needed as the network is already configured and active at this point.
If your network setup does not support OpenSLP for the retrieval of network installation sources, boot the system and press F4 in the boot screen to select the desired network protocol (NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB/CIFS). Provide the server's address and the path to the installation media.
The installation program automatically configures the network connection with DHCP. If this configuration fails, you are prompted to enter the appropriate parameters manually. The installation retrieves the installation data from the source specified. The installation then proceeds as described below with the exception of the network configuration step needed prior to adding additional repositories. This step is not needed as the network is already configured and active at this point.
openSUSE 12.1 Installer from Windows¶
openSUSE 12.1 Installer is a
Microsoft Windows application that prepares your computer to directly
boot into the openSUSE installation without having to adjust BIOS
settings. It is only available on DVD media. To use the installer,
insert the openSUSE media under Windows. The openSUSE
12.1 Installer setup automatically starts
(if not, run openSUSE11_2_LOCAL.exe from the DVD).
Choose a language for the installation and follow the instructions on
the screen. The language you choose here is also preconfigured to be
used for the openSUSE installation.
On the next reboot, the Microsoft Windows boot loader launches. Choose
to start the
openSUSE installation. In order to proceed with the installation,
you will be prompted to insert the installation media. The installation
proceeds as described below. When Microsoft Windows is booted again,
openSUSE 12.1 Installer is
automatically uninstalled.
![]() | Installing openSUSE alongside Microsoft Windows |
|---|---|
openSUSE can easily be installed alongside Microsoft Windows. Carry out the installation as described below—an existing Windows installation will automatically be detected and a dual boot option will be installed. If Windows covers the whole installation disk, the installation routine will make a proposal to shrink an existing Windows partition in order to make room for the openSUSE. Please read Section 1.10.1.1, “Resizing a Windows Partition” prior to the installation for detailed information. | |
The openSUSE installation is split into three main parts: preparation, installation, and configuration. During the preparation phase you configure some basic parameters such as language, time, desktop type, users, passwords, hard disk setup and installation scope. In the non-interactive installation phase the software is installed and the system is prepared for the first boot. Upon finishing the installation the machine reboots into the newly installed system and starts the final system configuration. You can choose whether to do a fully automatic or a manual configuration. In this stage, network and Internet access, as well as hardware components such as printers, are set up.
You can install openSUSE from local installation sources, such as the openSUSE CDs or DVD, or from network source of an FTP, HTTP, NFS, or SMB server. Any of these approaches requires physical access to the system to install as well as user interaction during the installation. The installation procedure is basically the same regardless of the installation source. Any exceptions are sufficiently highlighted in the following workflow description.
The boot screen displays a number of options for the installation procedure. boots the installed system and is selected by default, because the CD is often left in the drive. Select one of the other options with the arrow keys and press Enter to boot it. The relevant options are:
The normal installation mode. All modern hardware functions are enabled. In case the installation fails, see F5 for boot options that disable potentially problematic functions.
Starts a minimal Linux system without a graphical user interface. For more information, see Section “Using the Rescue System” (Appendix A, Help and Troubleshooting, ↑Start-Up). This option is not available on LiveCDs.
This option is only available when you install from media created from downloaded ISOs. In this case it is recommended to check the integrity of the installation medium. This option starts the installation system before automatically checking the media. In case the check was successful, the normal installation routine starts. If a corrupt media is detected, the installation routine aborts.
Starts a BIOS checker that validates ACPI and other parts of your BIOS. This option is not available on the LiveCDs.
Tests your system RAM using repeated read and write cycles. Terminate the test by rebooting. For more information, see Section “Fails to Boot” (Appendix A, Help and Troubleshooting, ↑Start-Up). This option is not available on the LiveCDs.
Use the function keys indicated in the bar at the bottom of the screen to change the language, screen resolution, installation source or to add an additional driver from your hardware vendor:
Get context-sensitive help for the active element of the boot screen. Use the arrow keys to navigate, Enter to follow a link, and Esc to leave the help screen.
Select the display language and a corresponding keyboard layout for the installation. The default language is English (US).
Select various graphical display modes for the installation. Select if the graphical installation causes problems.
Normally, the installation is performed from the inserted installation medium. Here, select other sources, like FTP or NFS servers. If the installation is deployed on a network with an SLP server, select an installation source available on the server with this option. Find information about SLP in Chapter 10, SLP Services in the Network.
If you encounter problems with the regular installation, this menu offers to disable a few potentially problematic functions. If your hardware does not support ACPI (advanced configuration and power interface) select to install without ACPI support. disables support for APIC (Advanced Programmable Interrupt Controllers) which may cause problems with some hardware. boots the system with the DMA mode (for CD/DVD-ROM drives) and power management functions disabled.
If you are not sure, try the following options first: or . Experts can also use the command line () to enter or change kernel parameters.
Press this key to notify the system that you have an optional driver update for openSUSE. With or , load drivers directly before the installation starts. If you select , you are prompted to insert the update disk at the appropriate point in the installation process.
If you install from an installation medium supporting 32bit and 64bit architectures and have a processor with 64-bit support, select whether to install a 64-bit or 32-bit system. By default, a 64-bit system is installed on a computer with 64-bit support. To install a 32-bit system, press F7 then select .
![]() | Using IPv6 during the Installation |
|---|---|
By default you can only assign IPv4 network addresses to your machine.
To enable IPv6 during installation, enter one of the following
parameters at the bootprompt: | |
After starting the installation, openSUSE loads and configures a minimal Linux system to run the installation procedure. To view the boot messages and copyright notices during this process, press Esc. On completion of this process, the YaST installation program starts and displays the graphical installer.
![]() | Installation without a Mouse |
|---|---|
If the installer does not detect your mouse correctly, use Tab for navigation, arrow keys to scroll, and Enter to confirm a selection. Various buttons or selection fields contain a letter with an underscore. Use Alt-Letter to select a button or a selection directly instead of navigating there with the Tab button. | |
Start the installation of openSUSE by choosing your language. Changing the language will automatically preselect a corresponding keyboard layout. Override this proposal by selecting a different keyboard layout from the drop-down menu. The language selected here is also used to assume a time zone for the system clock. This setting—along with the selection of secondary languages to install on your system—can be modified later in the , described in Section 1.12, “Installation Settings”. For information about language settings in the installed system, see Chapter 11, Changing Language and Country Settings with YaST (↑Start-Up).
Read the license agreement that is displayed beneath the language and keyboard selection thoroughly. Use to access translations. If you agree to the terms, click to proceed with the installation. If you do not agree to the license agreement click to terminate the installation.
After a system analysis (where YaST probes for storage devices and tries to find other installed systems on your machine) the available installation modes are displayed. This step is skipped when installing from a LiveCD, since this medium only supports a new installation with automatic configuration.
Select this option to start a new installation from scratch.
Select this option to update an existing installation to a newer version. For more information about system updates, see Chapter 16, Upgrading the System and System Changes (↑Start-Up).
By default, the automatic configuration is used when performing a new installation. In this mode the system automatically configures your hardware and the network, so the installation is performed with minimal user interaction. If necessary, you can change every configuration that is set up later in the installed system using YaST. Uncheck if you prefer a manual configuration during the installation.
Check to include add-on products during the installation. An add-on product can include extensions, third-party products or additional software for your system such as support for additional languages.
Click to proceed. If you selected to include an add-on product, proceed with Section 1.7.1, “Add-On Products”, otherwise skip the next section and advance to Section 1.8, “Clock and Time Zone”.
Add-on products can be installed either from a local source (CD, DVD, or directory) or from a network source (HTTP, FTP, NFS, CIFS,...). When installing from a network source, you need to configure the network first (unless you are performing a network installation— in this case the existing network configuration is used). Choose and proceed as described in Section 1.7.1.1, “Network Setup”. If the add-on product is available locally, select .
Click and specify the product source. Source types available are , , , , a or a (if no network was configured). If the add-on product is available on removable media, the system automatically mounts the media and reads its contents. If the add-on product is available on hard disk, choose to install from an unmounted hard drive, or / to install from the local file system. Add-on products may be delivered as a repository or as a set of rpm files. In the latter case, check . Whenever a network is available, you can choose from additional remote sources such as HTTP, SLP, FTP, etc. It is also possible to specify a URL directly.
Check to download the files describing the repository now. If unchecked, they will be downloaded once the installation starts. Proceed with and insert a CD or DVD if required. Depending on the product's content it may be necessary to accept additional license agreements.
It is also possible to configure add-on products later. Using add-on products on the installed system is described in Chapter 8, Installing Add-On Products (↑Start-Up).
When invoking the network setup, YaST scans for available network cards. If more than one network card is found, you must choose the card to configure from the list.
If an ethernet network adapter is not already connected, a warning will open. Make sure the network cable is plugged in and choose . If your network is equipped with a DHCP server, choose . To manually set up the network choose and specify , , , and the .
Some networks require the use of a proxy server to access the Internet. Tick the check box and enter the appropriate specifications. Click to perform the network setup. The installation procedure will continue with the add-on products or repositories setup as described in Section 1.7.1, “Add-On Products”.
In this dialog, select your region and time zone. Both are preselected according to the selected installation language. To change the preselected values, either use the map or the drop down lists for and . When using the map, point the cursor at the rough direction of your region and left-click to zoom. Now choose your country or region by left-clicking. Right-click to return to the world map.
To set up the clock, choose whether the . If you run another operating system on your machine, such as Microsoft Windows, it is likely your system uses local time instead. If you only run Linux on your machine, set the hardware clock to UTC and have the switch from standard time to daylight saving time performed automatically.
If a network is already configured, the time is automatically synced via Network Time Protocol (NTP) with a time server. Click to either alter the NTP settings or to set the time. See Chapter 13, Time Synchronization with NTP for more information on configuring the NTP service. When finished, click to continue the installation.
In openSUSE, you can choose from various desktops. The major ones, and , are powerful graphical desktop environments similar to Windows. This step is skipped when installing from a LiveCD, since this medium is already preconfigured to either use KDE or GNOME.
If you prefer a different desktop, choose for more options. The and the are fast and lightweight desktop environments suitable for modest hardware. With , install a graphical window manager that allows for running stand-alone X applications and console windows but does not provide the usual integrated desktop functionality. In , only console terminals are available.
Define a partition setup for openSUSE in this step. In most cases a reasonable scheme that can be accepted without change is proposed. If a hard disk containing only Windows FAT or NTFS partitions is selected as the installation target, YaST proposes to shrink one of these partitions. Accept the proposal with and proceed with the installation. Experienced users can also customize the proposal or apply their own partitioning scheme.
The proposed partitioning is by default. If you prefer an setup, check the respective option to automatically convert the proposal. Refer to Section 3.2, “LVM Configuration” for more information about the Logical Volume Manager (LVM).
To make small changes in the proposal (like changing the file system type or encrypt partitions), select and adjust the settings. See Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner” for instructions.
If your machine contains more than one hard disk and you want to restrict the partitioning proposal to just one disk, choose and then select a specific disk from the list. If the chosen hard disk does not contain any partitions yet, the whole hard disk will be used for the proposal. Otherwise, you can choose which existing partition(s) to utilize. To add a separate partition for you personal data check . Instead of the default partition-based proposal, it is possible to . Choose two times to proceed to the next step.
If the selected hard disk only contains a Windows FAT or NTFS partition, YaST offers to delete or shrink this partition. If you select , the Windows partition is marked for deletion and the space is used for the installation of openSUSE.
![]() | Deleting Windows |
|---|---|
If you delete Windows, all data will be lost beyond recovery as soon as the formatting starts. | |
To , you need to interrupt the installation and boot Windows to prepare the partition before shrinking it. For all Windows file systems, proceed as follows:
Deactivate a Virtual Memory file, if there is one.
Run scandisk.
Run defrag.
After these preparations, restart the openSUSE installation. When you turn to the partitioning setup, proceed as before and select . After a quick check of the partition, the dialog for resizing the Windows partition opens.
The bar graph shows how much disk space is currently occupied by Windows and how much space is still available. To change the proposed settings use the slider or the input fields to adjust the partition sizing.
If you leave this dialog by selecting , the settings are stored and you are returned to the previous dialog. The actual resizing takes place later, before the hard disk is formatted.
![]() | Writing on NTFS Partitions |
|---|---|
By default, the Windows uses the NTFS file system. openSUSE includes read and write access to the NTFS file system, but this feature has a few limitations. This means that you cannot read or write encrypted or compressed files. Furthermore, the Windows file permissions are not honored at the moment. See http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:NTFS for more information. | |
Set up your own partitioning scheme by selecting and then . The Expert Partitioner opens, displaying the current partition setup. Expand the in the System View pane by clicking on the , then click on one of the listed hard disks. Now you can , , , or partitions. For more information about custom partitioning and configuring advanced features, refer to Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner”
Create a local user in this step. Administrating local users is a suitable option for stand-alone workstations. If setting up a client on a network with centralized user authentication, click and proceed with the Section 1.11.1, “Expert Settings”.
After entering the first name and last name, either accept the proposal or specify a new that will be used to log in. Finally, enter a password for the user. Reenter it for confirmation (to ensure that you did not type something else by mistake). To provide effective security, a password should be between five and eight characters long. The maximum length for a password is 72 characters. However, if no special security modules are loaded, only the first eight characters are used to discern the password. Passwords are case-sensitive. Special characters (7-bit ASCII) and the digits 0 to 9 are allowed. Other special characters like umlauts or accented characters are not allowed.
Passwords you enter are checked for weakness. When entering a password that is easy to guess (such as a dictionary word or a name) you will see a warning. It is a good security practice to use strong passwords.
![]() | Username and Password |
|---|---|
Remember both your username and the password because they are needed each time you log in to the system. | |
Three additional options are available:
If checked, the same password you have entered for the user will be
used for the system administrator root. This option is suitable
for stand-alone workstations or machines in a home network that are
administrated by a single user. When not checked, you are prompted for
a system administrator password in the next step of the installation
workflow (see Section 1.11.2, “Password for the System Administrator root”).
Checking this box sends messages created by the system services to the
user. These are usually only sent to root, the system
administrator. This option is useful for the most frequently used
account, because it is highly recommended to log in as root only
in special cases.
The mails sent by system services are stored in the local mailbox
/var/spool/mail/username,
where username is the login name of the
selected user. To read e-mails after installation, you can use any
e-mail client, for example KMail or Evolution.
This option automatically logs the current user in to the system when it starts. This is mainly useful if the computer is operated by only one user.
![]() | Automatic Login |
|---|---|
With the automatic login enabled, the system boots straight into your desktop with no authentication at all. If you store sensitive data on your system, you should not enable this option as long as the computer can also be accessed by others. | |
Click in the Create User dialog to set up network authentication or, if present, import users from a previous installation. Also change the password encryption type in this dialog.
You can also add additional user accounts or change the user authentication method in the installed system. For detailed information about user management, see Chapter 10, Managing Users with YaST (↑Start-Up).
The default authentication method is . If a former version of openSUSE or another
system using /etc/passwd is detected, you may
import local users. To do so, check and click . In
the next dialog, select the users to import and finish with
.
Access to the following network authentication services can be configured:
Users are administered centrally on an LDAP server for all systems in the network. More information is available in Section “Configuring an LDAP Client with YaST” (Chapter 4, LDAP—A Directory Service, ↑Security Guide).
Users are administered centrally on an NIS server for all systems in the network. See Section “Configuring NIS Clients” (Chapter 3, Using NIS, ↑Security Guide) for more information.
SMB authentication is often used in mixed Linux and Windows networks. and Section “Configuring a Linux Client for Active Directory” (Chapter 5, Active Directory Support, ↑Security Guide).
Along with user administration via and , you can use Kerberos authentication. To use it, select . For more information on Kerberos, refer to Chapter 6, Network Authentication with Kerberos (↑Security Guide).
root¶
If you have not chosen in the previous step, you will be prompted to
enter a Password for the System Administrator root. Otherwise this
configuration step is skipped.
root is the name of the superuser, or the administrator of the
system. Unlike regular users (who may or may not have permission to
access certain areas or execute certain commands on the system),
root has unlimited access to change the system configuration,
install programs, and set up new hardware. If users forget their
passwords or have other problems with the system, root can help.
The root account should only be used for system administration,
maintenance, and repair. Logging in as root for daily work is
rather risky: a single mistake could lead to irretrievable loss of
system files.
For verification purposes, the password for root must be entered
twice. Do not forget the root password. Once entered, this
password cannot be retrieved.
The root can be changed any time later in the installed system. To
do so run YaST and start +.
![]() | The root User |
|---|---|
The user | |
On the last step before the real installation takes place, you can alter installation settings suggested by YaST and also review the settings you made so far. To modify the suggestions, either click and select the category to change or click on one of the headlines. After configuring any of the items presented in these dialogs, you are always returned to the Installation Settings window, which is updated accordingly.
![]() | Restoring the Default Settings |
|---|---|
You can reset all changes to the defaults by clicking +. YaST then shows the original proposal again. | |
Review and, if necessary, change the partition setup you configured earlier. Modifying the partition setup opens the Expert Partitioner described in Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner”.
YaST proposes a boot configuration for your system. Other operating systems found on your computer, such as Microsoft Windows or other Linux installations, will automatically be detected and added to the boot loader. However, openSUSE will be booted by default. Normally, you can leave these settings unchanged. If you need a custom setup, modify the proposal for your system. For information, see Section 6.2, “Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST”. The boot method should only be changed by experienced users.
openSUSE contains a number of software patterns for various application purposes. Click to start the pattern selection and modify the installation scope according to your needs. Select your pattern from the list and see a pattern description in the right part of the window. Each pattern contains a number of software packages needed for specific functions (e.g. Multimedia or Office software). For a more detailed selection based on software packages to install, select to switch to the YaST Software Manager.
You can also install additional software packages or remove software packages from your system at any later time with the YaST Software Manager. For more information, refer to Chapter 5, Installing or Removing Software (↑Start-Up).
Here you can change the system
and you defined in the first step of the
installation. It is also possible to add additional languages. To adjust
the system language settings, select . Select
a language from the list. The primary language is used as the system
language. You can also adapt keyboard layout and time zone to the
primary language if the current settings differ.
lets you modify language settings for the
user root, set UTF-8 support, or further
specify the language (e.g. select South African English).
Choose secondary languages to be able to switch to one of these languages at any time without having to install additional packages. For more information, see Chapter 11, Changing Language and Country Settings with YaST (↑Start-Up).
To change the keyboard layout, select . By default, the layout corresponds to the language chosen for installation. Select the keyboard layout from the list. Use the field at the bottom of the dialog to check if you can enter special characters of that layout correctly. Options to fine-tune various settings are available under . When finished, click to return to the installation summary.
Adjust time zone and clock settings here. Provided a network is configured, you can also set up a Network Time Protocol (NTP) client that automatically synchronizes your computer with a time server. This is the same configuration as shown earlier in Section 1.8, “Clock and Time Zone”.
Change the current settings and change or set the here. This is the same configuration as shown earlier in Section 1.11, “Create New User”.
openSUSE can boot to different runlevels. Normally, there should be no need to change anything here, but if necessary set the default runlevel with this dialog.
This dialog presents all the hardware information YaST could obtain about your computer. When called, the hardware detection routine is started. Depending on your system, this may take some time. Select any item in the list and click to see detailed information about the selected item. Use to save a detailed list to either the local file system or a floppy. Advanced users can also change the PCI ID setup and Kernel Settings by choosing .
Installing from images considerably speeds up the installation. Images contain compressed snapshots of installed systems matching your selection of patterns. Packages not contained in the images deployed will be installed conventionally.
Unless your custom software selection does not match any of the available images, this feature is by default. In case of problems, it for debugging purposes.
By default SuSEFirewall2 is enabled on all configured network interfaces. To globally disable the firewall for this computer, click on . If the firewall is enabled, you may the SSH port in order to allow remote connections via secure shell.
After configuring all installation settings, click in the Installation Settings window to start the installation. Some software may require a license confirmation. If your software selection includes such software, license confirmation dialogs are displayed. Click to install the software package. When not agreeing to the license, click and the software package will not be installed. In the dialog that follows, confirm with again.
The installation usually takes between 15 and 30 minutes, depending on the system performance and the selected software scope. After having prepared the hard disk, having saved and restored the user settings, and having deployed the installation images, the software installation starts. During this procedure a slide show introduces the features of openSUSE. Choose to switch to the installation log or to read important up-to-date information which was not available when the manuals were printed.
After the software installation has completed, the basic system is set up. Among others, “Finishing the Basic Installation” includes installing the boot manager, initializing fonts and more. Next YaST boots into the new Linux system to start the system configuration.
![]() | Existing SSH Host Keys |
|---|---|
If you install openSUSE on a machine with existing Linux installations, the installation routine automatically imports the SSH host key with the most recent access time from an existing installation. | |
The system is now installed, but not yet configured for use. The hardware, the network and other services are not yet set up. If you follow the default installation path, the system will be automatically configured. If you have deselected the , the manual system configuration starts.
Having rebooted, the system starts the Automatic Configuration. This routine attempts to configure your network and Internet access and sets up your hardware. This process does not need any interaction. You can change the settings made by Automatic Configuration at any time on the installed system with YaST. Continue with Section 1.15, “Graphical Login”.
Having rebooted, the system starts the manual configuration. If the configuration fails at one of the steps of this stage, it restarts and continues from the last successful step.
The hostname is the computer's name in the network. The domain name is the name of the network. A hostname and domain are proposed by default. If your system is part of a network, the hostname has to be unique in this network, whereas the domain name has to be common to all hosts on the network.
In many networks, the system receives its name over DHCP. In this case
it is not necessary to modify the proposed hostname and domain name.
Select instead. To be able
to access your system using this hostname, even when it is not
connected to the network, select . Do n ot enable this option when your machine provides
network services. If you often change networks without restarting the
desktop environment (e.g. when switching between different WLANs), do
not enable this option either, because the desktop system may get
confused when the hostname in /etc/hosts changes.
To change hostname settings at any time after installation, use YaST +. For more information, see Section 9.4.1, “Configuring the Network Card with YaST”.
If you are installing openSUSE on a laptop computer, is enabled. NetworkManager is a tool that enables automatic connection with minimal user intervention. It is ideal for WLAN and mobile computing. If you want to use the traditional method without NetworkManager, click . Find detailed information about NetworkManager in Chapter 21, Using NetworkManager. If you are installing openSUSE on any other type of machine, the traditional method without NetworkManager is selected by default. This configuration step also lets you configure the network devices of your system and make security settings, for example, for a firewall or proxy.
The network can also be configured after the system installation has been completed. If you skip it now, your system is left offline unable to retrieve any available updates. To configure your network connection later, select and click .
The following network settings can be configured in this step:
Enable or disable the use of NetworkManager as described above. Also change the IPv6 support here. By default the IPv6 support is enabled. To disable it, click . For more information about IPv6, see Section 9.2, “IPv6—The Next Generation Internet”.
By default SuSEFirewall2 is enabled on all configured network interfaces. To globally disable the firewall for this computer, click on . If the firewall is enabled, you may the SSH port in order to allow remote connections via secure shell. To open the detailed firewall configuration dialog, click on . See Section “Configuring the Firewall with YaST” (Chapter 13, Masquerading and Firewalls, ↑Security Guide) for detailed information.
All network cards detected by YaST are listed here. If you have already set up a network connection during the installation (as described in Section 1.7.1.1, “Network Setup”) the card used for this connection is listed as . A click on opens the dialog, where you can change existing configurations, set up networks cards not configured yet, or add and configure additional cards.
If your computer is equipped with an internal DSL modem, an internal ADSL Fritz Card, an ISDN card or a modem, clicking on the respective headline opens the configuration dialog.
To enable remote administration of your machine via VNC, click . Choose in the following dialog and adjust your firewall settings accordingly.
If you have a proxy server controlling the Internet access in your network, configure the proxy URLs and authentication details in this dialog.
![]() | Resetting the Network Configuration to the Default Values |
|---|---|
Reset the network settings to the original proposed values by clicking +. This discards any changes made. | |
After having configured a network connection, you can test it. For this purpose, YaST establishes a connection to the openSUSE server and downloads the latest release notes. Read them at the end of the installation process. A successful test is also a prerequisite for the automatic addition of the default repositories and for updating online.
If you have multiple network interfaces, verify that the desired card is used to connect to the Internet. If not, click .
To start the test, select and click . In the following dialog, view the progress of the test and the results. Detailed information about the test process is available via . If the test fails, click to return to the network configuration to correct your entries.
Proceed with . If the test was successful, the official software repositories for openSUSE and the update repository will be configured. Downloading the repository data for the first time may take some time.
If you do not want to test the connection at this point, select then . This also skips downloading the release notes, and updating online. These steps can be performed any time after the system has been initially configured.
If an Internet connection has been established, and updates are available, select whether to perform a YaST online update. If there are any patched packages available on the servers, download and install them now to fix known bugs or security issues. For detailed instructions see Chapter 6, YaST Online Update (↑Start-Up). Directives on how to perform an online update in the installed system are available at Section “Keeping the System Up-to-date” (Chapter 5, Installing or Removing Software, ↑Start-Up) or Chapter 6, YaST Online Update (↑Start-Up). This step is skipped if no updates are available or no Internet connection has been established. Patches fixing security issues and recommended patches applying to your installation are automatically preselected. Click to install them and to proceed with the system configuration.
![]() | Downloading Software Updates |
|---|---|
The download of updates might take quite some time, depending on the bandwidth of the Internet connection and the size of the update files. In case the patch system itself is updated, the online update will restart and download more patches after the restart. If the kernel was updated, the system will reboot before completing the configuration. | |
If no local user was created in step one, you can create one in this dialog. To create more users, manage groups, modify defaults for new users and set up network authentication, launch . Refer to Chapter 10, Managing Users with YaST (↑Start-Up) for more information about user management. To skip this step, click without entering any data.
After completing the user authentication setup, YaST displays the release notes. Reading them is recommended, because they contain important up-to-date information which was not available when the manuals were printed. If you successfully tested the Internet connection, read the most recent version of the release notes, as fetched from openSUSE's servers. Use + in YaST or start the SUSE Help Center to view the release notes after installation.
At the end of the installation, YaST opens a dialog for the configuration of . Click the individual components to start the hardware configuration. For the most part, YaST detects and configures the devices automatically.
You can skip any peripheral devices and configure them later, as described in Chapter 13, Setting Up Hardware Components with YaST (↑Start-Up). To skip the configuration, select and click .
![]() | Resetting Hardware Configuration to the Default Values |
|---|---|
You can cancel any changes to the hardware configuration by clicking +. YaST then shows the original proposal again. | |
After a successful installation, YaST shows the Installation
Completed dialog. In this dialog, select whether to clone your newly
installed system for AutoYaST. To clone your system, select . The profile of the current system is
stored in /root/autoyast.xml.
AutoYaST is a system for installing one or more openSUSE systems automatically without user intervention. AutoYaST installations are performed using a control file with installation and configuration data. Finish the installation of openSUSE with in the final dialog.
openSUSE is now fully installed and configured. Unless you enabled the automatic login function or customized the default runlevel, you should see the graphical login on your screen in which to enter a username and password to log into the system. On single user systems with automatic login enabled, the desktop starts automatically.
For a short introduction to the KDE or GNOME desktop environments, refer to the Chapter 3, GNOME Quick Start (↑Start-Up) and the Chapter 2, KDE Quick Start (↑Start-Up). These manuals can be accessed via the function in both KDE and GNOME.
Contents
openSUSE® can be installed in different ways. As well as the usual media installation covered in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST, you can choose from various network-based approaches or even take a completely hands-off approach to the installation of openSUSE.
Each method is introduced by means of two short check lists: one listing the prerequisites for this method and the other illustrating the basic procedure. More detail is then provided for all the techniques used in these installation scenarios.
![]() | |
In the following sections, the system to hold your new openSUSE installation is referred to as target system or installation target. The term repository (previously called “installation source”) is used for all sources of installation data. This includes physical media, such as CD and DVD, and network servers distributing the installation data in your network. | |
This section introduces the most common installation scenarios for remote installations. For each scenario, carefully check the list of prerequisites and follow the procedure outlined for this scenario. If in need of detailed instructions for a particular step, follow the links provided for each one of them.
This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation. The installation itself is entirely controlled by a remote workstation using VNC to connect to the installation program. User interaction is required as with the manual installation in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST.
For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
Target system with working network connection.
Controlling system with working network connection and VNC viewer software or Java-enabled browser (Firefox, Konqueror, Internet Explorer, Opera, etc.).
Physical boot medium (CD, DVD, or USB flash drive) for booting the target system.
Valid static IP addresses already assigned to the repository and the controlling system.
Valid static IP address to assign to the target system.
To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server. For an SMB repository, refer to Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot options prompt to set the appropriate VNC options and the address of the repository. This is described in detail in Section 2.4, “Booting the Target System for Installation”.
The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving the
network address and display number under which the graphical
installation environment can be addressed by any VNC viewer
application or browser. VNC installations announce themselves over
OpenSLP and if the firewall settings permit, they can be found using
Konqueror in service:/ or slp:/
mode.
On the controlling workstation, open a VNC viewing application or Web browser and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.1, “VNC Installation”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation. The network configuration is made with DHCP. The installation itself is entirely controlled from a remote workstation using VNC to connect to the installer, but still requires user interaction for the actual configuration efforts.
For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
Target system with working network connection.
Controlling system with working network connection and VNC viewer software or Java-enabled browser (Firefox, Konqueror, Internet Explorer, or Opera).
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
Running DHCP server providing IP addresses.
To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server. For an SMB repository, refer to Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot options prompt to set the appropriate VNC options and the address of the repository. This is described in detail in Section 2.4, “Booting the Target System for Installation”.
The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving the
network address and display number under which the graphical
installation environment can be addressed by any VNC viewer
application or browser. VNC installations announce themselves over
OpenSLP and if the firewall settings permit, they can be found using
Konqueror in service:/ or slp:/
mode.
On the controlling workstation, open a VNC viewing application or Web browser and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.1, “VNC Installation”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
This type of installation is completely hands-off. The target machine is started and booted remotely. User interaction is only needed for the actual installation. This approach is suitable for cross-site deployments.
To perform this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
TFTP server.
Running DHCP server for your network.
Target system capable of PXE boot, networking, and Wake on LAN, plugged in and connected to the network.
Controlling system with working network connection and VNC viewer software or Java-enabled browser (Firefox, Konqueror, Internet Explorer, or Opera).
To perform this type of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server or configure an SMB repository as described in Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Set up a TFTP server to hold a boot image that can be pulled by the target system. This is described in Section 2.3.2, “Setting Up a TFTP Server”.
Set up a DHCP server to provide IP addresses to all machines and reveal the location of the TFTP server to the target system. This is described in Section 2.3.1, “Setting Up a DHCP Server”.
Prepare the target system for PXE boot. This is described in further detail in Section 2.3.5, “Preparing the Target System for PXE Boot”.
Initiate the boot process of the target system using Wake on LAN. This is described in Section 2.3.7, “Wake on LAN”.
On the controlling workstation, open a VNC viewing application or Web browser and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.1, “VNC Installation”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation and to determine the IP address of the installation target. The installation itself is entirely controlled from a remote workstation using SSH to connect to the installer. User interaction is required as with the regular installation described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST.
For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
Target system with working network connection.
Controlling system with working network connection and working SSH client software.
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
Valid static IP addresses already assigned to the repository and the controlling system.
Valid static IP address to assign to the target system.
To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server. For an SMB repository, refer to Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot options prompt to set the appropriate parameters for network connection, address of the repository, and SSH enablement. This is described in detail in Section 2.4.2, “Using Custom Boot Options”.
The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving the network address under which the graphical installation environment can be addressed by any SSH client.
On the controlling workstation, open a terminal window and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.2.2, “Connecting to the Installation Program”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
This type of installation still requires some degree of physical access to the target system to boot for installation and determine the IP address of the installation target. The installation itself is entirely controlled from a remote workstation using VNC to connect to the installer, but still requires user interaction for the actual configuration efforts.
For this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
Target system with working network connection.
Controlling system with working network connection and working SSH client software.
Physical boot medium (CD, DVD, or USB flash drive) for booting the target system.
Running DHCP server providing IP addresses.
To perform this kind of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository source as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server. For an SMB repository, refer to Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Boot the target system using a boot medium (DVD, CD, or USB flash drive) of the openSUSE media kit. For more information about the openSUSE media kit, see Section 1.1, “Choosing the Installation Media”.
When the boot screen of the target system appears, use the boot options prompt to pass the appropriate parameters for network connection, location of the installation source, and SSH enablement. See Section 2.4.2, “Using Custom Boot Options” for detailed instructions on the use of these parameters.
The target system boots to a text-based environment, giving you the network address under which the graphical installation environment can be addressed by any SSH client.
On the controlling workstation, open a terminal window and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.2.2, “Connecting to the Installation Program”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
This type of installation is completely hands-off. The target machine is started and booted remotely.
To perform this type of installation, make sure that the following requirements are met:
Remote repository: NFS, HTTP, FTP, or SMB with working network connection.
TFTP server.
Running DHCP server for your network, providing a static IP to the host to install.
Target system capable of PXE boot, networking, and Wake on LAN, plugged in and connected to the network.
Controlling system with working network connection and SSH client software.
To perform this type of installation, proceed as follows:
Set up the repository as described in Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. Choose an NFS, HTTP, or FTP network server. For the configuration of an SMB repository, refer to Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository”.
Set up a TFTP server to hold a boot image that can be pulled by the target system. This is described in Section 2.3.2, “Setting Up a TFTP Server”.
Set up a DHCP server to provide IP addresses to all machines and reveal the location of the TFTP server to the target system. This is described in Section 2.3.1, “Setting Up a DHCP Server”.
Prepare the target system for PXE boot. This is described in further detail in Section 2.3.5, “Preparing the Target System for PXE Boot”.
Initiate the boot process of the target system using Wake on LAN. This is described in Section 2.3.7, “Wake on LAN”.
On the controlling workstation, start an SSH client and connect to the target system as described in Section 2.5.2, “SSH Installation”.
Perform the installation as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Reconnect to the target system after it reboots for the final part of the installation.
Finish the installation.
Depending on the operating system running on the machine to use as the network installation source for openSUSE, there are several options for the server configuration. The easiest way to set up an installation server is to use YaST on openSUSE 11.1 and higher.
![]() | |
You can even use a Microsoft Windows machine as the installation server for your Linux deployment. See Section 2.2.5, “Managing an SMB Repository” for details. | |
YaST offers a graphical tool for creating network repositories. It supports HTTP, FTP, and NFS network installation servers.
Log in as root to the machine that should act as installation
server.
Install the yast2-instserver
package.
Start ++.
Select the repository type (HTTP, FTP, or NFS). The selected service is started automatically every time the system starts. If a service of the selected type is already running on your system and you want to configure it manually for the server, deactivate the automatic configuration of the server service with . In both cases, define the directory in which the installation data should be made available on the server.
Configure the required repository type. This step relates to the automatic configuration of server services. It is skipped when automatic configuration is deactivated.
Define an alias for the root directory of the FTP or HTTP server on
which the installation data should be found. The repository will later
be located under
ftp://
(FTP) or under
Server-IP/Alias/Namehttp://
(HTTP). Server-IP/Alias/NameName stands for the name of the
repository, which is defined in the following step. If you selected
NFS in the previous step, define wild cards and export options. The
NFS server will be accessible under
nfs://.
Details of NFS and exports can be found in Chapter 14, Sharing File Systems with NFS.
Server-IP/Name
![]() | Firewall Settings |
|---|---|
Make sure that the firewall settings of your server system allow traffic on the ports for HTTP, NFS, and FTP. If they currently do not, enable or check first. | |
Configure the repository. Before the installation media are copied to their destination, define the name of the repository (ideally, an easily remembered abbreviation of the product and version). YaST allows providing ISO images of the media instead of copies of the installation DVDs. If you want this, activate the relevant check box and specify the directory path under which the ISO files can be found locally. Depending on the product to distribute using this installation server, it might be that more add-on CDs or service pack CDs are required and should be added as extra repositories. To announce your installation server in the network via OpenSLP, activate the appropriate option.
![]() | |
Consider announcing your repository via OpenSLP if your network setup supports this option. This saves you from entering the network installation path on every target machine. The target systems are just booted using the SLP boot option and find the network repository without any further configuration. For details on this option, refer to Section 2.4, “Booting the Target System for Installation”. | |
Upload the installation data. The most lengthy step in configuring an installation server is copying the actual installation media. Insert the media in the sequence requested by YaST and wait for the copying procedure to end. When the sources have been fully copied, return to the overview of existing repositories and close the configuration by selecting .
Your installation server is now fully configured and ready for service. It is automatically started every time the system is started. No further intervention is required. You only need to configure and start this service correctly by hand if you have deactivated the automatic configuration of the selected network service with YaST as an initial step.
To deactivate a repository, select the repository to remove then select . The installation data are removed from the system. To deactivate the network service, use the respective YaST module.
If your installation server needs to provide the installation data for more than one product of the product version, start the YaST installation server module and select in the overview of existing repositories to configure the new repository.
Setting up an NFS source for installation is basically done in two steps. In the first step, create the directory structure holding the installation data and copy the installation media over to this structure. Second, export the directory holding the installation data to the network.
To create a directory to hold the installation data, proceed as follows:
Log in as root.
Create a directory that will later hold all installation data and change into this directory. For example:
mkdir install/product/productversion
cd install/product/productversion
Replace product with an abbreviation of the
product name and productversion with a
string that contains the product name and version.
For each DVD contained in the media kit execute the following commands:
Copy the entire content of the installation DVD into the installation server directory:
cp -a /media/path_to_your_DVD_drive .
Replace path_to_your_DVD_drive with the
actual path under which your DVD drive is addressed. Depending on
the type of drive used in your system, this can be
cdrom, cdrecorder,
dvd, or dvdrecorder.
Rename the directory to the DVD number:
mvpath_to_your_DVD_driveDVDx
Replace x with the actual number of your
DVD.
On openSUSE, you can export the repository with NFS using YaST. Proceed as follows:
Log in as root.
Start ++.
Select and and click .
Select and browse for the directory
containing the installation sources, in this case,
.
productversion
Select and enter the hostnames of the
machines to which to export the installation data. Instead of
specifying hostnames here, you could also use wild cards, ranges of
network addresses, or just the domain name of your network. Enter the
appropriate export options or leave the default, which works fine in
most setups. For more information about the syntax used in exporting
NFS shares, read the exports man page.
Click . The NFS server holding the openSUSE repository is automatically started and integrated into the boot process.
If you prefer manually exporting the repository via NFS instead of using the YaST NFS Server module, proceed as follows:
Log in as root.
Open the file /etc/exports and enter the
following line:
/productversion *(ro,root_squash,sync)
This exports the directory
/ to any
host that is part of this network or to any host that can connect to
this server. To limit the access to this server, use netmasks or
domain names instead of the general wild card productversion*.
Refer to the export man page for details.
Save and exit this configuration file.
To add the NFS service to the list of servers started during system boot, execute the following commands:
insserv /etc/init.d/nfsserver
Start the NFS server with rcnfsserver start. If you need to change the configuration of your NFS server later, modify the configuration file and restart the NFS daemon with rcnfsserver restart.
Announcing the NFS server via OpenSLP makes its address known to all clients in your network.
Log in as root.
Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.nfs.reg
configuration file with the following lines:
# Register the NFS Installation Server
service:install.suse:nfs://$HOSTNAME/path_to_repository/DVD1,en,65535
description=NFS Repository
Replace path_to_repository with the actual
path to the installation source on your server.
Start the OpenSLP daemon with rcslpd start.
For more information about OpenSLP, refer to the package documentation
located under /usr/share/doc/packages/openslp/ or
refer to Chapter 10, SLP Services in the Network. More Information about NFS, refer to
Chapter 14, Sharing File Systems with NFS.
Creating an FTP repository is very similar to creating an NFS repository. An FTP repository can be announced over the network using OpenSLP as well.
Create a directory holding the installation sources as described in Section 2.2.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”.
Configure the FTP server to distribute the contents of your installation directory:
Log in as root and install the package
vsftpd using the YaST software
management.
Enter the FTP server root directory:
cd /srv/ftpCreate a subdirectory holding the installation sources in the FTP root directory:
mkdir repository
Replace repository with the product name.
Mount the contents of the installation repository into the change root environment of the FTP server:
mount --bindpath_to_repository/srv/ftp/repository
Replace path_to_repository and
repository with values matching your
setup. If you need to make this permanent, add it to
/etc/fstab.
Start vsftpd with vsftpd.
Announce the repository via OpenSLP, if this is supported by your network setup:
Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.ftp.reg
configuration file with the following lines:
# Register the FTP Installation Server
service:install.suse:ftp://$HOSTNAME/repository/DVD1,en,65535
description=FTP Repository
Replace repository with the actual name
to the repository directory on your server. The
service: line should be entered as one continuous
line.
Start the OpenSLP daemon with rcslpd start.
![]() | Configuring an FTP Server with YaST |
|---|---|
If you prefer using YaST over manually configuring the FTP installation server, refer to Chapter 17, Setting up an FTP server with YaST for more information on how to use the YaST FTP server module. | |
Creating an HTTP repository is very similar to creating an NFS repository. An HTTP repository can be announced over the network using OpenSLP as well.
Create a directory holding the installation sources as described in Section 2.2.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”.
Configure the HTTP server to distribute the contents of your installation directory:
Install the Web server Apache as described in Section 16.1.2, “Installation”.
Enter the root directory of the HTTP server
(/srv/www/htdocs) and create the subdirectory
that will hold the installation sources:
mkdir repository
Replace repository with the product name.
Create a symbolic link from the location of the installation sources
to the root directory of the Web server
(/srv/www/htdocs):
ln -s/path_to_repository/srv/www/htdocs/repository
Modify the configuration file of the HTTP server
(/etc/apache2/default-server.conf) to make it
follow symbolic links. Replace the following line:
Options None
with
Options Indexes FollowSymLinks
Reload the HTTP server configuration using rcapache2 reload.
Announce the repository via OpenSLP, if this is supported by your network setup:
Create the /etc/slp.reg.d/install.suse.http.reg
configuration file with the following lines:
# Register the HTTP Installation Server
service:install.suse:http://$HOSTNAME/repository/DVD1/,en,65535
description=HTTP Repository
Replace repository with the actual path
to the repository on your server. The service:
line should be entered as one continuous line.
Start the OpenSLP daemon using rcslpd restart.
Using SMB, you can import the installation sources from a Microsoft Windows server and start your Linux deployment even with no Linux machine around.
To set up an exported Windows Share holding your openSUSE repository, proceed as follows:
Log in to your Windows machine.
Create a new folder that will hold the entire installation tree and
name it INSTALL, for example.
Export this share according the procedure outlined in your Windows documentation.
Enter this share and create a subfolder, called
. Replace
productproduct with the actual product name.
Enter the
INSTALL/ folder
and copy each DVD to a separate folder, such as
productDVD1 and DVD2.
To use a SMB mounted share as a repository, proceed as follows:
Instead of copying physical media into your server directory manually, you can also mount the ISO images of the installation media into your installation server and use them as a repository. To set up an HTTP, NFS or FTP server that uses ISO images instead of media copies, proceed as follows:
Download the ISO images and save them to the machine to use as the installation server.
Log in as root.
Choose and create an appropriate location for the installation data, as described in Section 2.2.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”, Section 2.2.3, “Setting Up an FTP Repository Manually”, or Section 2.2.4, “Setting Up an HTTP Repository Manually”.
Create subdirectories for each DVD.
To mount and unpack each ISO image to the final location, issue the following command:
mount -o looppath_to_isopath_to_repository/product/mediumx
Replace path_to_iso with the path to your
local copy of the ISO image,
path_to_repository with the source
directory of your server, product with the
product name, and mediumx with the type (CD
or DVD) and number of media you are using.
Repeat the previous step to mount all ISO images needed for your product.
Start your installation server as usual, as described in Section 2.2.2, “Setting Up an NFS Repository Manually”, Section 2.2.3, “Setting Up an FTP Repository Manually”, or Section 2.2.4, “Setting Up an HTTP Repository Manually”.
To automatically mount the ISO images at boot time, add the respective
mount entries to /etc/fstab. An entry according to
the previous example would look like the following:
path_to_isopath_to_repository/productmediumauto loop
This section covers the configuration tasks needed in complex boot scenarios. It contains ready-to-apply configuration examples for DHCP, PXE boot, TFTP, and Wake on LAN.
There are two ways to set up a DHCP server. For openSUSE, YaST provides a graphical interface to the process. Users can also manually edit the configuration files. For more information about DHCP servers, see also Chapter 12, DHCP.
To announce the TFTP server's location to the network clients and specify the boot image file the installation target should use, add two declarations to your DHCP server configuration.
Log in as root to the machine hosting the DHCP server.
Install the
yast2-dhcp-server package.
Start ++.
Complete the setup wizard for basic DHCP server setup.
Select and select when warned about leaving the start-up dialog.
In the dialog, select the subnet in which the new system should be located and click .
In the dialog select to add a new option to the subnet's configuration.
Select filename and enter
pxelinux.0 as the value.
Add another option (next-server) and set its value
to the address of the TFTP server.
Select and to complete the DHCP server configuration.
To configure DHCP to provide a static IP address to a specific host,
enter the of the DHCP server
configuration module
(Step 5)
and add a new declaration of the host type. Add the options
hardware and fixed-address to this
host declaration and provide the appropriate values.
All the DHCP server needs to do, apart from providing automatic address allocation to your network clients, is to announce the IP address of the TFTP server and the file that needs to be pulled in by the installation routines on the target machine.
Log in as root to the machine hosting the DHCP server.
Append the following lines to a subnet configuration of your DHCP
server's configuration file located under
/etc/dhcpd.conf:
subnet 192.168.1.0 netmask 255.255.255.0 {
range dynamic-bootp 192.168.1.200 192.168.1.228;
# PXE related stuff
#
# "next-server" defines the tftp server that will be used
next-server ip_tftp_server:
#
# "filename" specifies the pxelinux image on the tftp server
# the server runs in chroot under /srv/tftpboot
filename "pxelinux.0";
}
Replace
ip_of_the_tftp_server with the actual IP
address of the TFTP server. For more information about the options
available in dhcpd.conf, refer to the
dhcpd.conf manual page.
Restart the DHCP server by executing rcdhcpd restart.
If you plan on using SSH for the remote control of a PXE and Wake on LAN installation, explicitly specify the IP address DHCP should provide to the installation target. To achieve this, modify the above mentioned DHCP configuration according to the following example:
group {
# PXE related stuff
#
# "next-server" defines the tftp server that will be used
next-server ip_tftp_server:
#
# "filename" specifies the pxelinux image on the tftp server
# the server runs in chroot under /srv/tftpboot
filename "pxelinux.0";
host test {
hardware ethernet mac_address;
fixed-address some_ip_address;
}
}
The host statement introduces the hostname of the installation target. To bind the hostname and IP address to a specific host, you must know and specify the system's hardware (MAC) address. Replace all the variables used in this example with the actual values that match your environment.
After restarting the DHCP server, it provides a static IP to the host specified, enabling you to connect to the system via SSH.
Set up a TFTP server with YaST or set it up manually on any other Linux operating system that supports xinetd and TFTP. The TFTP server delivers the boot image to the target system once it boots and sends a request for it.
Log in as root.
Install the
yast2-tftp-server package.
Start ++ and install the requested package.
Click to make sure that the server is started and included in the boot routines. No further action from your side is required to secure this. xinetd starts tftpd at boot time.
Click to open the appropriate port in the firewall running on your machine. If there is no firewall running on your server, this option is not available.
Click to browse for the boot image
directory. The default directory /tftpboot is
created and selected automatically.
Click to apply your settings and start the server.
Log in as root and install the packages
tftp and xinetd.
If unavailable, create /srv/tftpboot and
/srv/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg directories.
Add the appropriate files needed for the boot image as described in Section 2.3.3, “Using PXE Boot”.
Modify the configuration of xinetd located under
/etc/xinetd.d to make sure that the TFTP server
is started on boot:
If it does not exist, create a file called
tftp under this directory with touch
tftp. Then run chmod 755 tftp.
Open the file tftp and add the following
lines:
service tftp
{
socket_type = dgram
protocol = udp
wait = yes
user = root
server = /usr/sbin/in.tftpd
server_args = -s /srv/tftpboot
disable = no
}
Save the file and restart xinetd with rcxinetd restart.
Some technical background information as well as PXE's complete specifications are available in the Preboot Execution Environment (PXE) Specification (http://www.pix.net/software/pxeboot/archive/pxespec.pdf).
Change to the directory
boot/<architecture>/loader of your
installation repository and copy the linux,
initrd, message,
biostest, and memtest files
to the /srv/tftpboot directory by entering the
following:
cp -a linux initrd message biostest memtest /srv/tftpboot
Install the syslinux package directly from
your installation DVDs with YaST.
Copy the /usr/share/syslinux/pxelinux.0 file to
the /srv/tftpboot directory by entering the
following:
cp -a /usr/share/syslinux/pxelinux.0 /srv/tftpboot
Change to the directory of your installation repository and copy the
isolinux.cfg file to
/srv/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default by entering the
following:
cp -a boot/<architecture>/loader/isolinux.cfg /srv/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default
Edit the /srv/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default file
and remove the lines beginning with gfxboot,
readinfo, and framebuffer.
Insert the following entries in the append lines of the default
failsafe and apic labels:
insmod=kernel module
By means of this entry, enter the network Kernel module needed to
support network installation on the PXE client. Replace
kernel module with the appropriate
module name for your network device.
netdevice=interface
This entry defines the client's network interface that must be used for the network installation. It is only necessary if the client is equipped with several network cards and must be adapted accordingly. In case of a single network card, this entry can be omitted.
install=nfs://ip_instserver/path_to_repository/DVD1
This entry defines the NFS server and the repository for the client
installation. Replace
ip_instserver with the actual IP address
of your installation server.
path_to_repository should be replaced
with the actual path to the repository. HTTP, FTP, or SMB
repositories are addressed in a similar manner, except for the
protocol prefix, which should read http,
ftp, or smb.
![]() | |
If you need to pass other boot options to the installation
routines, such as SSH or VNC boot parameters, append them to the
| |
![]() | Changing Kernel and initrd Filenames |
|---|---|
It is possible to use different filenames for Kernel and initrd images. This is useful if you want to provide different operating systems from the same boot server. However, you should be aware that only one dot is permitted in the filenames that are provided by TFTP for the PXE boot. | |
An example /srv/tftpboot/pxelinux.cfg/default file
follows. Adjust the protocol prefix for the repository to match your
network setup and specify your preferred method of connecting to the
installer by adding the vnc and
vncpassword or the usessh and
sshpassword options to the
install entry. The lines separated by
\ must be entered as one continuous line without a
line break and without the \.
default harddisk
# default
label linux
kernel linux
append initrd=initrd ramdisk_size=65536 \
install=nfs://ip_instserver/path_to_repository/product/DVD1
# rescue
label rescue
kernel linux
append initrd=initrd ramdisk_size=65536 rescue=1
# bios test
label firmware
kernel linux
append initrd=biostest,initrd splash=silent install=exec:/bin/run_biostest showopts
# memory test
label memtest
kernel memtest
# hard disk
label harddisk
localboot 0
implicit 0
display message
prompt 1
timeout 100
Replace
ip_instserver and
path_to_repository with the values used in
your setup.
The following section serves as a short reference to the PXELINUX
options used in this setup. Find more information about the options
available in the documentation of the
syslinux package located under
/usr/share/doc/packages/syslinux/.
The options listed here are a subset of all the options available for the PXELINUX configuration file.
DEFAULT kernel options...
Sets the default Kernel command line. If PXELINUX boots automatically, it acts as if the entries after DEFAULT had been typed in at the boot prompt, except the auto option is automatically added, indicating an automatic boot.
If no configuration file is present or no DEFAULT entry is present in the configuration file, the default is the Kernel name “linux” with no options.
APPEND options...
Add one or more options to the Kernel command line. These are added for both automatic and manual boots. The options are added at the very beginning of the Kernel command line, usually permitting explicitly entered Kernel options to override them.
LABEL label KERNEL image
APPEND options...
Indicates that if label is entered as the
Kernel to boot, PXELINUX should instead boot
image and the specified
APPEND options should be used instead of the ones
specified in the global section of the file (before the first
LABEL command). The default for
image is the same as
label and, if no APPEND
is given, the default is to use the global entry (if any). Up to 128
LABEL entries are permitted.
Note that GRUB uses the following syntax:
title mytitle kernelmy_kernelmy_kernel_optionsinitrdmyinitrd
PXELINUX uses the following syntax:
labelmylabelkernelmykernelappendmyoptions
Labels are mangled as if they were filenames and they must be unique after mangling. For example, the two labels “v2.6.30” and “v2.6.31” would not be distinguishable under PXELINUX because both mangle to the same DOS filename.
The Kernel does not have to be a Linux Kernel; it can be a boot sector or a COMBOOT file.
APPEND -
Append nothing. APPEND with a single hyphen as
argument in a LABEL section can be used to override
a global APPEND.
LOCALBOOT type
On PXELINUX, specifying LOCALBOOT 0 instead of a
KERNEL option means invoking this particular label
and causes a local disk boot instead of a Kernel boot.
|
Argument |
Description |
|---|---|
|
|
Perform a normal boot |
|
|
Perform a local boot with the Universal Network Driver Interface (UNDI) driver still resident in memory |
|
|
Perform a local boot with the entire PXE stack, including the UNDI driver, still resident in memory |
All other values are undefined. If you do not know what the UNDI or
PXE stacks are, specify 0.
TIMEOUT time-out
Indicates how long to wait at the boot prompt until booting automatically, in units of 1/10 second. The time-out is canceled as soon as the user types anything on the keyboard, assuming the user will complete the command begun. A time-out of zero disables the time-out completely (this is also the default). The maximum possible time-out value is 35996 (just less than one hour).
PROMPT flag_val
If flag_val is 0, displays the boot prompt only if
Shift or
Alt is pressed or Caps
Lock or Scroll Lock is set (this is the
default). If flag_val is 1, always displays the boot
prompt.
F2filenameF1filename..etc... F9filenameF10filename
Displays the indicated file on the screen when a function key is pressed at the boot prompt. This can be used to implement preboot online help (presumably for the Kernel command line options). For backward compatibility with earlier releases, F10 can be also entered as F0. Note that there is currently no way to bind filenames to F11 and F12.
Prepare the system's BIOS for PXE boot by including the PXE option in the BIOS boot order.
![]() | BIOS Boot Order |
|---|---|
Do not place the PXE option ahead of the hard disk boot option in the BIOS. Otherwise this system would try to reinstall itself every time you boot it. | |
Wake on LAN (WOL) requires the appropriate BIOS option to be enabled prior to the installation. Also, note down the MAC address of the target system. This data is needed to initiate Wake on LAN.
Wake on LAN allows a machine to be turned on by a special network packet containing the machine's MAC address. Because every machine in the world has a unique MAC identifier, you do not need to worry about accidentally turning on the wrong machine.
![]() | Wake on LAN across Different Network Segments |
|---|---|
If the controlling machine is not located in the same network segment as the installation target that should be awakened, either configure the WOL requests to be sent as multicasts or remotely control a machine on that network segment to act as the sender of these requests. | |
Basically, there are two different ways to customize the boot process for installation apart from those mentioned under Section 2.3.7, “Wake on LAN” and Section 2.3.3, “Using PXE Boot”. You can either use the default boot options and function keys or use the boot options prompt of the installation boot screen to pass any boot options that the installation Kernel might need on this particular hardware.
The boot options are described in detail in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST. Generally, just selecting starts the installation boot process.
If problems occur, use or . For more information about troubleshooting the installation process, refer to Section “Installation Problems” (Appendix A, Help and Troubleshooting, ↑Start-Up).
The menu bar at the bottom screen offers some advanced functionality needed in some setups. Using the F keys, you can specify additional options to pass to the installation routines without having to know the detailed syntax of these parameters (see Section 2.4.2, “Using Custom Boot Options”). A detailed description of the available function keys is available at Section 1.5, “The Boot Screen”.
Using the appropriate set of boot options helps facilitate your
installation procedure. Many parameters can also be configured later
using the linuxrc routines, but using the boot options is easier. In
some automated setups, the boot options can be provided with
initrd or an info file.
The following table lists all installation scenarios mentioned in this chapter with the required parameters for booting and the corresponding boot options. Just append all of them in the order they appear in this table to get one boot option string that is handed to the installation routines. For example (all in one line):
install=xxxnetdevice=xxxhostip=xxxnetmask=xxxvnc=xxxvncpassword=xxx
Replace all the values xxx in this string
with the values appropriate for your setup.
Table 2.1. Installation (Boot) Scenarios Used in This Chapter¶
|
Installation Scenario |
Parameters Needed for Booting |
Boot Options |
|---|---|---|
|
None: system boots automatically |
None needed | |
|
Section 2.1.1, “Simple Remote Installation via VNC—Static Network Configuration” |
|
|
|
Section 2.1.2, “Simple Remote Installation via VNC—Dynamic Network Configuration” |
|
|
|
Section 2.1.3, “Remote Installation via VNC—PXE Boot and Wake on LAN” |
|
Not applicable; process managed through PXE and DHCP |
|
Section 2.1.4, “Simple Remote Installation via SSH—Static Network Configuration” |
|
|
|
Section 2.1.5, “Simple Remote Installation via SSH—Dynamic Network Configuration” |
|
|
|
Section 2.1.6, “Remote Installation via SSH—PXE Boot and Wake on LAN” |
|
Not applicable; process managed through PXE and DHCP |
![]() | More Information about linuxrc Boot Options |
|---|---|
Find more information about the linuxrc boot options used for booting a Linux system at http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Linuxrc. | |
There are several options for remotely monitoring the installation process. If the proper boot options have been specified while booting for installation, either VNC or SSH can be used to control the installation and system configuration from a remote workstation.
Using any VNC viewer software, you can remotely control the installation of openSUSE from virtually any operating system. This section introduces the setup using a VNC viewer application or a Web browser.
All you need to do on the installation target to prepare for a VNC installation is to provide the appropriate boot options at the initial boot for installation (see Section 2.4.2, “Using Custom Boot Options”). The target system boots into a text-based environment and waits for a VNC client to connect to the installation program.
The installation program announces the IP address and display number needed to connect for installation. If you have physical access to the target system, this information is provided right after the system booted for installation. Enter this data when your VNC client software prompts for it and provide your VNC password.
Because the installation target announces itself via OpenSLP, you can retrieve the address information of the installation target via an SLP browser without the need for any physical contact to the installation itself, provided your network setup and all machines support OpenSLP:
Start the KDE file and Web browser Konqueror.
Enter service://yast.installation.suse in the
location bar. The target system then appears as an icon in the
Konqueror screen. Clicking this icon launches the KDE VNC viewer in
which to perform the installation. Alternatively, run your VNC viewer
software with the IP address provided and add :1
at the end of the IP address for the display the installation is
running on.
Basically, there are two ways to connect to a VNC server (the installation target in this case). You can either start an independent VNC viewer application on any operating system or connect using a Java-enabled Web browser.
Using VNC, you can control the installation of a Linux system from any other operating system, including other Linux flavors, Windows, or Mac OS.
On a Linux machine, make sure that the package
tightvnc is installed. On a Windows machine,
install the Windows port of this application, which can be obtained at
the TightVNC home page
(http://www.tightvnc.com/download.html).
To connect to the installation program running on the target machine, proceed as follows:
Start the VNC viewer.
Enter the IP address and display number of the installation target as provided by the SLP browser or the installation program itself:
ip_address:display_number
A window opens on your desktop displaying the YaST screens as in a normal local installation.
Using a Web browser to connect to the installation program makes you totally independent of any VNC software or the underlying operating system. As long as the browser application has Java support enabled, you can use any browser (Firefox, Internet Explorer, Konqueror, Opera, etc.) to perform the installation of your Linux system.
To perform a VNC installation, proceed as follows:
Using SSH, you can remotely control the installation of your Linux machine using any SSH client software.
Apart from installing the appropriate software package (OpenSSH for Linux and PuTTY for Windows), you just need to pass the appropriate boot options to enable SSH for installation. See Section 2.4.2, “Using Custom Boot Options” for details. OpenSSH is installed by default on any SUSE Linux–based operating system.
Retrieve the installation target's IP address. If you have physical access to the target machine, just take the IP address the installation routine provides at the console after the initial boot. Otherwise take the IP address that has been assigned to this particular host in the DHCP server configuration.
At a command line, enter the following command:
ssh -X root@ip_address_of_target
Replace ip_address_of_target with the
actual IP address of the installation target.
When prompted for a username, enter root.
When prompted for the password, enter the password that has been set with the SSH boot option. After you have successfully authenticated, a command line prompt for the installation target appears.
Enter yast to launch the installation program. A window opens showing the normal YaST screens as described in Chapter 1, Installation with YaST.
Sophisticated system configurations require specific disk setups. All
common partitioning tasks can be done with YaST. To get persistent
device naming with block devices, use the block devices below
/dev/disk/by-id or
/dev/disk/by-uuid. Logical Volume Management (LVM) is
a disk partitioning scheme that is designed to be much more flexible than
the physical partitioning used in standard setups. Its snapshot
functionality enables easy creation of data backups. Redundant Array of
Independent Disks (RAID) offers increased data integrity, performance, and
fault tolerance. openSUSE also supports multipath I/O
, and there is also the option to use iSCSI as a
networked disk.
With the expert partitioner, shown in Figure 3.1, “The YaST Partitioner”, manually modify the partitioning of one or several hard disks. You can add, delete, resize, and edit partitions, as well as access the soft RAID, and LVM configuration.
![]() | Repartitioning the Running System |
|---|---|
Although it is possible to repartition your system while it is running, the risk of making a mistake that causes data loss is very high. Try to avoid repartitioning your installed system and always do a complete backup of your data before attempting to do so. | |
All existing or suggested partitions on all connected hard disks are
displayed in the list of in the
YaST dialog. Entire hard disks are
listed as devices without numbers, such as
/dev/sda. Partitions are listed as parts
of these devices, such as
/dev/sda1. The size, type,
encryption status, file system, and mount point of the hard disks and
their partitions are also displayed. The mount point describes where the
partition appears in the Linux file system tree.
Several functional views are available on the lefthand . Use these views to gather information about existing
storage configurations, or to configure functions like
RAID, Volume Management,
Crypt Files, or view filesystems with additional
features, such as BTRFS, NFS, or
TMPFS.
If you run the expert dialog during installation, any free hard disk space is also listed and automatically selected. To provide more disk space to openSUSE®, free the needed space starting from the bottom toward the top of the list (starting from the last partition of a hard disk toward the first). For example, if you have three partitions, you cannot use the second exclusively for openSUSE and retain the third and first for other operating systems.
Every hard disk has a partition table with space for four entries. Every entry in the partition table corresponds to a primary partition or an extended partition. Only one extended partition entry is allowed, however.
A primary partition simply consists of a continuous range of cylinders (physical disk areas) assigned to a particular operating system. With primary partitions you would be limited to four partitions per hard disk, because more do not fit in the partition table. This is why extended partitions are used. Extended partitions are also continuous ranges of disk cylinders, but an extended partition may be divided into logical partitions itself. Logical partitions do not require entries in the partition table. In other words, an extended partition is a container for logical partitions.
If you need more than four partitions, create an extended partition as the fourth partition (or earlier). This extended partition should occupy the entire remaining free cylinder range. Then create multiple logical partitions within the extended partition. The maximum number of logical partitions is 63, independent of the disk type. It does not matter which types of partitions are used for Linux. Primary and logical partitions both function normally.
To create a partition from scratch select and then a hard disk with free space. The actual modification can be done in the tab:
Select and specify the partition type (primary or extended). Create up to four primary partitions or up to three primary partitions and one extended partition. Within the extended partition, create several logical partitions (see Section 3.1.1, “Partition Types”).
Specify the size of the new partition. You can either choose to occupy all the free unpartitioned space, or enter a custom size.
Select the file system to use and a mount point. YaST suggests a mount point for each partition created. To use a different mount method, like mount by label, select .
Specify additional file system options if your setup requires them. This is necessary, for example, if you need persistent device names. For details on the available options, refer to Section 3.1.3, “Editing a Partition”.
Click to apply your partitioning setup and leave the partitioning module.
If you created the partition during installation, you are returned to the installation overview screen.
When you create a new partition or modify an existing partition, you can set various parameters. For new partitions, the default parameters set by YaST are usually sufficient and do not require any modification. To edit your partition setup manually, proceed as follows:
Select the partition.
Click to edit the partition and set the parameters:
Even if you do not want to format the partition at this stage, assign it a file system ID to ensure that the partition is registered correctly. Possible values include , , , and .
To change the partition file system, click and select file system type in the list.
openSUSE supports several types of filesystems. BtrFS is the Linux filesystem of choice because of its advanced features. It supports copy-on-write functionality, creating snapshots, multi-device spanning, subvolumes, and other useful techniques. ReiserFS, JFS, XFS, and Ext3 are journaling file systems. These file systems are able to restore the system very quickly after a system crash, utilizing write processes logged during the operation. Ext2 is not a journaling file system, but it is adequate for smaller partitions because it does not require much disk space for management.
Swap is a special format that allows the partition to be used as a virtual memory. Create a swap partition of at least 256 MB. However, if you use up your swap space, consider adding more memory to your system instead of adding more swap space.
![]() | Changing the file system |
|---|---|
Changing the file system and reformatting partitions irreversibly deletes all data from the partition. | |
If you activate the encryption, all data is written to the hard disk in encrypted form. This increases the security of sensitive data, but reduces the system speed, as the encryption takes some time to process. More information about the encryption of file systems is provided in Chapter 10, Encrypting Partitions and Files (↑Security Guide).
Specify the directory where the partition should be mounted in the file system tree. Select from YaST suggestions or enter any other name.
Specify various parameters contained in the global file system
administration file (/etc/fstab). The default
settings should suffice for most setups. You can, for example,
change the file system identification from the device name to a
volume label. In the volume label, use all characters except
/ and space.
To get persistent devices names, use the mount option , or . In openSUSE, persistent device names are enabled by default.
If you prefer to mount the partition by its label, you need to
define one in the text entry. For
example, you could use the partition label HOME
for a partition intended to mount to /home.
If you intend to use quotas on the file system, use the mount option . This must be done before you can define quotas for users in the YaST module. For further information on how to configure user quota, refer to Section “Managing Quotas” (Chapter 10, Managing Users with YaST, ↑Start-Up).
Select to save the changes.
![]() | Resize Filesystems |
|---|---|
To resize an existing file system, select the partition and use . Note, that it is not possible to resize partitions while mounted. To resize partitions, unmount the relevant partition before running the partitioner. | |
After you select a hard disk device (like ) in the pane, you can access the menu in the lower right part of the window. The menu contains the following commands:
This option helps you create a new partition table on the selected device.
![]() | Creating a New Partition Table |
|---|---|
Creating a new partition table on a device irreversibly removes all the partitions and their data from that device. | |
This option helps you clone the device partition layout (but not the data) to other available disk devices.
After you select the hostname of the computer (the top-level of the tree in the pane), you can access the menu in the lower right part of the window. The menu contains the following commands:
To access SCSI over IP block devices, you first have to configure iSCSI. This results in additionally available devices in the main partition list.
Selecting this option helps you configure the multipath enhancement to the supported mass storage devices.
The following section includes a few hints and tips on partitioning that should help you make the right decisions when setting up your system.
![]() | Cylinder Numbers |
|---|---|
Note, that different partitioning tools may start counting the cylinders
of a partition with | |
swap¶Swap is used to extend the available physical memory. It is then possible to use more memory than physical RAM available. The memory management system of kernels before 2.4.10 needed swap as a safety measure. Then, if you did not have twice the size of your RAM in swap, the performance of the system suffered. These limitations no longer exist.
Linux uses a page called “Least Recently Used” (LRU) to select pages that might be moved from memory to disk. Therefore, running applications have more memory available and caching works more smoothly.
If an application tries to allocate the maximum allowed memory, problems with swap can arise. There are three major scenarios to look at:
The application gets the maximum allowed memory. All caches are freed, and thus all other running applications are slowed. After a few minutes, the kernel's out-of-memory kill mechanism activates and kills the process.
At first, the system slows like a system without swap. After all physical RAM has been allocated, swap space is used as well. At this point, the system becomes very slow and it becomes impossible to run commands from remote. Depending on the speed of the hard disks that run the swap space, the system stays in this condition for about 10 to 15 minutes until the out-of-memory kill mechanism resolves the issue. Note that you will need a certain amount of swap if the computer needs to perform a “suspend to disk”. In that case, the swap size should be large enough to contain the necessary data from memory (512 MB–1GB).
It is better to not have an application that is out of control and swapping excessively in this case. If you use such application, the system will need many hours to recover. In the process, it is likely that other processes get timeouts and faults, leaving the system in an undefined state, even after killing the faulty process. In this case, do a hard machine reboot and try to get it running again. Lots of swap is only useful if you have an application that relies on this feature. Such applications (like databases or graphics manipulation programs) often have an option to directly use hard disk space for their needs. It is advisable to use this option instead of using lots of swap space.
If your system is not out of control, but needs more swap after some time, it is possible to extend the swap space online. If you prepared a partition for swap space, just add this partition with YaST. If you do not have a partition available, you may also just use a swap file to extend the swap. Swap files are generally slower than partitions, but compared to physical ram, both are extremely slow so the actual difference is negligible.
Procedure 3.1. Adding a Swap File Manually
To add a swap file in the running system, proceed as follows:
Create an empty file in your system. For example, if you want to add a
swap file with 128 MB swap at
/var/lib/swap/swapfile, use the commands:
mkdir -p /var/lib/swap dd if=/dev/zero of=/var/lib/swap/swapfile bs=1M count=128
Initialize this swap file with the command
mkswap /var/lib/swap/swapfile
Activate the swap with the command
swapon /var/lib/swap/swapfile
To disable this swap file, use the command
swapoff /var/lib/swap/swapfile
Check the current available swap spaces with the command
cat /proc/swaps
Note that at this point, it is only temporary swap space. After the next reboot, it is no longer utilized.
To enable this swap file permanently, add the following line to
/etc/fstab:
/var/lib/swap/swapfile swap swap defaults 0 0
From the , access the LVM configuration by clicking the item in the pane. However, if a working LVM configuration already exists on your system, it is automatically activated upon entering the initial LVM configuration of a session. In this case, all disks containing a partition (belonging to an activated volume group) cannot be repartitioned. The Linux kernel cannot reread the modified partition table of a hard disk when any partition on this disk is in use. If you already have a working LVM configuration on your system, physical repartitioning should not be necessary. Instead, change the configuration of the logical volumes.
At the beginning of the physical volumes (PVs), information about the
volume is written to the partition. To reuse such a partition for other
non-LVM purposes, it is advisable to delete the beginning of this volume.
For example, in the VG system and PV
/dev/sda2, do this with the command
dd if=/dev/zero of=/dev/sda2 bs=512
count=1.
![]() | File System for Booting |
|---|---|
The file system used for booting (the root file system or
| |
For more details about LVM, see the Storage Administration Guide.
This section briefly describes the principles behind the Logical Volume Manager (LVM) and its multipurpose features. In Section 3.2.2, “LVM Configuration with YaST”, learn how to set up LVM with YaST.
![]() | |
Using LVM is sometimes associated with increased risk such as data loss. Risks also include application crashes, power failures, and faulty commands. Save your data before implementing LVM or reconfiguring volumes. Never work without a backup. | |
The LVM enables flexible distribution of hard disk space over several file systems. It was developed because sometimes the need to change the segmenting of hard disk space arises just after the initial partitioning has been done. Because it is difficult to modify partitions on a running system, LVM provides a virtual pool (volume group, VG for short) of memory space from which logical volumes (LVs) can be created as needed. The operating system accesses these LVs instead of the physical partitions. Volume groups can occupy more than one disk, so that several disks or parts of them may constitute one single VG. This way, LVM provides a kind of abstraction from the physical disk space that allows its segmentation to be changed in a much easier and safer way than with physical repartitioning. Background information regarding physical partitioning can be found in Section 3.1.1, “Partition Types” and Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner”.
Figure 3.2, “Physical Partitioning versus LVM” compares physical partitioning (left) with LVM segmentation (right). On the left side, one single disk has been divided into three physical partitions (PART), each with a mount point (MP) assigned so that the operating system can gain access. On the right side, two disks have been divided into two and three physical partitions each. Two LVM volume groups (VG 1 and VG 2) have been defined. VG 1 contains two partitions from DISK 1 and one from DISK 2. VG 2 contains the remaining two partitions from DISK 2. In LVM, the physical disk partitions that are incorporated in a volume group are called physical volumes (PVs). Within the volume groups, four LVs (LV 1 through LV 4) have been defined. They can be used by the operating system via the associated mount points. The border between different LVs do not need to be aligned with any partition border. See the border between LV 1 and LV 2 in this example.
LVM features:
Several hard disks or partitions can be combined in a large logical volume.
Provided the configuration is suitable, an LV (such as
/usr) can be enlarged if free space is exhausted.
With LVM, it is possible to add hard disks or LVs in a running system. However, this requires hot-swappable hardware.
It is possible to activate a "striping mode" that distributes the data stream of a LV over several PVs. If these PVs reside on different disks, the read and write performance is enhanced, as with RAID 0.
The snapshot feature enables consistent backups (especially for servers) of the running system.
With these features, LVM is ready for heavily used home PCs or small servers. LVM is well-suited for the user with a growing data stock (as in the case of databases, music archives, or user directories). This would allow file systems that are larger than the physical hard disk. Another advantage of LVM is that up to 256 LVs can be added. However, working with LVM is different from working with conventional partitions. Instructions and further information about configuring LVM is available in the official LVM HOWTO at http://tldp.org/HOWTO/LVM-HOWTO/.
Starting from Kernel version 2.6, LVM version 2 is available, which is backward-compatible with the previous LVM and enables the continued management of old volume groups. When creating new volume groups, decide whether to use the new format or the backward-compatible version. LVM 2 does not require any kernel patches. It makes use of the device mapper integrated in kernel 2.6. This kernel only supports LVM version 2. Therefore, when talking about LVM, this section always refers to LVM version 2.
The YaST LVM configuration can be reached from the YaST Expert Partitioner (see Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner”) within the item in the pane. The Expert Partitioner allows you to edit and delete existing partitions and also create new ones that need to be used with LVM. The first task is to create PVs that provide space to a volume group:
Select a hard disk from .
Change to the tab.
Click and enter the desired size of the PV on this disk.
Use and change the to . Do not mount this partition.
Repeat this procedure until you have defined all the desired physical volumes on the available disks.
If no volume group exists on your system, you must add one (see Figure 3.3, “Creating a Volume Group”). It is possible to create additional groups by clicking on in the pane, and then on . One single volume group is usually sufficient.
Enter a name for the VG, for example, system.
Select the desired . This value defines the size of a physical block in the volume group. All the disk space in a volume group is handled in blocks of this size.
Add the prepared PVs to the VG by selecting the device and clicking on . Selecting several devices is possible by holding Ctrl while selecting the devices.
Select to make the VG available to further configuration steps.
If you have multiple volume groups defined and want to add or remove PVs, select the volume group in the list and click . In the following window, you can add or remove PVs to the selected volume group.
After the volume group has been filled with PVs, define the LVs which the operating system should use in the next dialog. Choose the current volume group and change to the tab. , , , and LVs as needed until all space in the volume group has been occupied. Assign at least one LV to each volume group.
Click and go through the wizard-like pop-up that opens:
Enter the name of the LV. For a partition that should be mounted to
/home, a self-explanatory name like
HOME could be used.
Select the size and the number of stripes of the LV. If you have only one PV, selecting more than one stripe is not useful.
Choose the filesystem to use on the LV as well as the mount point.
By using stripes it is possible to distribute the data stream in the LV among several PVs (striping). However, striping a volume can only be done over different PVs, each providing at least the amount of space of the volume. The maximum number of stripes equals to the number of PVs, where Stripe "1" means "no striping". Striping only makes sense with PVs on different hard disks, otherwise performance will decrease.
![]() | Striping |
|---|---|
YaST cannot, at this point, verify the correctness of your entries concerning striping. Any mistake made here is apparent only later when the LVM is implemented on disk. | |
If you have already configured LVM on your system, the existing logical volumes can also be used. Before continuing, assign appropriate mount points to these LVs. With , return to the YaST Expert Partitioner and finish your work there.
The purpose of RAID (redundant array of independent disks) is to combine several hard disk partitions into one large virtual hard disk to optimize performance and/or data security. Most RAID controllers use the SCSI protocol because it can address a larger number of hard disks in a more effective way than the IDE protocol. It is also more suitable for the parallel command processing. There are some RAID controllers that support IDE or SATA hard disks. Soft RAID provides the advantages of RAID systems without the additional cost of hardware RAID controllers. However, this requires some CPU time and has memory requirements that make it unsuitable for high performance computers.
With openSUSE® , you can combine several hard disks into one soft RAID system. RAID implies several strategies for combining several hard disks in a RAID system, each with different goals, advantages, and characteristics. These variations are commonly known as RAID levels.
Common RAID levels are:
This level improves the performance of your data access by spreading out blocks of each file across multiple disk drives. Actually, this is not really a RAID, because it does not provide data backup, but the name RAID 0 for this type of system is commonly used. With RAID 0, two or more hard disks are pooled together. Performance is enhanced, but the RAID system is destroyed and your data lost if even one hard disk fails.
This level provides adequate security for your data, because the data is copied to another hard disk 1:1. This is known as hard disk mirroring. If one disk is destroyed, a copy of its contents is available on the other one. All disks but one could be damaged without endangering your data. However, if the damage is not detected, the damaged data can be mirrored to the undamaged disk. This could result in the same loss of data. The writing performance suffers in the copying process compared to using single disk access (10 to 20 % slower), but read access is significantly faster in comparison to any one of the normal physical hard disks. The reason is that the duplicate data can be parallel-scanned. Generally it can be said that Level 1 provides nearly twice the read transfer rate of single disks and almost the same write transfer rate as single disks.
RAID 5 is an optimized compromise between Level 0 and Level 1, in terms of performance and redundancy. The hard disk space equals the number of disks used minus one. The data is distributed over the hard disks as with RAID 0. Parity blocks, created on one of the partitions, exist for security reasons. They are linked to each other with XOR, enabling the contents to be reconstructed by the corresponding parity block in case of system failure. With RAID 5, no more than one hard disk can fail at the same time. If one hard disk fails, it must be replaced as soon as possible to avoid the risk of losing data.
To further increase the reliability of the RAID system, it is possible to use RAID 6. In this level, even if two disks fail, the array still can be reconstructed. With RAID 6, at least 4 hard disks are needed to run the array. Note that when running as software raid, this configuration needs a considerable amount of CPU time and memory.
This RAID implementation combines features of RAID 0 and RAID 1: the data are first mirrored in separate disk arrays, which are inserted into a new RAID 0; type array. In each RAID 1 sub-array, one disk can fail without any damage to the data. RAID 10 is used for database application where a huge load is expected.
Several other RAID levels have been developed (RAID 2, RAID 3, RAID 4, RAIDn, RAID 10, RAID 0+1, RAID 30, RAID 50, etc.), some of them being proprietary implementations created by hardware vendors. These levels are not very common and therefore are not explained here.
The YaST configuration can be reached from the YaST Expert Partitioner, described in Section 3.1, “Using the YaST Partitioner”. This partitioning tool enables you to edit and delete existing partitions and create new ones to be used with soft RAID:
Select a hard disk from .
Change to the tab.
Click and enter the desired size of the raid partition on this disk.
Use and change the to . Do not mount this partition.
Repeat this procedure until you have defined all the desired physical volumes on the available disks.
For RAID 0 and RAID 1, at least two partitions are needed—for RAID 1, usually exactly two and no more. If RAID 5 is used, at least three partitions are required. It is recommended to utilize partitions of the same size only. The RAID partitions should be located on different hard disks to decrease the risk of losing data if one is defective (RAID 1 and 5) and to optimize the performance of RAID 0. After creating all the partitions to use with RAID, click + to start the RAID configuration.
In the next dialog, choose between RAID levels 0, 1, 5, 6 and 10. Then, select all partitions with either the “Linux RAID” or “Linux native” type that should be used by the RAID system. No swap or DOS partitions are shown.
To add a previously unassigned partition to the selected RAID volume, first click the partition then . Assign all partitions reserved for RAID. Otherwise, the space on the partition remains unused. After assigning all partitions, click to select the available .
In this last step, set the file system to use as well as encryption and
the mount point for the RAID volume. After completing the configuration
with , see the /dev/md0
device and others indicated with RAID in the expert
partitioner.
Check the file /proc/mdstat to find out whether a
RAID partition has been damaged. In the event of a system failure, shut
down your Linux system and replace the defective hard disk with a new one
partitioned the same way. Then restart your system and enter the command
mdadm /dev/mdX --add /dev/sdX. Replace 'X' with your
particular device identifiers. This integrates the hard disk
automatically into the RAID system and fully reconstructs it.
Note that although you can access all data during the rebuild, you may encounter some performance issues until the RAID has been fully rebuilt.
Configuration instructions and more details for soft RAID can be found in the HOWTOs at:
/usr/share/doc/packages/mdadm/Software-RAID.HOWTO.html
Linux RAID mailing lists are available, such as http://marc.info/?l=linux-raid.
Contents
udev/dev Directoryuevents and udevudev Daemonudev RulesudevContents
openSUSE® is available for 64-bit platforms. This does not necessarily mean that all the applications included have already been ported to 64-bit platforms. openSUSE supports the use of 32-bit applications in a 64-bit system environment. This chapter offers a brief overview of how this support is implemented on 64-bit openSUSE platforms. It explains how 32-bit applications are executed (runtime support) and how 32-bit applications should be compiled to enable them to run both in 32-bit and 64-bit system environments. Additionally, find information about the kernel API and an explanation of how 32-bit applications can run under a 64-bit kernel.
openSUSE for the 64-bit platforms amd64 and Intel 64 is designed so that existing 32-bit applications run in the 64-bit environment “out-of-the-box.” This support means that you can continue to use your preferred 32-bit applications without waiting for a corresponding 64-bit port to become available.
![]() | Conflicts between Application Versions |
|---|---|
If an application is available both for 32-bit and 64-bit environments, parallel installation of both versions is bound to lead to problems. In such cases, decide on one of the two versions and install and use this. An exception to this rule is PAM (pluggable authentication modules). openSUSE uses PAM in the authentication process as a layer that mediates between user and application. On a 64-bit operating system that also runs 32-bit applications it is necessary to always install both versions of a PAM module. | |
To be executed correctly, every application requires a range of libraries. Unfortunately, the names for the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of these libraries are identical. They must be differentiated from each other in another way.
To retain compatibility with the 32-bit version, the libraries are stored
at the same place in the system as in the 32-bit environment. The 32-bit
version of libc.so.6 is located under
/lib/libc.so.6 in both the 32-bit and 64-bit
environments.
All 64-bit libraries and object files are located in directories called
lib64. The 64-bit object files that you would
normally expect to find under /lib and
/usr/lib are now found under
/lib64 and /usr/lib64. This
means that there is space for the 32-bit libraries under
/lib and /usr/lib, so the
filename for both versions can remain unchanged.
Subdirectories of 32-bit /lib directories which
contain data content that does not depend on the word size are not moved.
This scheme conforms to LSB (Linux Standards Base) and FHS (File System
Hierarchy Standard).
A biarch development tool chain allows generation of 32-bit and 64-bit
objects. The default is to compile 64-bit objects. It is possible to
generate 32-bit objects by using special flags. For GCC, this special
flag is -m32.
All header files must be written in an architecture-independent form. The installed 32-bit and 64-bit libraries must have an API (application programming interface) that matches the installed header files. The normal openSUSE environment is designed according to this principle. In the case of manually updated libraries, resolve these issues yourself.
To develop binaries for the other architecture on a biarch architecture,
the respective libraries for the second architecture must additionally be
installed. These packages are called
rpmname-32bit. You also need the
respective headers and libraries from the
rpmname-devel packages and
the development libraries for the second architecture from
rpmname-devel-32bit.
Most open source programs use an autoconf-based program configuration. To use autoconf for configuring a program for the second architecture, overwrite the normal compiler and linker settings of autoconf by running the configure script with additional environment variables.
The following example refers to an x86_64 system with x86 as the second architecture.
Use the 32-bit compiler:
CC="gcc -m32"
Instruct the linker to process 32-bit objects (always use gcc as the linker front-end):
LD="gcc -m32"
Set the assembler to generate 32-bit objects:
AS="gcc -c -m32"
Specify linker flags, such as the location of 32-bit libraries, for example:
LDFLAGS="-L/usr/lib"
Specify the location for the 32-bit object code libraries:
--libdir=/usr/lib
Specify the location for the 32-bit X libraries:
--x-libraries=/usr/lib
Not all of these variables are needed for every program. Adapt them to the respective program.
CC="gcc -m32" LDFLAGS="-L/usr/lib;" ./configure --prefix=/usr --libdir=/usr/lib --x-libraries=/usr/lib make make install
The 64-bit kernels for x86_64 offer both a 64-bit and a 32-bit kernel ABI (application binary interface). The latter is identical with the ABI for the corresponding 32-bit kernel. This means that the 32-bit application can communicate with the 64-bit kernel in the same way as with the 32-bit kernel.
The 32-bit emulation of system calls for a 64-bit kernel does not support all the APIs used by system programs. This depends on the platform. For this reason, a small number of applications, like lspci, must be compiled.
A 64-bit kernel can only load 64-bit kernel modules that have been specially compiled for this kernel. It is not possible to use 32-bit kernel modules.
![]() | Kernel-loadable Modules |
|---|---|
Some applications require separate kernel-loadable modules. If you intend to use such a 32-bit application in a 64-bit system environment, contact the provider of this application and SUSE to make sure that the 64-bit version of the kernel-loadable module and the 32-bit compiled version of the kernel API are available for this module. | |
With the release of openSUSE 12.1 switched from System-V init to
systemd. When booting openSUSE,
systemd is started as the very firts
process and is responsible for starting, stopping and controlling all other
processes on the system. See http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Systemd for more information.
Contents
Abstract
This chapter describes how to configure GRUB (Grand Unified Bootloader), the boot loader used in openSUSE®. A special YaST module is available for configuring all settings. If you are not familiar with the subject of booting in Linux, read the following sections to acquire some background information. This chapter also describes some of the problems frequently encountered when booting with GRUB and their solutions.
This chapter focuses on boot management and the configuration of the boot loader GRUB. The boot procedure as a whole is outlined in Chapter 5, Booting and Configuring a Linux System. A boot loader represents the interface between the machine (BIOS) and the operating system (openSUSE). The configuration of the boot loader directly impacts the start of the operating system.
The following terms appear frequently in this chapter and might need some explanation:
The structure of the MBR is defined by an operating
system–independent convention. The first 446 bytes are
reserved for the program code. They typically hold part of a boot
loader program or an operating system selector. The next 64 bytes
provide space for a partition table of up to four entries. The
partition table contains information about the partitioning of the hard
disk and the file system types. The operating system needs this table
for handling the hard disk. With conventional generic code in the MBR,
exactly one partition must be marked active. The
last two bytes of the MBR must contain a static “magic
number” (AA55). An MBR containing a different
value is regarded as invalid by some BIOSes, so is not considered for
booting.
Boot sectors are the first sectors of hard disk partitions with the
exception of the extended partition, which merely serves as a
“container” for other partitions. These boot sectors have
512 bytes of space for code used to boot an operating system
installed in the respective partition. This applies to boot sectors of
formatted DOS, Windows, and OS/2 partitions, which also contain some
basic important data of the file system. In contrast, the boot sectors
of Linux partitions are initially empty after setting up a file system
other than XFS. Therefore, a Linux partition is not bootable by itself,
even if it contains a kernel and a valid root file system. A boot
sector with valid code for booting the system has the same magic number
as the MBR in its last two bytes (AA55).
GRUB comprises two stages. Stage 1 consists of 512 bytes and its only task is to load the second stage of the boot loader. Subsequently, stage 2 is loaded. This stage contains the main part of the boot loader.
In some configurations, an intermediate stage 1.5 can be used, which locates and loads stage 2 from an appropriate file system. If possible, this method is chosen by default on installation or when initially setting up GRUB with YaST.
Stage 2 is able to access many file systems. Currently, ext2, ext3,
ReiserFS, Minix, and the DOS FAT file system used by Windows are
supported. To a certain extent, XFS, and UFS and FFS used by BSD systems
are also supported. Since version 0.95 GRUB is also able to boot from a
CD or DVD containing an ISO 9660 standard file system pursuant to the
“El Torito” specification. Even before the system is booted,
GRUB can access file systems of supported BIOS disk devices (floppy
disks or hard disks, CD drives and DVD drives detected by the BIOS).
Therefore, changes to the GRUB configuration file
(menu.lst) do not require a new installation of the
boot manager. When the system is booted, GRUB reloads the menu file
with the valid paths and partition data of the kernel or the initial RAM
disk (initrd) and locates these files.
The actual configuration of GRUB is based on four files that are described below:
/boot/grub/menu.lst
This file contains all information about partitions or operating systems that can be booted with GRUB. Without this information, the GRUB command line prompts the user for how to proceed. For details, see Section 6.1.1.3, “Editing Menu Entries during the Boot Procedure”.
/boot/grub/device.map
This file translates device names from the GRUB and BIOS notation to Linux device names.
/etc/grub.conf
This file contains the commands, parameters and options the GRUB shell needs for installing the boot loader correctly.
/etc/sysconfig/bootloader
This file is read by the perl-bootloader library which is used when configuring the bootloader with YaST and every time a new kernel is installed. It contains configuration options (such as kernel parameters) that will be added by default to the bootloader configuration file.
GRUB can be controlled in various ways. Boot entries from an existing
configuration can be selected from the graphical menu (splash screen).
The configuration is loaded from the file menu.lst.
In GRUB, all boot parameters can be changed prior to booting. For
example, errors made when editing the menu file can be corrected in this
way. Boot commands can also be entered interactively at a kind of input
prompt. For details, see Section 6.1.1.3, “Editing Menu Entries during the Boot Procedure”. GRUB
offers the possibility of determining the location of the kernel and the
initrd prior to booting. In this way, you can even
boot an installed operating system for which no entry exists in the boot
loader configuration.
GRUB actually exists in two versions: as a boot loader and as a normal
Linux program in /usr/sbin/grub. The latter is
referred to as the GRUB shell. It provides an
emulation of GRUB in the installed system and can be used to install
GRUB or test new settings before applying them. The functionality to
install GRUB as the boot loader on a hard disk or floppy disk is
integrated in GRUB in the form of the command setup.
This is available in the GRUB shell when Linux is loaded.
/boot/grub/menu.lst¶
The graphical splash screen with the boot menu is based on the GRUB
configuration file /boot/grub/menu.lst, which
contains all information about all partitions or operating systems that
can be booted by the menu.
Every time the system is booted, GRUB loads the menu file from the file system. For this reason, GRUB does not need to be reinstalled after every change to the file. Use the YaST boot loader to modify the GRUB configuration as described in Section 6.2, “Configuring the Boot Loader with YaST”.
The menu file contains commands. The syntax is very simple. Every line
contains a command followed by optional parameters separated by spaces
like in the shell. For historical reasons, some commands permit an
= in front of the first parameter. Comments are
introduced by a hash (#).
To identify the menu items in the menu overview, set a
title for every entry. The text (including any
spaces) following the keyword title is displayed as a
selectable option in the menu. All commands up to the next
title are executed when this menu item is selected.
The simplest case is the redirection to boot loaders of other operating
systems. The command is chainloader and the argument
is usually the boot block of another partition, in GRUB block
notation. For example:
chainloader (hd0,3)+1
The device names in GRUB are explained in Section 6.1.1.1, “Naming Conventions for Hard Disks and Partitions”. This example specifies the first block of the fourth partition of the first hard disk.
Use the command kernel to specify a kernel image. The
first argument is the path to the kernel image in a partition. The other
arguments are passed to the kernel on its command line.
If the kernel does not have built-in drivers for access to the root
partition or a recent Linux system with advanced hotplug features is
used, initrd must be specified with a separate
GRUB command whose only argument is the path to the
initrd file. Because the loading address of the
initrd is written into the loaded kernel image, the
command initrd must follow after the
kernel command.
The command root simplifies the specification of
kernel and initrd files. The only argument of root is
a device or a partition. This device is used for all kernel,
initrd, or other file paths for which no device is
explicitly specified until the next root command.
The boot command is implied at the end of every menu
entry, so it does not need to be written into the menu file. However, if
you use GRUB interactively for booting, you must enter the
boot command at the end. The command itself has no
arguments. It merely boots the loaded kernel image or the specified
chain loader.
After writing all menu entries, define one of them as the
default entry. Otherwise, the first one (entry
0) is used. You can also specify a time-out in
seconds after which the default entry should boot.
timeout and default usually
precede the menu entries. An example file is described in
Section 6.1.1.2, “An Example Menu File”.
The naming convention GRUB uses for hard disks and partitions differ
from that used for normal Linux devices. It more closely resembles the
simple disk enumeration the BIOS does and the syntax is similar to that
used in some BSD derivatives. In GRUB, the numbering of the
partitions start with zero. This means that
(hd0,0) is the first partition of the first hard
disk. On a common desktop machine with a hard disk connected as primary
master, the corresponding Linux device name is
/dev/sda1.
The four possible primary partitions are assigned the partition numbers
0 to 3. The logical partitions
are numbered from 4:
(hd0,0) first primary partition of the first hard disk (hd0,1) second primary partition (hd0,2) third primary partition (hd0,3) fourth primary partition (usually an extended partition) (hd0,4) first logical partition (hd0,5) second logical partition
Being dependent on BIOS devices, GRUB does not distinguish between PATA (IDE), SATA, SCSI, and hardware RAID devices. All hard disks recognized by the BIOS or other controllers are numbered according to the boot sequence preset in the BIOS.
Unfortunately, it is often not possible to map the Linux device names
to BIOS device names exactly. It generates this mapping with the help
of an algorithm and saves it to the file
device.map, which can be edited if necessary.
Information about the file device.map is available
in Section 6.1.2, “The File device.map”.
A complete GRUB path consists of a device name written in parentheses and the path to the file in the file system in the specified partition. The path begins with a slash. For example, the bootable kernel could be specified as follows on a system with a single PATA (IDE) hard disk containing Linux in its first partition:
(hd0,0)/boot/vmlinuz
The following example shows the structure of a GRUB menu file. The
example installation has a Linux boot partition under
/dev/sda5, a root partition under
/dev/sda7 and a Windows installation under
/dev/sda1.
gfxmenu (hd0,4)/boot/messagecolor white/blue black/light-gray
default 0
timeout 8
title linux
root (hd0,4) kernel /boot/vmlinuz root=/dev/sda7 vga=791 resume=/dev/sda9 initrd /boot/initrd title windows
rootnoverify (hd0,0) chainloader +1 title floppy
rootnoverify (hd0,0) chainloader (fd0)+1 title failsafe
root (hd0,4) kernel /boot/vmlinuz.shipped root=/dev/sda7 ide=nodma \ apm=off acpi=off vga=normal nosmp maxcpus=0 3 noresume initrd /boot/initrd.shipped
The first block defines the configuration of the splash screen:
The background image | |
Color scheme: white (foreground), blue (background), black (selection) and light gray (background of the selection). The color scheme has no effect on the splash screen, only on the customizable GRUB menu that you can access by exiting the splash screen with Esc. | |
The first ( | |
After eight seconds without any user input, GRUB automatically
boots the default entry. To deactivate automatic boot, delete the
|
The second and largest block lists the various bootable operating
systems. The sections for the individual operating systems are
introduced by title.
The first entry ( | |
The second entry is responsible for loading Windows. Windows is
booted from the first partition of the first hard disk
( | |
The next entry enables booting from floppy disk without modifying the BIOS settings. | |
The boot option |
The menu file can be changed whenever necessary. GRUB then uses the modified settings during the next boot. Edit the file permanently using YaST or an editor of your choice. Alternatively, make temporary changes interactively using the edit function of GRUB. See Section 6.1.1.3, “Editing Menu Entries during the Boot Procedure”.
In the graphical boot menu, select the operating system to boot with the arrow keys. If you select a Linux system, you can enter additional boot parameters at the boot prompt. To edit individual menu entries directly, press Esc to exit the splash screen and get to the GRUB text-based menu then press E. Changes made in this way only apply to the current boot and are not adopted permanently.
![]() | Keyboard Layout during the Boot Procedure |
|---|---|
The US keyboard layout is the only one available when booting. See Figure “US Keyboard Layout” (↑Start-Up). | |
Editing menu entries facilitates the repair of a defective system that can no longer be booted, because the faulty configuration file of the boot loader can be circumvented by manually entering parameters. Manually entering parameters during the boot procedure is also useful for testing new settings without impairing the native system.
After activating the editing mode, use the arrow keys to select the menu entry of the configuration to edit. To make the configuration editable, press E again. In this way, edit incorrect partitions or path specifications before they have a negative effect on the boot process. Press Enter to exit the editing mode and return to the menu. Then press B to boot this entry. Further possible actions are displayed in the help text at the bottom.
To enter changed boot options permanently and pass them to the kernel,
open the file menu.lst as the user
root and append the
respective kernel parameters to the existing line, separated by spaces:
title linux
root(hd0,0)
kernel /vmlinuz root=/dev/sda3 additional parameter
initrd /initrdGRUB automatically adopts the new parameters the next time the system is booted. Alternatively, this change can also be made with the YaST boot loader module. Append the new parameters to the existing line, separated by spaces.
The file device.map maps GRUB and BIOS device
names to Linux device names. In a mixed system containing PATA (IDE) and
SCSI hard disks, GRUB must try to determine the boot sequence by a
special procedure, because GRUB may not have access to the BIOS
information on the boot sequence. GRUB saves the result of this
analysis in the file /boot/grub/device.map. Example
device.map files for a system on which the boot
sequence in the BIOS is set to PATA before SCSI could look as follows:
(fd0) /dev/fd0 (hd0) /dev/sda (hd1) /dev/sdb
or
(fd0) /dev/fd0 (hd0) /dev/disk-by-id/DISK1 ID(hd1) /dev/disk-by-id/DISK2 ID
Because the order of PATA (IDE), SCSI and other hard disks depends on
various factors and Linux is not able to identify the mapping, the
sequence in the file device.map can be set
manually. If you encounter problems when booting, check if the sequence
in this file corresponds to the sequence in the BIOS and use the GRUB
prompt to modify it temporarily, if necessary. After the Linux system
has booted, the file device.map can be edited
permanently with the YaST boot loader module or an editor of your
choice.
After manually changing device.map, execute the
following command to reinstall GRUB. This command causes the file
device.map to be reloaded and the commands listed
in grub.conf to be executed:
grub --batch < /etc/grub.conf
The third important GRUB configuration file after
menu.lst and device.map is
/etc/grub.conf. This file contains the commands,
parameters and options the GRUB shell needs for installing the boot
loader correctly:
setup --stage2=/boot/grub/stage2 --force-lba (hd0,1) (hd0,1) quit
This command tells GRUB to automatically install the boot loader to
the second partition on the first hard disk (hd0,1) using the boot
images located on the same partition. The
--stage2=/boot/grub/stage2 parameter is needed to
install the stage2 image from a mounted file
system. Some BIOSes have a faulty LBA support implementation,
--force-lba provides a solution to ignore them.
/etc/sysconfig/bootloader¶
This configuration file is only used when configuring the bootloader
with YaST and every time a new kernel is installed. It is evaluated by
the perl-bootloader library which modifies the bootloader configuration
file (for example /boot/grub/menu.lst for GRUB)
accordingly. /etc/sysconfig/bootloader is not a
GRUB specific configuration file - the values are applied to any
bootloader installed on openSUSE.
![]() | Bootloader Configuration after a Kernel Update |
|---|---|
Every time a new kernel is installed, the perl bootloader writes a new
bootloader configuration file (for example
| |
LOADER_TYPE
Specifies the bootloader installed on the system (e.g. GRUB or LILO). Do not modify—use YaST to change the bootloader as described in Procedure 6.6, “Changing the Boot Loader Type”.
DEFAULT_VGA / FAILSAFE_VGA / XEN_VGA
Screen resolution and color depth of the framebuffer used during
booting are configured with the kernel parameter
vga. These values define which resolution and
color depth to use for the default boot entry, the failsafe and the
XEN entry. The following values are valid:
Table 6.1. Screen Resolution and Color Depth Reference
|
640x480 |
800x600 |
1024x768 |
1280x1024 |
1600x1200 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
|
8bit |
0x301 |
0x303 |
0x305 |
0x307 |
0x31C |
|
15bit |
0x310 |
0x313 |
0x316 |
0x319 |
0x31D |
|
16bit |
0x311 |
0x314 |
0x317 |
0x31A |
0x31E |
|
24bit |
0x312 |
0x315 |
0x318 |
0x31B |
0x31F |
DEFAULT_APPEND / FAILSAFE_APPEND / XEN_KERNEL_APPEND
Kernel parameters (other than vga) that are
automatically appended to the default, failsafe and XEN boot entries
in the bootloader configuration file.
CYCLE_DETECTION / CYCLE_NEXT_ENTRY
Configure whether to use boot cycle detection and if so, which
alternative entry from /boot/grub/menu.lst to
boot in case of a reboot cycle (e.g.
Failsafe). See
/usr/share/doc/packages/bootcycle/README for
detailed information.
Even before the operating system is booted, GRUB enables access to file systems. Users without root permissions can access files in your Linux system to which they have no access once the system is booted. To block this kind of access or to prevent users from booting certain operating systems, set a boot password.
![]() | Boot Password and Splash Screen |
|---|---|
If you use a boot password for GRUB, the usual splash screen is not displayed. | |
As the user root, proceed as follows to set a boot
password:
At the root prompt, encrypt the password using grub-md5-crypt:
# grub-md5-crypt Password: **** Retype password: **** Encrypted: $1$lS2dv/$JOYcdxIn7CJk9xShzzJVw/
Paste the encrypted string into the global section of the file
menu.lst:
gfxmenu (hd0,4)/message color white/blue black/light-gray default 0 timeout 8 password --md5 $1$lS2dv/$JOYcdxIn7CJk9xShzzJVw/
Now GRUB commands can only be executed at the boot prompt after pressing P and entering the password. However, users can still boot all operating systems from the boot menu.
To prevent one or several operating systems from being booted from the
boot menu, add the entry lock to every section in
menu.lst that should not be bootable without
entering a password. For example:
title linux kernel (hd0,4)/vmlinuz root=/dev/sda7 vga=791 initrd (hd0,4)/initrd lock
After rebooting the system and selecting the Linux entry from the boot menu, the following error message is displayed:
Error 32: Must be authenticated
Press Enter to enter the menu. Then press P to get a password prompt. After entering the password and pressing Enter, the selected operating system (Linux in this case) should boot.
The easiest way to configure the boot loader in your openSUSE system is to use the YaST module. In the YaST Control Center, select +. As in Figure 6.1, “Boot Loader Settings”, this shows the current boot loader configuration of your system and allows you to make changes.
Use the tab to edit, change and delete boot loader sections for the individual operating systems. To add an option, click . To change the value of an existing option, select it with the mouse and click . To remove an existing entry, select it and click . If you are not familiar with boot loader options, read Section 6.1, “Booting with GRUB” first.
Use the tab to view and change settings related to type, location and advanced loader settings.
Click to access advanced configuration options. The build-in editor lets you change the GRUB configuration files. For details, see Section 6.1, “Booting with GRUB”. You can also delete the existing configuration and or let YaST . It is also possible to write the configuration to disk or reread the configuration from the disk. To restore the original Master Boot Record (MBR) that was saved during the installation, choose .
To change the system that is booted by default, proceed as follows:
Procedure 6.1. Setting the Default System¶
Open the tab.
Select the desired entry from the list.
Click .
Click to activate these changes.
To modify the location of the boot loader, follow these steps:
Procedure 6.2. Changing the Boot Loader Location¶
Select the tab and then choose one of the following options for :
This installs the boot loader in the MBR of the first disk (according to the boot sequence preset in the BIOS).
This installs the boot loader in the boot sector of the
/ partition (this is the default).
This installs the boot loader in the boot sector of the
/boot partition.
This installs the boot loader in the extended partition container.
Use this option to specify the location of the boot loader manually.
Click to apply your changes.
The boot loader does not boot the default system immediately. During the time-out, you can select the system to boot or write some kernel parameters. To set the boot loader time-out, proceed as follows:
Procedure 6.3. Changing the Boot Loader Time-Out¶
Open the tab.
Click .
Change the value of by typing in a new value and clicking the appropriate arrow key with your mouse, or by using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Click twice to save the changes.
![]() | Timeout of 0 Seconds |
|---|---|
When setting the timeout to 0 seconds, you will not be able to access GRUB during boot time. When having set the default boot option to a non-Linux operation system at the same time, this effectively disables access to the Linux system. | |
Using this YaST module, you can also set a password to protect booting. This gives you an additional level of security.
Procedure 6.4. Setting a Boot Loader Password¶
Open the tab.
Click .
Activate the option with a click and type in your twice.
Click twice to save the changes.
If your computer has more than one hard disk, you can specify the boot sequence of the disks to match the BIOS setup of the machine (see Section 6.1.2, “The File device.map”). To do so, proceed as follows:
Procedure 6.5. Setting the Disk Order¶
Open the tab.
Click .
If more than one disk is listed, select a disk and click or to reorder the displayed disks.
Click two times to save the changes.
Advanced boot options can be configured via +. Normally, it should not be necessary to change the default settings.
Activates the partition that contains the boot loader. Some legacy operating systems (such as Windows 98) can only boot from an active partition.
Replaces the current MBR with generic, operating system independent code.
Sets GRUB in debug mode where it displays messages to show disk activity.
Hides the boot menu and boots the default entry.
![]() | |
When hiding the boot menu, you will not be able to access GRUB during boot time. When having set the default boot option to a non-Linux operation system at the same time, this effectively disables access to the Linux system. | |
Starts the Trusted GRUB which supports trusted computing functionality.
Enables or disables acoustic signals in GRUB.
Path to the graphics file used when displaying the boot screen.
If your machine is controlled via a serial console, activate this option and specify which COM port to use at which speed. See info grub or http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/manual/grub.html#Serial-terminal
Set the boot loader type in . The default boot loader in openSUSE is GRUB. To use LILO or ELILO, proceed as follows:
![]() | LILO is unsupported |
|---|---|
Using LILO is not recommended—it is unsupported on openSUSE. Only use it in special cases. | |
Procedure 6.6. Changing the Boot Loader Type¶
Select the tab.
For , select .
In the dialog box that opens, select one of the following actions:
Have YaST propose a new configuration.
Have YaST convert the current configuration. When converting the configuration, some settings may be lost.
Write a custom configuration. This action is not available during the installation of openSUSE.
Load your own /etc/lilo.conf. This action is
not available during the installation of openSUSE.
Click two times to save the changes.
During the conversion, the old GRUB configuration is saved to the disk. To use it, simply change the boot loader type back to GRUB and choose . This action is available only on an installed system.
![]() | Custom Boot Loader |
|---|---|
To use a boot loader other than GRUB or LILO, select . Read the documentation of your boot loader carefully before choosing this option. | |
YaST can be used to uninstall the Linux boot loader and restore the MBR to the state it had prior to the installation of Linux. During the installation, YaST automatically creates a backup copy of the original MBR and restores it upon request.
To uninstall GRUB, start YaST and click + to start the boot loader module. Select + and confirm with .
If problems occur while booting your system using a boot manager or if the boot manager cannot be installed on your hard disk disk, it is also possible to create a bootable CD with all the necessary start-up files for Linux. This requires a CD writer be installed in your system.
Creating a bootable CD-ROM with GRUB merely requires a special form of
stage2 called stage2_eltorito
and, optionally, a customized menu.lst. The classic
files stage1 and stage2 are not
required.
Procedure 6.7. Creating Boot CDs
Change into a directory in which to create the ISO image, for example:
cd /tmp
Create a subdirectory for GRUB and change into the newly created
iso directory:
mkdir -p iso/boot/grub && cd iso
Copy the kernel, the files stage2_eltorito,
initrd, menu.lst and
message to iso/boot/:
cp /boot/vmlinuz boot/ cp /boot/initrd boot/ cp /boot/message boot/ cp /usr/lib/grub/stage2_eltorito boot/grub cp /boot/grub/menu.lst boot/grub
Replace the root (hd entries with x,
y)root
(cd) to point to the CD_ROM device. You may also need to
adjust the paths to the message file, the kernel and the
initrd—they need to point to /boot/message,
/boot/vmlinuz and
/boot/initrd, respectively. After having made the
adjustments, menu.lst should look similar to the
following example:
timeout 8 default 0 gfxmenu (cd)/boot/message title Linux root (cd) kernel /boot/vmlinuz root=/dev/sda5 vga=794 resume=/dev/sda1 \ splash=verbose showopts initrd /boot/initrd
Use splash=silent instead of
splash=verbose to prevent the boot messages from
appearing during the boot procedure.
Create the ISO image with the following command:
genisoimage -R -b boot/grub/stage2_eltorito -no-emul-boot \ -boot-load-size 4 -boot-info-table -iso-level 2 -input-charset utf-8 \ -o grub.iso /tmp/iso
Write the resulting file grub.iso to a CD using
your preferred utility. Do not burn the ISO image as a data file, but
use the option for burning a CD image in your burning utility.
The graphical SUSE screen is displayed on the first console if the
option vga= is used as a
kernel parameter. If you install using YaST, this option is
automatically activated in accordance with the selected resolution and
the graphics card. There are three ways to disable the SUSE screen, if
desired:
value
Enter the command echo 0 >/proc/splash on the command line to disable the graphical screen. To activate it again, enter echo 1 >/proc/splash.
Add the kernel parameter splash=0 to your boot loader
configuration. Chapter 6, The Boot Loader GRUB provides more information
about this. However, if you prefer the text mode (the default in
earlier versions) set vga=normal.
Compile a new kernel and disable the option in . Disabling framebuffer support in the kernel automatically disables the splash screen, as well.
![]() | No Support |
|---|---|
SUSE cannot provide any support for your system if you run it with a custom kernel. | |
This section lists some of the problems frequently encountered when booting with GRUB and a short description of possible solutions. Some of the problems are covered in articles in the Support Database at http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Support_database. Use the search dialog to search for keywords like GRUB, boot and boot loader.
XFS leaves no room for stage1 in the partition
boot block. Therefore, do not specify an XFS partition as the location
of the boot loader. This problem can be solved by creating a separate
boot partition that is not formatted with XFS.
GRUB checks the geometry of connected hard disks when the system is booted. Sometimes, the BIOS returns inconsistent information and GRUB reports a GRUB Geom Error. In this case, update the BIOS.
GRUB also returns this error message if Linux was installed on an additional hard disk that is not registered in the BIOS. stage1 of the boot loader is found and loaded correctly, but stage2 is not found. This problem can be remedied by registering the new hard disk in the BIOS.
During the installation, YaST may have incorrectly determined the
boot sequence of the hard disks. For example, GRUB may regard the
PATA (IDE) disk as hd0 and the SCSI disk as
hd1, although the boot sequence in the BIOS is
reversed (SCSI before PATA).
In this case, correct the hard disks during the boot process with the
help of the GRUB command line. After the system has booted, edit
device.map to apply the new mapping permanently.
Then check the GRUB device names in the files
/boot/grub/menu.lst and
/boot/grub/device.map and reinstall the boot
loader with the following command:
grub --batch < /etc/grub.conf
Some operating systems, such as Windows, can only boot from the first hard disk. If such an operating system is installed on a hard disk other than the first hard disk, you can effect a logical change for the respective menu entry.
... title windows map (hd0) (hd1) map (hd1) (hd0) chainloader(hd1,0)+1 ...
In this example, Windows is started from the second hard disk. For
this purpose, the logical order of the hard disks is changed with
map. This change does not affect the logic within
the GRUB menu file. Therefore, the second hard disk must be
specified for chainloader.
Extensive information about GRUB is available at http://www.gnu.org/software/grub/. Also refer to the grub info page. You can also search for the keyword “GRUB” in the Support Database at http://en.opensuse.org/Portal:Support_database to get information about special issues.
Contents
Abstract
This chapter starts with information about various software packages, the
virtual consoles and the keyboard layout. We talk about software
components like bash,
cron and
logrotate, because they were
changed or enhanced during the last release cycles. Even if they are
small or considered of minor importance, users may want to change their
default behavior, because these components are often closely coupled with
the system. The chapter concludes with a section about language and
country-specific settings (I18N and L10N).
The programs bash,
cron,
logrotate,
locate,
ulimit and
free are very important for
system administrators and many users. Man pages and info pages are two
useful sources of information about commands, but both are not always
available. GNU Emacs is a popular and very configurable text editor.
Bash is the default system shell. When used as a login shell, it reads several initialization files. Bash processes them in the order they appear in this list:
/etc/profile
~/.profile
/etc/bash.bashrc
~/.bashrc
Make custom settings in ~/.profile or
~/.bashrc. To ensure the correct processing of these
files, it is necessary to copy the basic settings from
/etc/skel/.profile or
/etc/skel/.bashrc into the home directory of the
user. It is recommended to copy the settings from
/etc/skel after an update. Execute the following
shell commands to prevent the loss of personal adjustments:
mv ~/.bashrc ~/.bashrc.old cp /etc/skel/.bashrc ~/.bashrc mv ~/.profile ~/.profile.old cp /etc/skel/.profile ~/.profile
Then copy personal adjustments back from the *.old
files.
If you want to run commands regularly and automatically in the background at predefined times, cron is the tool to use. cron is driven by specially formatted time tables. Some of them come with the system and users can write their own tables if needed.
The cron tables are located in /var/spool/cron/tabs.
/etc/crontab serves as a systemwide cron table.
Enter the username to run the command directly after the time table and
before the command. In Example 7.1, “Entry in /etc/crontab”,
root is entered.
Package-specific tables, located in /etc/cron.d,
have the same format. See the cron man page
(man cron).
You cannot edit /etc/crontab by calling the command
crontab -e. This file must be loaded directly into an
editor, then modified and saved.
A number of packages install shell scripts to the directories
/etc/cron.hourly,
/etc/cron.daily,
/etc/cron.weekly and
/etc/cron.monthly, whose execution is controlled by
/usr/lib/cron/run-crons.
/usr/lib/cron/run-crons is run every 15 minutes from
the main table (/etc/crontab). This guarantees that
processes that may have been neglected can be run at the proper time.
To run the hourly, daily or
other periodic maintenance scripts at custom times, remove the time stamp
files regularly using /etc/crontab entries (see
Example 7.2, “/etc/crontab: Remove Time Stamp Files”, which removes the
hourly one before every full hour, the
daily one once a day at 2:14 a.m., etc.).
Example 7.2. /etc/crontab: Remove Time Stamp Files¶
59 * * * * root rm -f /var/spool/cron/lastrun/cron.hourly 14 2 * * * root rm -f /var/spool/cron/lastrun/cron.daily 29 2 * * 6 root rm -f /var/spool/cron/lastrun/cron.weekly 44 2 1 * * root rm -f /var/spool/cron/lastrun/cron.monthly
Or you can set DAILY_TIME in
/etc/sysconfig/cron to the time at which
cron.daily should start. The setting of
MAX_NOT_RUN ensures that the daily tasks get triggered
to run, even if the user did not turn on the computer at the specified
DAILY_TIME for a longer period of time. The maximum
value of MAX_NOT_RUN is 14 days.
The daily system maintenance jobs are distributed to various scripts for
reasons of clarity. They are contained in the package
aaa_base.
/etc/cron.daily contains, for example, the
components suse.de-backup-rpmdb,
suse.de-clean-tmp or
suse.de-cron-local.
There are a number of system services (daemons) that,
along with the kernel itself, regularly record the system status and
specific events onto log files. This way, the administrator can regularly
check the status of the system at a certain point in time, recognize
errors or faulty functions and troubleshoot them with pinpoint precision.
These log files are normally stored in /var/log as
specified by FHS and grow on a daily basis. The
logrotate package helps control the growth of
these files.
Configure logrotate with the file /etc/logrotate.conf. In particular, the
include specification primarily configures the
additional files to read. Programs that produce log files install
individual configuration files in /etc/logrotate.d.
For example, such files ship with the packages
apache2
(/etc/logrotate.d/apache2) and
syslogd
(/etc/logrotate.d/syslog).
Example 7.3. Example for /etc/logrotate.conf¶
# see "man logrotate" for details
# rotate log files weekly
weekly
# keep 4 weeks worth of backlogs
rotate 4
# create new (empty) log files after rotating old ones
create
# uncomment this if you want your log files compressed
#compress
# RPM packages drop log rotation information into this directory
include /etc/logrotate.d
# no packages own lastlog or wtmp - we'll rotate them here
#/var/log/wtmp {
# monthly
# create 0664 root utmp
# rotate 1
#}
# system-specific logs may be also be configured here.
logrotate is controlled through cron and is called daily by
/etc/cron.daily/logrotate.
locate, a command for quickly finding files, is not
included in the standard scope of installed software. If desired, install
the package findutils-locate. The updatedb
process is started automatically every night or about 15 minutes
after booting the system.
With the ulimit (user limits) command, it is possible to set limits for the use of system resources and to have these displayed. ulimit is especially useful for limiting available memory for applications. With this, an application can be prevented from co-opting too much of the system resources and slowing or even hanging up the operating system.
ulimit can be used with various options. To limit memory usage, use the options listed in Table 7.1, “ulimit: Setting Resources for the User”.
Table 7.1. ulimit: Setting Resources for the User¶
|
|
The maximum resident set size |
|
|
The maximum amount of virtual memory available to the shell |
|
|
The maximum size of the stack |
|
|
The maximum size of core files created |
|
|
All current limits are reported |
Systemwide entries can be made in /etc/profile.
There, enable creation of core files (needed by programmers for
debugging). A normal user cannot increase the values
specified in /etc/profile by the system
administrator, but can make special entries in
~/.bashrc.
Example 7.4. ulimit: Settings in ~/.bashrc¶
# Limits maximum resident set size (physical memory): ulimit -m 98304 # Limits of virtual memory: ulimit -v 98304
Memory allocations must be specified in KB. For more detailed information, see man bash.
![]() | |
Not all shells support ulimit directives. PAM (for
instance, | |
The free command displays the total amount of free and used physical memory and swap space in the system, as well as the buffers and cache consumed by the kernel. The concept of available RAM dates back to before the days of unified memory management. The slogan free memory is bad memory applies well to Linux. As a result, Linux has always made the effort to balance out caches without actually allowing free or unused memory.
Basically, the kernel does not have direct knowledge of any applications or user data. Instead, it manages applications and user data in a page cache. If memory runs short, parts of it are written to the swap partition or to files, from which they can initially be read with the help of the mmap command (see man mmap).
The kernel also contains other caches, such as the slab
cache, where the caches used for network access are stored.
This may explain the differences between the counters in
/proc/meminfo. Most, but not all, of them can be
accessed via /proc/slabinfo.
However, if your goal is to find out how much RAM is currently being
used, find this information in /proc/meminfo.
For some GNU applications (such as tar), the man pages are no longer
maintained. For these commands, use the --help option to
get a quick overview of the info pages, which provide more in-depth
instructions. Info
is GNU's hypertext system. Read an introduction to this system by
entering info info. Info pages can be
viewed with Emacs by entering emacs -f
info or directly in a console with
info. You can also use tkinfo, xinfo or the help
system to view info pages.
To read a man page enter man
man_page. If a man page with the
same name exists in different sections, they will all be listed with the
corresponding section numbers. Select the one to display. If you don't
enter a section number within a few seconds, the first man page will be
displayed.
If you want to change this to the default system behavior, set
MAN_POSIXLY_CORRECT=1 in a shell initialization file
such as ~/.bashrc.
GNU Emacs is a complex work environment. The following sections cover the configuration files processed when GNU Emacs is started. More information is available at http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/.
On start-up, Emacs reads several files containing the settings of the
user, system administrator and distributor for customization or
preconfiguration. The initialization file ~/.emacs is
installed to the home directories of the individual users from
/etc/skel. .emacs, in turn,
reads the file /etc/skel/.gnu-emacs. To customize the
program, copy .gnu-emacs to the home directory (with
cp /etc/skel/.gnu-emacs ~/.gnu-emacs) and make the
desired settings there.
.gnu-emacs defines the file
~/.gnu-emacs-custom as
custom-file. If users make settings with the
customize options in Emacs, the settings are saved to
~/.gnu-emacs-custom.
With openSUSE, the emacs
package installs the file site-start.el in the
directory /usr/share/emacs/site-lisp. The file
site-start.el is loaded before the initialization
file ~/.emacs. Among other things,
site-start.el ensures that special configuration
files distributed with Emacs add-on packages, such as
psgml, are loaded automatically.
Configuration files of this type are located in
/usr/share/emacs/site-lisp, too, and always begin
with suse-start-. The local system administrator can
specify systemwide settings in default.el.
More information about these files is available in the Emacs info file under Init File: info:/emacs/InitFile. Information about how to disable the loading of these files (if necessary) is also provided at this location.
The components of Emacs are divided into several packages:
The base package emacs.
emacs-x11 (usually installed):
the program with X11 support.
emacs-nox: the program
without X11 support.
emacs-info: online
documentation in info format.
emacs-el: the uncompiled
library files in Emacs Lisp. These are not required at runtime.
Numerous add-on packages can be installed if needed:
emacs-auctex (LaTeX),
psgml (SGML and XML),
gnuserv (client and server
operation) and others.
Linux is a multiuser and multitasking system. The advantages of these
features can be appreciated even on a stand-alone PC system. In text mode,
there are six virtual consoles available. Switch between them using
Alt+F1 through
Alt+F6. The
seventh console is reserved for X and the tenth console shows kernel
messages. More or fewer consoles can be assigned by modifying the file
/etc/inittab.
To switch to a console from X without shutting it down, use Ctrl+Alt+F1 to Ctrl+Alt+F6. To return to X, press Alt+F7.
To standardize the keyboard mapping of programs, changes were made to the following files:
/etc/inputrc
/etc/X11/Xmodmap
/etc/skel/.emacs
/etc/skel/.gnu-emacs
/etc/skel/.vimrc
/etc/csh.cshrc
/etc/termcap
/usr/share/terminfo/x/xterm
/usr/share/X11/app-defaults/XTerm
/usr/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp/term/*.elThese changes only affect applications that use terminfo entries or whose configuration files are changed directly (vi, emacs, etc.). Applications not shipped with the system should be adapted to these defaults.
Under X, the compose key (multikey) can be enabled as explained in
/etc/X11/Xmodmap.
Further settings are possible using the X Keyboard Extension (XKB). This extension is also used by the desktop environments GNOME (gswitchit) and KDE (kxkb).
![]() | For More Information |
|---|---|
Information about XKB is available in the documents listed in
| |
The system is, to a very large extent, internationalized and can be modified for local needs. Internationalization (I18N) allows specific localizations (L10N). The abbreviations I18N and L10N are derived from the first and last letters of the words and, in between, the number of letters omitted.
Settings are made with LC_ variables defined in
the file /etc/sysconfig/language. This refers not
only to native language support, but also to the
categories Messages (Language), Character
Set, Sort Order, Time and
Date, Numbers and
Money. Each of these categories can be defined
directly with its own variable or indirectly with a master variable in the
file language (see the locale man
page).
RC_LC_MESSAGES,
RC_LC_CTYPE,
RC_LC_COLLATE,
RC_LC_TIME,
RC_LC_NUMERIC,
RC_LC_MONETARY
These variables are passed to the shell without the
RC_ prefix and represent the listed
categories. The shell profiles concerned are listed below. The current
setting can be shown with the command locale.
RC_LC_ALL
This variable, if set, overwrites the values of the variables already mentioned.
RC_LANG
If none of the previous variables are set, this is the fallback. By
default, only RC_LANG is set. This makes it
easier for users to enter their own values.
ROOT_USES_LANG
A yes or no variable. If set to
no, root
always works in the POSIX environment.
The variables can be set with the YaST sysconfig editor. The value of such a variable contains the language code, country code, encoding and modifier. The individual components are connected by special characters:
LANG=<language>[[_<COUNTRY>].<Encoding>[@<Modifier>]]
You should always set the language and country codes together. Language settings follow the standard ISO 639 available at http://www.evertype.com/standards/iso639/iso639-en.html and http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/. Country codes are listed in ISO 3166 available at http://www.din.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1/en_listp1.html.
It only makes sense to set values for which usable description files can
be found in /usr/lib/locale. Additional description
files can be created from the files in
/usr/share/i18n using the command
localedef. The description files are part of the
glibc-i18ndata package. A description file for
en_US.UTF-8 (for English and United States) can be
created with:
localedef -i en_US -f UTF-8 en_US.UTF-8
LANG=en_US.UTF-8
This is the default setting if American English is selected during installation. If you selected another language, that language is enabled but still with UTF-8 as the character encoding.
LANG=en_US.ISO-8859-1
This sets the language to English, country to United States and the
character set to ISO-8859-1. This character set
does not support the Euro sign, but it can be useful sometimes for
programs that have not been updated to support
UTF-8. The string defining the charset
(ISO-8859-1 in this case) is then evaluated by
programs like Emacs.
LANG=en_IE@euro
The above example explicitly includes the Euro sign in a language setting. This setting is basically obsolete now, as UTF-8 also covers the Euro symbol. It is only useful if an application supports ISO-8859-15 and not UTF-8.
In former releases, it was necessary to run SuSEconfig
after doing any changes to /etc/sysconfig/language.
SuSEconfig then wrote the changes to
/etc/SuSEconfig/profile and
/etc/SuSEconfig/csh.login. Upon login, these files
were read by /etc/profile (for the Bash) or by
/etc/csh.login (for the tcsh) .
In recent releases, /etc/SuSEconfig/profile has been
replaced with /etc/profile.d/lang.sh, and
/etc/SuSEconfig/csh.login with
/etc/profile.de/lang.csh. But if they exist, both
legacy file are still read upon login.
The process chain is now as follows:
For the Bash: /etc/profile reads
/etc/profile.d/lang.sh which, in turn, analyzes
/etc/sysconfig/language.
For tcsh: At login, /etc/csh.login reads
/etc/profile.d/lang.csh which, in turn, analyzes
/etc/sysconfig/language.
This ensures that any changes to
/etc/sysconfig/language are available at the next
login to the respective shell, without having to run SuSEconfig
first.
Users can override the system defaults by editing their
~/.bashrc accordingly. For instance, if you do not
want to use the systemwide en_US for program messages,
include LC_MESSAGES=es_ES so that messages are
displayed in Spanish instead.
~/.i18n¶
If you are not satisfied with locale system defaults, change the settings
in ~/.i18n according to the Bash scripting syntax.
Entries in ~/.i18n override system defaults from
/etc/sysconfig/language. Use the same variable names
but without the RC_ namespace prefixes. For example,
use LANG instead of RC_LANG:
LANG=cs_CZ.UTF-8 LC_COLLATE=C
Files in the category Messages are, as a rule, only
stored in the corresponding language directory (like
en) to have a fallback. If you set
LANG to en_US and the message
file in /usr/share/locale/en_US/LC_MESSAGES does not
exist, it falls back to
/usr/share/locale/en/LC_MESSAGES.
A fallback chain can also be defined, for example, for Breton to French or for Galician to Spanish to Portuguese:
LANGUAGE="br_FR:fr_FR"
LANGUAGE="gl_ES:es_ES:pt_PT"
If desired, use the Norwegian variants Nynorsk and Bokmål instead (with
additional fallback to no):
LANG="nn_NO"
LANGUAGE="nn_NO:nb_NO:no"
or
LANG="nb_NO"
LANGUAGE="nb_NO:nn_NO:no"
Note that in Norwegian, LC_TIME is also treated
differently.
One problem that can arise is a separator used to delimit groups of
digits not being recognized properly. This occurs if
LANG is set to only a two-letter language code
like de, but the definition file glibc uses is located
in /usr/share/lib/de_DE/LC_NUMERIC. Thus
LC_NUMERIC must be set to
de_DE to make the separator definition visible to the
system.
The GNU C Library Reference Manual, Chapter
“Locales and Internationalization”. It is included in
glibc-info.
Markus Kuhn, UTF-8 and Unicode FAQ for Unix/Linux, currently at http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~mgk25/unicode.html.
Unicode-Howto by Bruno Haible, available at http://tldp.org/HOWTO/Unicode-HOWTO-1.html.
udev¶Contents
/dev Directoryuevents and udevudev Daemonudev Rulesudev
The kernel can add or remove almost any device in a running system.
Changes in the device state (whether a device is plugged in or removed)
need to be propagated to userspace. Devices need to be configured as soon
as they are plugged in and recognized. Users of a certain device need to
be informed about any changes in this device's recognized state.
udev provides the needed
infrastructure to dynamically maintain the device node files and symbolic
links in the /dev directory.
udev rules provide a way to plug
external tools into the kernel device event processing. This enables you
to customize udev device handling
by, for example, adding certain scripts to execute as part of kernel
device handling, or request and import additional data to evaluate during
device handling.
/dev Directory¶
The device nodes in the /dev directory provide
access to the corresponding kernel devices. With
udev, the
/dev directory reflects the current state of the
kernel. Every kernel device has one corresponding device file. If a
device is disconnected from the system, the device node is removed.
The content of the /dev directory is kept on a
temporary file system and all files are rendered at every system
start-up. Manually created or modified files do not, by design, survive a
reboot. Static files and directories that should always be present in the
/dev directory regardless of the state of the
corresponding kernel device can be placed in the
/lib/udev/devices directory. At system start-up, the
contents of that directory is copied to the /dev
directory with the same ownership and permissions as the files in
/lib/udev/devices.
uevents and udev¶
The required device information is exported by the
sysfs file system. For every
device the kernel has detected and initialized, a directory with the
device name is created. It contains attribute files with device-specific
properties.
Every time a device is added or removed, the kernel sends a uevent to
notify udev of the change. The
udev daemon reads and parses all
provided rules from the /etc/udev/rules.d/*.rules
files once at start-up and keeps them in memory. If rules files are
changed, added or removed, the daemon can reload the in-memory
representation of all rules with the command udevadm control
reload_rules. This is also done when running
/etc/init.d/boot.udev reload. For more details on
udev rules and their syntax,
refer to Section 8.6, “Influencing Kernel Device Event Handling with udev Rules”.
Every received event is matched against the set of provides rules. The
rules can add or change event environment keys, request a specific name
for the device node to create, add symlinks pointing to the node or add
programs to run after the device node is created. The driver core
uevents are received from a
kernel netlink socket.
The kernel bus drivers probe for devices. For every detected device, the
kernel creates an internal device structure while the driver core sends a
uevent to the udev daemon. Bus
devices identify themselves by a specially-formatted ID, which tells what
kind of device it is. Usually these IDs consist of vendor and product ID
and other subsystem-specific values. Every bus has its own scheme for
these IDs, called MODALIAS. The kernel takes the device
information, composes a MODALIAS ID string from it and
sends that string along with the event. For a USB mouse, it looks like
this:
MODALIAS=usb:v046DpC03Ed2000dc00dsc00dp00ic03isc01ip02
Every device driver carries a list of known aliases for devices it can
handle. The list is contained in the kernel module file itself. The
program depmod reads the ID lists and creates the file
modules.alias in the kernel's
/lib/modules directory for all currently available
modules. With this infrastructure, module loading is as easy as calling
modprobe for every event that carries a
MODALIAS key. If modprobe $MODALIAS
is called, it matches the device alias composed for the device with the
aliases provided by the modules. If a matching entry is found, that
module is loaded. All this is automatically triggered by
udev.
All device events happening during the boot process before the
udev daemon is running are lost,
because the infrastructure to handle these events resides on the root
file system and is not available at that time. To cover that loss, the
kernel provides a uevent file located in the device
directory of every device in the
sysfs file system. By writing
add to that file, the kernel resends the same event as
the one lost during boot. A simple loop over all
uevent files in /sys triggers
all events again to create the device nodes and perform device setup.
As an example, a USB mouse present during boot may not be initialized by
the early boot logic, because the driver is not available at that time.
The event for the device discovery was lost and failed to find a kernel
module for the device. Instead of manually searching for possibly
connected devices, udev just
requests all device events from the kernel after the root file system is
available, so the event for the USB mouse device just runs again. Now it
finds the kernel module on the mounted root file system and the USB mouse
can be initialized.
From userspace, there is no visible difference between a device coldplug sequence and a device discovery during runtime. In both cases, the same rules are used to match and the same configured programs are run.
udev Daemon¶
The program udevadm monitor can be used to visualize
the driver core events and the timing of the
udev event processes.
UEVENT[1185238505.276660] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1 (usb) UDEV [1185238505.279198] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1 (usb) UEVENT[1185238505.279527] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0 (usb) UDEV [1185238505.285573] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0 (usb) UEVENT[1185238505.298878] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10 (input) UDEV [1185238505.305026] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10 (input) UEVENT[1185238505.305442] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10/mouse2 (input) UEVENT[1185238505.306440] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10/event4 (input) UDEV [1185238505.325384] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10/event4 (input) UDEV [1185238505.342257] add /devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10/mouse2 (input)
The UEVENT lines show the events the kernel has sent
over netlink. The UDEV lines show the finished
udev event handlers. The timing
is printed in microseconds. The time between UEVENT
and UDEV is the time
udev took to process this event
or the udev daemon has delayed
its execution to synchronize this event with related and already running
events. For example, events for hard disk partitions always wait for the
main disk device event to finish, because the partition events may rely
on the data that the main disk event has queried from the hardware.
udevadm monitor --env shows the complete event environment:
ACTION=add DEVPATH=/devices/pci0000:00/0000:00:1d.2/usb3/3-1/3-1:1.0/input/input10 SUBSYSTEM=input SEQNUM=1181 NAME="Logitech USB-PS/2 Optical Mouse" PHYS="usb-0000:00:1d.2-1/input0" UNIQ="" EV=7 KEY=70000 0 0 0 0 REL=103 MODALIAS=input:b0003v046DpC03Ee0110-e0,1,2,k110,111,112,r0,1,8,amlsfw
udev also sends messages to
syslog. The default syslog priority that controls which messages are sent
to syslog is specified in the
udev configuration file
/etc/udev/udev.conf. The log priority of the running
daemon can be changed with udevadm control
log_priority=level/number.
udev Rules¶
A udev rule can match any
property the kernel adds to the event itself or any information that the
kernel exports to sysfs. The rule can also request
additional information from external programs. Every event is matched
against all provided rules. All rules are located in the
/etc/udev/rules.d directory.
Every line in the rules file contains at least one key value pair. There
are two kinds of keys, match and assignment keys. If all match keys match
their values, the rule is applied and the assignment keys are assigned
the specified value. A matching rule may specify the name of the device
node, add symlinks pointing to the node or run a specified program as
part of the event handling. If no matching rule is found, the default
device node name is used to create the device node. Detailed information
about the rule syntax and the provided keys to match or import data are
described in the udev man page.
The following example rules provide a basic introduction to
udev rule syntax. The example
rules are all taken from the
udev default rule set that is
located under
/etc/udev/rules.d/50-udev-default.rules.
Example 8.1. Example udev Rules¶
# console
KERNEL=="console", MODE="0600", OPTIONS="last_rule"
# serial devices
KERNEL=="ttyUSB*", ATTRS{product}=="[Pp]alm*Handheld*", SYMLINK+="pilot"
# printer
SUBSYSTEM=="usb", KERNEL=="lp*", NAME="usb/%k", SYMLINK+="usb%k", GROUP="lp"
# kernel firmware loader
SUBSYSTEM=="firmware", ACTION=="add", RUN+="firmware.sh"
The console rule consists of three keys: one
match key (KERNEL) and two assign keys
(MODE, OPTIONS). The
KERNEL match rule searches the device list for any
items of the type console. Only exact matches are
valid and trigger this rule to be executed. The MODE
key assigns special permissions to the device node, in this case, read
and write permissions to the owner of this device only. The
OPTIONS key makes this rule the last rule to be
applied to any device of this type. Any later rule matching this
particular device type does not have any effect.
The serial devices rule is not available in
50-udev-default.rules anymore, but it is still worth
considering. It consists of two match keys (KERNEL and
ATTRS) and one assign key
(SYMLINK). The KERNEL key searches
for all devices of the ttyUSB type. Using the
* wild card, this key matches several of these
devices. The second match key, ATTRS, checks whether
the product attribute file in
sysfs for any ttyUSB device
contains a certain string. The assign key (SYMLINK)
triggers the addition of a symbolic link to this device under
/dev/pilot. The operator used in this key
(+=) tells
udev to additionally perform
this action, even if previous or later rules add other symbolic links. As
this rule contains two match keys, it is only applied if both conditions
are met.
The printer rule deals with USB printers and
contains two match keys which must both apply to get the entire rule
applied (SUBSYSTEM and KERNEL).
Three assign keys deal with the naming for this device type
(NAME), the creation of symbolic device links
(SYMLINK) and the group membership for this device
type (GROUP). Using the * wild card
in the KERNEL key makes it match several
lp printer devices. Substitutions are used in both,
the NAME and the SYMLINK keys to
extend these strings by the internal device name. For example, the
symlink to the first lp USB printer would read
/dev/usblp0.
The kernel firmware loader rule makes
udev load additional firmware by
an external helper script during runtime. The
SUBSYSTEM match key searches for the
firmware subsystem. The ACTION key
checks whether any device belonging to the firmware
subsystem has been added. The RUN+= key triggers the
execution of the firmware.sh script to locate the
firmware that is to be loaded.
Some general characteristics are common to all rules:
Each rule consists of one or more key value pairs separated by a comma.
A key's operation is determined by the operator.
udev rules support several
different operators.
Each given value must be enclosed by quotation marks.
Each line of the rules file represents one rule. If a rule is longer
than just one line, use \ to join the different
lines just as you would do in shell syntax.
udev rules support a
shell-style pattern that matches the *,
?, and [] patterns.
udev rules support
substitutions.
udev Rules¶Creating keys you can choose from several different operators, depending on the type of key you want to create. Match keys will normally just be used to find a value that either matches or explicitly mismatches the search value. Match keys contain either of the following operators:
==
Compare for equality. If the key contains a search pattern, all results matching this pattern are valid.
!=
Compare for non-equality. If the key contains a search pattern, all results matching this pattern are valid.
Any of the following operators can be used with assign keys:
=
Assign a value to a key. If the key previously consisted of a list of values, the key resets and only the single value is assigned.
+=
Add a value to a key that contains a list of entries.
:=
Assign a final value. Disallow any later change by later rules.
udev Rules¶
udev rules support the use of
placeholders and substitutions. Use them in a similar fashion as you
would do in any other scripts. The following substitutions can be used
with udev rules:
%r, $root
The device directory, /dev by default.
%p, $devpath
The value of DEVPATH.
%k, $kernel
The value of KERNEL or the internal device name.
%n, $number
The device number.
%N, $tempnode
The temporary name of the device file.
%M, $major
The major number of the device.
%m, $minor
The minor number of the device.
%s{attribute},
$attr{attribute}
The value of a sysfs attribute (specified by
attribute).
%E{variable},
$attr{variable}
The value of an environment variable (specified by
variable).
%c, $result
The output of PROGRAM.
%%
The % character.
$$
The $ character.
udev Match Keys¶
Match keys describe conditions that must be met before a
udev rule can be applied. The
following match keys are available:
ACTION
The name of the event action, for example, add or
remove when adding or removing a device.
DEVPATH
The device path of the event device, for example,
DEVPATH=/bus/pci/drivers/ipw3945 to search for all
events related to the ipw3945 driver.
KERNEL
The internal (kernel) name of the event device.
SUBSYSTEM
The subsystem of the event device, for example,
SUBSYSTEM=usb for all events related to USB
devices.
ATTR{filename}
sysfs attributes of the
event device. To match a string contained in the
vendor attribute file name, you could use
ATTR{vendor}=="On[sS]tream", for example.
KERNELS
Let udev search the device
path upwards for a matching device name.
SUBSYSTEMS
Let udev search the device
path upwards for a matching device subsystem name.
DRIVERS
Let udev search the device
path upwards for a matching device driver name.
ATTRS{filename}
Let udev search the device
path upwards for a device with matching
sysfs attribute values.
ENV{key}
The value of an environment variable, for example,
ENV{ID_BUS}="ieee1394 to search for all events
related to the FireWire bus ID.
PROGRAM
Let udev execute an external
program. To be successful, the program must return with exit code
zero. The program's output, printed to stdout, is available to the
RESULT key.
RESULT
Match the output string of the last PROGRAM call.
Either include this key in the same rule as the
PROGRAM key or in a later one.
udev Assign Keys¶
In contrast to the match keys described above, assign keys do not
describe conditions that must be met. They assign values, names and
actions to the device nodes maintained by
udev.
NAME
The name of the device node to be created. Once a rule has set a node
name, all other rules with a NAME key for this
node are ignored.
SYMLINK
The name of a symlink related to the node to be created. Multiple matching rules can add symlinks to be created with the device node. You can also specify multiple symlinks for one node in one rule using the space character to separate the symlink names.
OWNER, GROUP, MODE
The permissions for the new device node. Values specified here overwrite anything that has been compiled in.
ATTR{key}
Specify a value to be written to a
sysfs attribute of the
event device. If the == operator is used, this key
is also used to match against the value of a
sysfs attribute.
ENV{key}
Tell udev to export a
variable to the environment. If the == operator is
used, this key is also used to match against an environment variable.
RUN
Tell udev to add a program
to the list of programs to be executed for this device. Keep in mind
to restrict this to very short tasks to avoid blocking further events
for this device.
LABEL
Add a label where a GOTO can jump to.
GOTO
Tell udev to skip a number
of rules and continue with the one that carries the label referenced
by the GOTO key.
IMPORT{type}
Load variables into the event environment such as the output of an
external program. udev
imports variables of several different types. If no type is
specified, udev tries to
determine the type itself based on the executable bit of the file
permissions.
program tells
udev to execute an
external program and import its output.
file tells
udev to import a text
file.
parent tells
udev to import the stored
keys from the parent device.
WAIT_FOR_SYSFS
Tells udev to wait for the
specified sysfs file to
be created for a certain device. For example,
WAIT_FOR_SYSFS="ioerr_cnt" informs
udev to wait until the
ioerr_cnt file has been created.
OPTIONS
The OPTION key may have several possible values:
last_rule tells
udev to ignore all later
rules.
ignore_device tells
udev to ignore this event
completely.
ignore_remove tells
udev to ignore all later
remove events for the device.
all_partitions tells
udev to create device
nodes for all available partitions on a block device.
The dynamic device directory and the
udev rules infrastructure make
it possible to provide stable names for all disk devices—regardless
of their order of recognition or the connection used for the device.
Every appropriate block device the kernel creates is examined by tools
with special knowledge about certain buses, drive types or file systems.
Along with the dynamic kernel-provided device node name,
udev maintains classes of
persistent symbolic links pointing to the device:
/dev/disk
|-- by-id
| |-- scsi-SATA_HTS726060M9AT00_MRH453M4HWHG7B -> ../../sda
| |-- scsi-SATA_HTS726060M9AT00_MRH453M4HWHG7B-part1 -> ../../sda1
| |-- scsi-SATA_HTS726060M9AT00_MRH453M4HWHG7B-part6 -> ../../sda6
| |-- scsi-SATA_HTS726060M9AT00_MRH453M4HWHG7B-part7 -> ../../sda7
| |-- usb-Generic_STORAGE_DEVICE_02773 -> ../../sdd
| `-- usb-Generic_STORAGE_DEVICE_02773-part1 -> ../../sdd1
|-- by-label
| |-- Photos -> ../../sdd1
| |-- SUSE10 -> ../../sda7
| `-- devel -> ../../sda6
|-- by-path
| |-- pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0 -> ../../sda
| |-- pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1 -> ../../sda1
| |-- pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part6 -> ../../sda6
| |-- pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part7 -> ../../sda7
| |-- pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-1:0:0:0 -> ../../sr0
| |-- usb-02773:0:0:2 -> ../../sdd
| |-- usb-02773:0:0:2-part1 -> ../../sdd1
`-- by-uuid
|-- 159a47a4-e6e6-40be-a757-a629991479ae -> ../../sda7
|-- 3e999973-00c9-4917-9442-b7633bd95b9e -> ../../sda6
`-- 4210-8F8C -> ../../sdd1udev¶/sys/*
Virtual file system provided by the Linux kernel, exporting all
currently known devices. This information is used by
udev to create device nodes
in /dev
/dev/*
Dynamically created device nodes and static content copied at boot
time from /lib/udev/devices/*
The following files and directories contain the crucial elements of the
udev infrastructure:
/etc/udev/udev.conf
Main udev configuration file.
/etc/udev/rules.d/*
udev event matching rules.
/lib/udev/devices/*
Static /dev content.
/lib/udev/*
Helper programs called from
udev rules.
For more information about the
udev infrastructure, refer to
the following man pages:
udev
General information about
udev, keys, rules and other
important configuration issues.
udevadm can be used to control the runtime behavior
of udev, request kernel
events, manage the event queue and provide simple debugging
mechanisms.
udevd
Information about the udev
event managing daemon.
Contents
Contents
Abstract
Linux offers the necessary networking tools and features for integration into all types of network structures. Network access using a network card, modem or other device can be configured with YaST. Manual configuration is also possible. In this chapter only the fundamental mechanisms and the relevant network configuration files are covered.
Linux and other Unix operating systems use the TCP/IP protocol. It is not a single network protocol, but a family of network protocols that offer various services. The protocols listed in Table 9.1, “Several Protocols in the TCP/IP Protocol Family”, are provided for the purpose of exchanging data between two machines via TCP/IP. Networks combined by TCP/IP, comprising a worldwide network, are also referred to as “the Internet.”
RFC stands for Request for Comments. RFCs are documents that describe various Internet protocols and implementation procedures for the operating system and its applications. The RFC documents describe the setup of Internet protocols. To expand your knowledge of any of the protocols, refer to the appropriate RFC documents. These are available at http://www.ietf.org/rfc.html.
Table 9.1. Several Protocols in the TCP/IP Protocol Family¶
|
Protocol |
Description |
|---|---|
|
Transmission Control Protocol: a connection-oriented secure protocol. The data to transmit is first sent by the application as a stream of data and converted into the appropriate format by the operating system. The data arrives at the respective application on the destination host in the original data stream format it was initially sent. TCP determines whether any data has been lost or jumbled during the transmission. TCP is implemented wherever the data sequence matters. | |
|
User Datagram Protocol: a connectionless, insecure protocol. The data to transmit is sent in the form of packets generated by the application. The order in which the data arrives at the recipient is not guaranteed and data loss is possible. UDP is suitable for record-oriented applications. It features a smaller latency period than TCP. | |
|
Internet Control Message Protocol: Essentially, this is not a protocol for the end user, but a special control protocol that issues error reports and can control the behavior of machines participating in TCP/IP data transfer. In addition, it provides a special echo mode that can be viewed using the program ping. | |
|
Internet Group Management Protocol: This protocol controls machine behavior when implementing IP multicast. |
As shown in Figure 9.1, “Simplified Layer Model for TCP/IP”, data exchange takes place in different layers. The actual network layer is the insecure data transfer via IP (Internet protocol). On top of IP, TCP (transmission control protocol) guarantees, to a certain extent, security of the data transfer. The IP layer is supported by the underlying hardware-dependent protocol, such as ethernet.
The diagram provides one or two examples for each layer. The layers are ordered according to abstraction levels. The lowest layer is very close to the hardware. The uppermost layer, however, is almost a complete abstraction from the hardware. Every layer has its own special function. The special functions of each layer are mostly implicit in their description. The data link and physical layers represent the physical network used, such as ethernet.
Almost all hardware protocols work on a packet-oriented basis. The data to transmit is collected into packets (it cannot be sent all at once). The maximum size of a TCP/IP packet is approximately 64 KB. Packets are normally quite smaller, as the network hardware can be a limiting factor. The maximum size of a data packet on an ethernet is about fifteen hundred bytes. The size of a TCP/IP packet is limited to this amount when the data is sent over an ethernet. If more data is transferred, more data packets need to be sent by the operating system.
For the layers to serve their designated functions, additional information regarding each layer must be saved in the data packet. This takes place in the header of the packet. Every layer attaches a small block of data, called the protocol header, to the front of each emerging packet. A sample TCP/IP data packet traveling over an ethernet cable is illustrated in Figure 9.2, “TCP/IP Ethernet Packet”. The proof sum is located at the end of the packet, not at the beginning. This simplifies things for the network hardware.
When an application sends data over the network, the data passes through each layer, all implemented in the Linux kernel except the physical layer. Each layer is responsible for preparing the data so it can be passed to the next layer. The lowest layer is ultimately responsible for sending the data. The entire procedure is reversed when data is received. Like the layers of an onion, in each layer the protocol headers are removed from the transported data. Finally, the transport layer is responsible for making the data available for use by the applications at the destination. In this manner, one layer only communicates with the layer directly above or below it. For applications, it is irrelevant whether data is transmitted via a 100 Mbit/s FDDI network or via a 56-Kbit/s modem line. Likewise, it is irrelevant for the data line which kind of data is transmitted, as long as packets are in the correct format.
The discussion in this section is limited to IPv4 networks. For information about IPv6 protocol, the successor to IPv4, refer to Section 9.2, “IPv6—The Next Generation Internet”.
Every computer on the Internet has a unique 32-bit address. These 32 bits (or 4 bytes) are normally written as illustrated in the second row in Example 9.1, “Writing IP Addresses”.
Example 9.1. Writing IP Addresses¶
IP Address (binary): 11000000 10101000 00000000 00010100 IP Address (decimal): 192. 168. 0. 20
In decimal form, the four bytes are written in the decimal number system, separated by periods. The IP address is assigned to a host or a network interface. It can be used only once throughout the world. There are exceptions to this rule, but these are not relevant to the following passages.
The points in IP addresses indicate the hierarchical system. Until the 1990s, IP addresses were strictly categorized in classes. However, this system proved too inflexible and was discontinued. Now, classless routing (CIDR, classless interdomain routing) is used.
Netmasks are used to define the address range of a subnetwork. If two hosts are in the same subnetwork, they can reach each other directly. If they are not in the same subnetwork, they need the address of a gateway that handles all the traffic for the subnetwork. To check if two IP addresses are in the same subnet, simply “AND” both addresses with the netmask. If the result is identical, both IP addresses are in the same local network. If there are differences, the remote IP address, and thus the remote interface, can only be reached over a gateway.
To understand how the netmask works, look at
Example 9.2, “Linking IP Addresses to the Netmask”. The netmask consists of 32
bits that identify how much of an IP address belongs to the network. All
those bits that are 1 mark the corresponding bit in
the IP address as belonging to the network. All bits that are
0 mark bits inside the subnetwork. This means that
the more bits are 1, the smaller the subnetwork is.
Because the netmask always consists of several successive
1 bits, it is also possible to just count the number
of bits in the netmask. In Example 9.2, “Linking IP Addresses to the Netmask” the
first net with 24 bits could also be written as
192.168.0.0/24.
Example 9.2. Linking IP Addresses to the Netmask¶
IP address (192.168.0.20): 11000000 10101000 00000000 00010100 Netmask (255.255.255.0): 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 --------------------------------------------------------------- Result of the link: 11000000 10101000 00000000 00000000 In the decimal system: 192. 168. 0. 0 IP address (213.95.15.200): 11010101 10111111 00001111 11001000 Netmask (255.255.255.0): 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 --------------------------------------------------------------- Result of the link: 11010101 10111111 00001111 00000000 In the decimal system: 213. 95. 15. 0
To give another example: all machines connected with the same ethernet cable are usually located in the same subnetwork and are directly accessible. Even when the subnet is physically divided by switches or bridges, these hosts can still be reached directly.
IP addresses outside the local subnet can only be reached if a gateway is configured for the target network. In the most common case, there is only one gateway that handles all traffic that is external. However, it is also possible to configure several gateways for different subnets.
If a gateway has been configured, all external IP packets are sent to the appropriate gateway. This gateway then attempts to forward the packets in the same manner—from host to host—until it reaches the destination host or the packet's TTL (time to live) expires.
Table 9.2. Specific Addresses¶
|
Address Type |
Description |
|---|---|
|
This is the netmask AND any address in the network, as shown in
Example 9.2, “Linking IP Addresses to the Netmask” under
| |
|
This basically says, “Access all hosts in this subnetwork.” To generate this, the netmask is inverted in binary form and linked to the base network address with a logical OR. The above example therefore results in 192.168.0.255. This address cannot be assigned to any hosts. | |
|
The address |
Because IP addresses must be unique all over the world, you cannot just select random addresses. There are three address domains to use if you want to set up a private IP-based network. These cannot get any connection from the rest of the Internet, because they cannot be transmitted over the Internet. These address domains are specified in RFC 1597 and listed in Table 9.3, “Private IP Address Domains”.
Table 9.3. Private IP Address Domains¶
|
Network/Netmask |
Domain |
|---|---|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
Due to the emergence of the WWW (World Wide Web), the Internet has experienced explosive growth, with an increasing number of computers communicating via TCP/IP in the past fifteen years. Since Tim Berners-Lee at CERN (http://public.web.cern.ch) invented the WWW in 1990, the number of Internet hosts has grown from a few thousand to about a hundred million.
As mentioned, an IPv4 address consists of only 32 bits. Also, quite a few IP addresses are lost—they cannot be used due to the way in which networks are organized. The number of addresses available in your subnet is two to the power of the number of bits, minus two. A subnetwork has, for example, 2, 6, or 14 addresses available. To connect 128 hosts to the Internet, for example, you need a subnetwork with 256 IP addresses, from which only 254 are usable, because two IP addresses are needed for the structure of the subnetwork itself: the broadcast and the base network address.
Under the current IPv4 protocol, DHCP or NAT (network address translation) are the typical mechanisms used to circumvent the potential address shortage. Combined with the convention to keep private and public address spaces separate, these methods can certainly mitigate the shortage. The problem with them lies in their configuration, which is a chore to set up and a burden to maintain. To set up a host in an IPv4 network, you need a number of address items, such as the host's own IP address, the subnetmask, the gateway address and maybe a name server address. All these items need to be known and cannot be derived from somewhere else.
With IPv6, both the address shortage and the complicated configuration should be a thing of the past. The following sections tell more about the improvements and benefits brought by IPv6 and about the transition from the old protocol to the new one.
The most important and most visible improvement brought by the new protocol is the enormous expansion of the available address space. An IPv6 address is made up of 128 bit values instead of the traditional 32 bits. This provides for as many as several quadrillion IP addresses.
However, IPv6 addresses are not only different from their predecessors with regard to their length. They also have a different internal structure that may contain more specific information about the systems and the networks to which they belong. More details about this are found in Section 9.2.2, “Address Types and Structure”.
The following is a list of some other advantages of the new protocol:
IPv6 makes the network “plug and play” capable, which means that a newly set up system integrates into the (local) network without any manual configuration. The new host uses its automatic configuration mechanism to derive its own address from the information made available by the neighboring routers, relying on a protocol called the neighbor discovery (ND) protocol. This method does not require any intervention on the administrator's part and there is no need to maintain a central server for address allocation—an additional advantage over IPv4, where automatic address allocation requires a DHCP server or the usage of ARP and 169.254.0.0/16 addresses.
Nevertheless if a router is connected to a switch, the router should
send periodic advertisements with flags telling the hosts of a
network how they should interact with each other. For more
information, see RFC 2462 and the
radvd.conf(5) manpage, and RFC 3315.
IPv6 makes it possible to assign several addresses to one network interface at the same time. This allows users to access several networks easily, something that could be compared with the international roaming services offered by mobile phone companies: when you take your mobile phone abroad, the phone automatically logs in to a foreign service as soon as it enters the corresponding area, so you can be reached under the same number everywhere and are able to place an outgoing call just like in your home area.
With IPv4, network security is an add-on function. IPv6 includes IPsec as one of its core features, allowing systems to communicate over a secure tunnel to avoid eavesdropping by outsiders on the Internet.
Realistically, it would be impossible to switch the entire Internet from IPv4 to IPv6 at one time. Therefore, it is crucial that both protocols are able to coexist not only on the Internet, but also on one system. This is ensured by compatible addresses (IPv4 addresses can easily be translated into IPv6 addresses) and through the use of a number of tunnels. See Section 9.2.3, “Coexistence of IPv4 and IPv6”. Also, systems can rely on a dual stack IP technique to support both protocols at the same time, meaning that they have two network stacks that are completely separate, such that there is no interference between the two protocol versions.
With IPv4, some services, such as SMB, need to broadcast their packets to all hosts in the local network. IPv6 allows a much more fine-grained approach by enabling servers to address hosts through multicasting—by addressing a number of hosts as parts of a group (which is different from addressing all hosts through broadcasting or each host individually through unicasting). Which hosts are addressed as a group may depend on the concrete application. There are some predefined groups to address all name servers (the all name servers multicast group), for example, or all routers (the all routers multicast group).
As mentioned, the current IP protocol is lacking in two important aspects: there is an increasing shortage of IP addresses and configuring the network and maintaining the routing tables is becoming a more complex and burdensome task. IPv6 solves the first problem by expanding the address space to 128 bits. The second one is countered by introducing a hierarchical address structure, combined with sophisticated techniques to allocate network addresses, as well as multihoming (the ability to assign several addresses to one device, giving access to several networks).
When dealing with IPv6, it is useful to know about three different types of addresses:
Addresses of this type are associated with exactly one network interface. Packets with such an address are delivered to only one destination. Accordingly, unicast addresses are used to transfer packets to individual hosts on the local network or the Internet.
Addresses of this type relate to a group of network interfaces. Packets with such an address are delivered to all destinations that belong to the group. Multicast addresses are mainly used by certain network services to communicate with certain groups of hosts in a well-directed manner.
Addresses of this type are related to a group of interfaces. Packets with such an address are delivered to the member of the group that is closest to the sender, according to the principles of the underlying routing protocol. Anycast addresses are used to make it easier for hosts to find out about servers offering certain services in the given network area. All servers of the same type have the same anycast address. Whenever a host requests a service, it receives a reply from the server with the closest location, as determined by the routing protocol. If this server should fail for some reason, the protocol automatically selects the second closest server, then the third one, and so forth.
An IPv6 address is made up of eight four-digit fields, each representing
16 bits, written in hexadecimal notation. They are separated by colons
(:). Any leading zero bytes within a given field may
be dropped, but zeros within the field or at its end may not. Another
convention is that more than four consecutive zero bytes may be
collapsed into a double colon. However, only one such
:: is allowed per address. This kind of shorthand
notation is shown in Example 9.3, “Sample IPv6 Address”, where all
three lines represent the same address.
Example 9.3. Sample IPv6 Address¶
fe80 : 0000 : 0000 : 0000 : 0000 : 10 : 1000 : 1a4 fe80 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 : 10 : 1000 : 1a4 fe80 : : 10 : 1000 : 1a4
Each part of an IPv6 address has a defined function. The first bytes
form the prefix and specify the type of address. The center part is the
network portion of the address, but it may be unused. The end of the
address forms the host part. With IPv6, the netmask is defined by
indicating the length of the prefix after a slash at the end of the
address. An address, as shown in Example 9.4, “IPv6 Address Specifying the Prefix Length”,
contains the information that the first 64 bits form the network part of
the address and the last 64 form its host part. In other words, the
64 means that the netmask is filled with 64 1-bit
values from the left. Just like with IPv4, the IP address is combined
with AND with the values from the netmask to determine whether the host
is located in the same subnetwork or in another one.
IPv6 knows about several predefined types of prefixes. Some of these are shown in Table 9.4, “Various IPv6 Prefixes”.
Table 9.4. Various IPv6 Prefixes¶
|
Prefix (hex) |
Definition |
|---|---|
|
|
IPv4 addresses and IPv4 over IPv6 compatibility addresses. These are used to maintain compatibility with IPv4. Their use still requires a router able to translate IPv6 packets into IPv4 packets. Several special addresses, such as the one for the loopback device, have this prefix as well. |
|
|
Aggregatable global unicast addresses. As is the case with IPv4, an
interface can be assigned to form part of a certain subnetwork.
Currently, there are the following address spaces:
|
|
|
Link-local addresses. Addresses with this prefix should not be routed and should therefore only be reachable from within the same subnetwork. |
|
|
Site-local addresses. These may be routed, but only within the
network of the organization to which they belong. In effect, they
are the IPv6 equivalent of the current private network address
space, such as |
|
|
These are multicast addresses. |
A unicast address consists of three basic components:
The first part (which also contains one of the prefixes mentioned above) is used to route packets through the public Internet. It includes information about the company or institution that provides the Internet access.
The second part contains routing information about the subnetwork to which to deliver the packet.
The third part identifies the interface to which to deliver the
packet. This also allows for the MAC to form part of the address.
Given that the MAC is a globally unique, fixed identifier coded into
the device by the hardware maker, the configuration procedure is
substantially simplified. In fact, the first 64 address bits are
consolidated to form the EUI-64 token, with the
last 48 bits taken from the MAC, and the remaining 24 bits containing
special information about the token type. This also makes it possible
to assign an EUI-64 token to interfaces that do
not have a MAC, such as those based on PPP or ISDN.
On top of this basic structure, IPv6 distinguishes between five different types of unicast addresses:
:: (unspecified) This address is used by the host as its source address when the interface is initialized for the first time—when the address cannot yet be determined by other means.
::1 (loopback) The address of the loopback device.
The IPv6 address is formed by the IPv4 address and a prefix consisting of 96 zero bits. This type of compatibility address is used for tunneling (see Section 9.2.3, “Coexistence of IPv4 and IPv6”) to allow IPv4 and IPv6 hosts to communicate with others operating in a pure IPv4 environment.
This type of address specifies a pure IPv4 address in IPv6 notation.
There are two address types for local use:
This type of address can only be used in the local subnetwork.
Packets with a source or target address of this type should not be
routed to the Internet or other subnetworks. These addresses
contain a special prefix
(fe80::/10)
and the interface ID of the network card, with the middle part
consisting of zero bytes. Addresses of this type are used during
automatic configuration to communicate with other hosts belonging
to the same subnetwork.
Packets with this type of address may be routed to other
subnetworks, but not to the wider Internet—they must remain
inside the organization's own network. Such addresses are used for
intranets and are an equivalent of the private address space
defined by IPv4. They contain a special prefix
(fec0::/10),
the interface ID, and a 16 bit field specifying the subnetwork ID.
Again, the rest is filled with zero bytes.
As a completely new feature introduced with IPv6, each network interface normally gets several IP addresses, with the advantage that several networks can be accessed through the same interface. One of these networks can be configured completely automatically using the MAC and a known prefix with the result that all hosts on the local network can be reached as soon as IPv6 is enabled (using the link-local address). With the MAC forming part of it, any IP address used in the world is unique. The only variable parts of the address are those specifying the site topology and the public topology, depending on the actual network in which the host is currently operating.
For a host to go back and forth between different networks, it needs at least two addresses. One of them, the home address, not only contains the interface ID but also an identifier of the home network to which it normally belongs (and the corresponding prefix). The home address is a static address and, as such, it does not normally change. Still, all packets destined to the mobile host can be delivered to it, regardless of whether it operates in the home network or somewhere outside. This is made possible by the completely new features introduced with IPv6, such as stateless autoconfiguration and neighbor discovery. In addition to its home address, a mobile host gets one or more additional addresses that belong to the foreign networks where it is roaming. These are called care-of addresses. The home network has a facility that forwards any packets destined to the host when it is roaming outside. In an IPv6 environment, this task is performed by the home agent, which takes all packets destined to the home address and relays them through a tunnel. On the other hand, those packets destined to the care-of address are directly transferred to the mobile host without any special detours.
The migration of all hosts connected to the Internet from IPv4 to IPv6 is a gradual process. Both protocols will coexist for some time to come. The coexistence on one system is guaranteed where there is a dual stack implementation of both protocols. That still leaves the question of how an IPv6 enabled host should communicate with an IPv4 host and how IPv6 packets should be transported by the current networks, which are predominantly IPv4 based. The best solutions offer tunneling and compatibility addresses (see Section 9.2.2, “Address Types and Structure”).
IPv6 hosts that are more or less isolated in the (worldwide) IPv4 network can communicate through tunnels: IPv6 packets are encapsulated as IPv4 packets to move them across an IPv4 network. Such a connection between two IPv4 hosts is called a tunnel. To achieve this, packets must include the IPv6 destination address (or the corresponding prefix) as well as the IPv4 address of the remote host at the receiving end of the tunnel. A basic tunnel can be configured manually according to an agreement between the hosts' administrators. This is also called static tunneling.
However, the configuration and maintenance of static tunnels is often too labor-intensive to use them for daily communication needs. Therefore, IPv6 provides for three different methods of dynamic tunneling:
IPv6 packets are automatically encapsulated as IPv4 packets and sent over an IPv4 network capable of multicasting. IPv6 is tricked into seeing the whole network (Internet) as a huge local area network (LAN). This makes it possible to determine the receiving end of the IPv4 tunnel automatically. However, this method does not scale very well and is also hampered by the fact that IP multicasting is far from widespread on the Internet. Therefore, it only provides a solution for smaller corporate or institutional networks where multicasting can be enabled. The specifications for this method are laid down in RFC 2529.
With this method, IPv4 addresses are automatically generated from IPv6 addresses, enabling isolated IPv6 hosts to communicate over an IPv4 network. However, a number of problems have been reported regarding the communication between those isolated IPv6 hosts and the Internet. The method is described in RFC 3056.
This method relies on special servers that provide dedicated tunnels for IPv6 hosts. It is described in RFC 3053.
To configure IPv6, you normally do not need to make any changes on the
individual workstations. IPv6 is enabled by default. You can disable it
during installation in the network configuration step described in
Section 1.14.2.2, “Network Configuration”. To disable or enable
IPv6 on an installed system, use the YaST module. On the tab,
check or uncheck the option as necessary.
To enable or disable IPv6 manually, edit
/etc/modprobe.d/50-ipv6.conf and restart the
system. If you want to enable it temporarily until the next reboot,
enter modprobe -i ipv6 as
root. It is basically
impossible to unload the ipv6 module once loaded.
Because of the autoconfiguration concept of IPv6, the network card is assigned an address in the link-local network. Normally, no routing table management takes place on a workstation. The network routers can be queried by the workstation, using the router advertisement protocol, for what prefix and gateways should be implemented. The radvd program can be used to set up an IPv6 router. This program informs the workstations which prefix to use for the IPv6 addresses and which routers. Alternatively, use zebra/quagga for automatic configuration of both addresses and routing.
Consult the ifcfg-tunnel (5) man page to get information about how to
set up various types of tunnels using the
/etc/sysconfig/network files.
The above overview does not cover the topic of IPv6 comprehensively. For a more in-depth look at the new protocol, refer to the following online documentation and books:
The starting point for everything about IPv6.
All information needed to start your own IPv6 network.
The list of IPv6-enabled products.
Here, find the Linux IPv6-HOWTO and many links related to the topic.
The fundamental RFC about IPv6.
A book describing all the important aspects of the topic is IPv6 Essentials by Silvia Hagen (ISBN 0-596-00125-8).
DNS assists in assigning an IP address to one or more names and assigning a name to an IP address. In Linux, this conversion is usually carried out by a special type of software known as bind. The machine that takes care of this conversion is called a name server. The names make up a hierarchical system in which each name component is separated by a period. The name hierarchy is, however, independent of the IP address hierarchy described above.
Consider a complete name, such as
jupiter.example.com, written in
the format
hostname.domain. A
full name, referred to as a fully qualified domain
name (FQDN), consists of a hostname and a domain name
(example.com). The
latter also includes the top level domain or TLD
(com).
TLD assignment has become quite confusing for historical reasons.
Traditionally, three-letter domain names are used in the USA. In the rest
of the world, the two-letter ISO national codes are the standard. In
addition to that, longer TLDs were introduced in 2000 that represent
certain spheres of activity (for example,
.info,
.name,
.museum).
In the early days of the Internet (before 1990), the file
/etc/hosts was used to store the names of all the
machines represented over the Internet. This quickly proved to be
impractical in the face of the rapidly growing number of computers
connected to the Internet. For this reason, a decentralized database was
developed to store the hostnames in a widely distributed manner. This
database, similar to the name server, does not have the data pertaining
to all hosts in the Internet readily available, but can dispatch requests
to other name servers.
The top of the hierarchy is occupied by root name servers. These root name servers manage the top level domains and are run by the Network Information Center (NIC). Each root name server knows about the name servers responsible for a given top level domain. Information about top level domain NICs is available at http://www.internic.net.
DNS can do more than just resolve hostnames. The name server also knows which host is receiving e-mails for an entire domain—the mail exchanger (MX).
For your machine to resolve an IP address, it must know about at least one name server and its IP address. Easily specify such a name server with the help of YaST. If you have a modem dial-up connection, you may not need to configure a name server manually at all. The dial-up protocol provides the name server address as the connection is made. The configuration of name server access with openSUSE® is described in Section 9.4.1.4, “Configuring Hostname and DNS”. Setting up your own name server is described in Chapter 11, The Domain Name System.
The protocol whois is closely related to DNS. With
this program, quickly find out who is responsible for any given domain.
![]() | MDNS and .local Domain Names |
|---|---|
The
If you want to switch off MDNS during installation, use
For more information on multicast DNS, see http://www.multicastdns.org. | |
There are many supported networking types on Linux. Most of them use different device names and the configuration files are spread over several locations in the file system. For a detailed overview of the aspects of manual network configuration, see Section 9.6, “Configuring a Network Connection Manually”.
During installation on a laptop (where NetworkManager is active by default) YaST configures all interfaces that have been detected. If NetworkManager is not active, only the first interface with link up (with a network cable connected) is automatically configured. Additional hardware can be configured any time on the installed system. The following sections describe the network configuration for all types of network connections supported by openSUSE.
To configure your wired or wireless network card in YaST, select +. After starting the module, YaST displays the dialog with four tabs: , , and .
The tab allows you to set general networking options such as the use of NetworkManager, IPv6 and general DHCP options. For more information, see Section 9.4.1.1, “Configuring Global Networking Options”.
The tab contains information about installed network interfaces and configurations. Any properly detected network card is listed with its name. You can manually configure new cards, remove or change their configuration in this dialog. If you want to manually configure a card that was not automatically detected, see Section 9.4.1.3, “Configuring an Undetected Network Card”. If you want to change the configuration of an already configured card, see Section 9.4.1.2, “Changing the Configuration of a Network Card”.
The tab allows to set the hostname of the machine and name the servers to be used. For more information, see Section 9.4.1.4, “Configuring Hostname and DNS”.
The tab is used for the configuration of routing. See Section 9.4.1.5, “Configuring Routing” for more information.
The tab of the YaST module allows you to set important global networking options, such as the use of NetworkManager, IPv6 and DHCP client options. These settings are applicable for all network interfaces.
In the choose the way network connections are managed. If you want a NetworkManager desktop applet to manage connections for all interfaces, choose . This option is well suited for switching between multiple wired and wireless networks. If you do not run a desktop environment (GNOME or KDE), or if your computer is a Xen server, virtual system, or provides network services such as DHCP or DNS in your network, use the . If NetworkManager is used, nm-applet should be used to configure network options and the , and tabs of the module are disabled. For more information on NetworkManager, see Chapter 21, Using NetworkManager.
In the choose whether you want to use the IPv6 protocol. It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. By default, IPv6 is activated. However, in networks not using IPv6 protocol, response times can be faster with IPv6 protocol disabled. If you want to disable IPv6, uncheck the option. This disables autoload of the kernel module for IPv6. This will be applied after reboot.
In the configure options for the DHCP client. The must be different for each DHCP client on a single network. If left empty, it defaults to the hardware address of the network interface. However, if you are running several virtual machines using the same network interface and, therefore, the same hardware address, specify a unique free-form identifier here.
The specifies a string used for the
hostname option field when dhcpcd sends messages to DHCP server. Some
DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records)
according to this hostname (Dynamic DNS). Also, some DHCP servers
require the option field to contain
a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave
AUTO to send the current hostname (that is the one
defined in /etc/HOSTNAME). Leave the option field
empty for not sending any hostname. If yo do not want to change the
default route according to the information from DHCP,
uncheck .
To change the configuration of a network card, select a card from the list of the detected cards in + in YaST and click . The dialog appears in which to adjust the card configuration using the , and tabs. For information about wireless card configuration, see Section 20.5, “Configuration with YaST”.
You can set the IP address of the network card or the way its IP address is determined in the tab of the dialog. Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses are supported. The network card can have (which is useful for bonding devices), a (IPv4 or IPv6) or a assigned via or or both.
If using , select whether to use (for IPv4), (for IPv6) or .
If possible, the first network card with link that is available during the installation is automatically configured to use automatic address setup via DHCP. In case of laptop computers where NetworkManager is active by default, all network cards are configured.
DHCP should also be used if you are using a DSL line but with no static IP assigned by the ISP (Internet Service Provider). If you decide to use DHCP, configure the details in in the tab of the dialog of the YaST network card configuration module. If you have a virtual host setup where different hosts communicate through the same interface, an is necessary to distinguish them.
DHCP is a good choice for client configuration but it is not ideal for server configuration. To set a static IP address, proceed as follows:
Select a card from the list of detected cards in the tab of the YaST network card configuration module and click .
In the tab, choose .
Enter the . Both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses
can be used. Enter the network mask in . If the IPv6 address is used, use for prefix length in format /64.
Optionally, you can enter a fully qualified
for this address, which will be written
to the /etc/hosts configuration file.
Click .
To activate the configuration, click .
If you use the static address, the name servers and default gateway are not configured automatically. To configure name servers, proceed as described in Section 9.4.1.4, “Configuring Hostname and DNS”. To configure a gateway, proceed as described in Section 9.4.1.5, “Configuring Routing”.
One network device can have multiple IP addresses, called aliases.
![]() | Aliases Are a Compatibility Feature |
|---|---|
These so-called aliases resp. labels work with IPv4 only. With IPv6 they will be ignored. Using iproute2 network interfaces can have one or more addresses. | |
Using YaST to set an alias for your network card, proceed as follows:
Select a card from the list of detected cards in the tab of the YaST network card configuration module and click .
In the + tab, click .
Enter , , and . Do not include the interface name in the alias name.
Click .
Click .
To activate the configuration, click .
It is possible to change the device name of the network card when it is used. It is also possible to determine whether the network card should be identified by udev via its hardware (MAC) address or via the bus ID. The later option is preferable in large servers to ease hot swapping of cards. To set these options with YaST, proceed as follows:
Select a card from the list of detected cards in the tab of the YaST module and click .
Go to the tab. The current device name is shown in . Click .
Select whether udev should identify the card by its or . The current MAC address and bus ID of the card are shown in the dialog.
To change the device name, check the option and edit the name.
Click and .
To activate the configuration, click .
For some network cards, several kernel drivers may be available. If the card is already configured, YaST allows you to select a kernel driver to be used from a list of available suitable drivers. It is also possible to specify options for the kernel driver. To set these options with YaST, proceed as follows:
Select a card from the list of detected cards in the tab of the YaST Network Settings module and click .
Go to the tab.
Select the kernel driver to be used in . Enter any options for the selected driver in
in the form
option=value
. If more options are used, they should be space-separated.
Click and .
To activate the configuration, click .
If you use the traditional method with ifup, you can configure your device to either start during boot, on cable connection, on card detection, manually or never. To change device start-up, proceed as follows:
In YaST select a card from the list of detected cards in + and click .
In the tab, select the desired entry from .
Choose to start the device during the system boot. With , the interface is watched for any existing physical connection. With , the interface is set as soon as available. It is similar to the option, and only differs in the fact that no error occurs if the interface is not present at boot time. Choose to control the interface manually with ifup. Choose to not start the device at all. The is similar to , but the interface does not shut down with the rcnetwork stop command. Use this if you use an nfs or iscsi root file system.
Click .
To activate the configuration, click .
Usually, only the system administrator can activate and deactivate network interfaces. If you want any user to be able to activate this interface via KInternet, select .
You can set a maximum transmission unit (MTU) for the interface. MTU refers to the largest allowed packet size in bytes. A higher MTU brings higher bandwidth efficiency. However, large packets can block up a slow interface for some time, increasing the lag for further packets.
In YaST select a card from the list of detected cards in + and click .
In the tab, select the desired entry from the list.
Click .
To activate the configuration, click .
Without having to enter the detailed firewall setup as described in Section “Configuring the Firewall with YaST” (Chapter 13, Masquerading and Firewalls, ↑Security Guide), you can determine the basic firewall setup for your device as part of the device setup. Proceed as follows:
Open the YaST + module. In the tab, select a card from the list of detected cards and click .
Enter the tab of the dialog.
Determine the firewall zone to which your interface should be assigned. The following options are available:
This option is available only if the firewall is disabled and the firewall does not run at all. Only use this option if your machine is part of a greater network that is protected by an outer firewall.
This option is available only if the firewall is enabled. The
firewall is running and the interface is automatically assigned to
a firewall zone. The zone which contains the keyword
any or the external zone will be used for such
an interface.
The firewall is running, but does not enforce any rules to protect this interface. Use this option if your machine is part of a greater network that is protected by an outer firewall. It is also useful for the interfaces connected to the internal network, when the machine has more network interfaces.
A demilitarized zone is an additional line of defense in front of an internal network and the (hostile) Internet. Hosts assigned to this zone can be reached from the internal network and from the Internet, but cannot access the internal network.
The firewall is running on this interface and fully protects it against other—presumably hostile—network traffic. This is the default option.
Click .
Activate the configuration by clicking .
Your card may not be detected correctly. In this case, the card is not included in the list of detected cards. If you are sure that your system includes a driver for your card, you can configure it manually. You can also configure special network device types, such as bridge, bond, TUN or TAP. To configure an undetected network card (or a special device) proceed as follows:
In the ++ dialog in YaST click .
In the dialog, set the of the interface from the available options and . If the network card is a PCMCIA or USB device, activate the respective check box and exit this dialog with . Otherwise, you can define the kernel to be used for the card and its , if necessary.
In , you can set
ethtool options used by ifup for
the interface. See the ethtool manual page for
available options. If the option string starts with a
- (for example -K
), the second
word in the string is replaced with the current interface name.
Otherwise (for example interface_name rx onautoneg off speed 10)
ifup prepends -s
.
interface_name
Click .
Configure any needed options, such as the IP address, device activation or firewall zone for the interface in the , , and tabs. For more information about the configuration options, see Section 9.4.1.2, “Changing the Configuration of a Network Card”.
If you selected as the device type of the interface, configure the wireless connection in the next dialog.
Click .
To activate the new network configuration, click .
If you did not change the network configuration during installation and the wired card was already available, a hostname was automatically generated for your computer and DHCP was activated. The same applies to the name service information your host needs to integrate into a network environment. If DHCP is used for network address setup, the list of domain name servers is automatically filled with the appropriate data. If a static setup is preferred, set these values manually.
To change the name of your computer and adjust the name server search list, proceed as follows:
Go to the + tab in the module in YaST.
Enter the and, if needed, the . The domain is especially important if the machine is a mail server. Note that the hostname is global and applies to all set network interfaces.
If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, the hostname of your computer will be automatically set by the DHCP. You may want to disable this behavior if you connect to different networks, because they may assign different hostnames and changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. To disable using DHCP to get an IP address uncheck .
associates your
hostname with 127.0.0.2 (loopback) IP address in
/etc/hosts. This is an useful option if you want
to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even without active
network.
In , select the way the DNS
configuration (name servers, search list, the content of the
/etc/resolv.conf file) is modified.
If the option is selected, the configuration is handled by the netconfig script which merges the data defined statically (with YaST or in the configuration files) with data obtained dynamically (from the DHCP client or NetworkManager). This default policy is sufficient in most cases.
If the option is selected,
netconfig is not allowed to modify the
/etc/resolv.conf file. However, this file can be
edited manually.
If the option is selected, a
string defining the merge policy
should be specified. The string consists of a comma-separated list of
interface names to be considered a valid source of settings. Except
for complete interface names, basic wildcards to match multiple
interfaces are allowed, as well. For example, eth*
ppp? will first target all eth and then all ppp0-ppp9
interfaces. There are two special policy values that indicate how to
apply the static settings defined in the
/etc/sysconfig/network/config file:
STATIC
The static settings have to be merged together with the dynamic settings.
STATIC_FALLBACK
The static settings are used only when no dynamic configuration is available.
For more information, see the man 8 netconfig.
Enter the and fill in the list. Name servers must be specified by IP addresses, such as 192.168.1.116, not by hostnames. Names specified in the tab are domain names used for resolving hostnames without a specified domain. If more than one is used, separate domains with commas or white space.
To activate the configuration, click .
To make your machine communicate with other machines and other networks, routing information must be given to make network traffic take the correct path. If DHCP is used, this information is automatically provided. If a static setup is used, this data must be added manually.
In YaST go to +.
Enter the IP address of the (IPv4 and IPv6 if necessary). The default gateway matches every possible destination, but if any other entry exists that matches the required address, use this instead of the default route.
More entries can be entered in the .
Enter the network IP address,
IP address and the
. Select the
through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed (the
minus sign stands for any device).
To omit any of these values, use the minus sign -.
To enter a default gateway into the table, use
default in the
field.
![]() | |
If more default routes are used, it is possible to specify the metric
option to determine which route has a higher priority. To specify the
metric option, enter | |
If the system is a router, enable the option in the .
To activate the configuration, click .
In the YaST Control Center, access the modem configuration under +. If your modem was not automatically detected, go to the tab and open the dialog for manual configuration by clicking . Enter the interface to which the modem is connected under .
![]() | CDMA and GPRS Modems |
|---|---|
Configure supported CDMA and GPRS modems with the YaST module just as you would configure regular modems. | |
If you are behind a private branch exchange (PBX), you may need to enter a dial prefix. This is often a zero. Consult the instructions that came with the PBX to find out. Also select whether to use tone or pulse dialing, whether the speaker should be on and whether the modem should wait until it detects a dial tone. The last option should not be enabled if the modem is connected to an exchange.
Under , set the baud rate and the modem initialization strings. Only change these settings if your modem was not detected automatically or if it requires special settings for data transmission to work. This is mainly the case with ISDN terminal adapters. Leave this dialog by clicking . To delegate control over the modem to the normal user without root permissions, activate . In this way, a user without administrator permissions can activate or deactivate an interface. Under , specify a regular expression. The in KInternet, which can be modified by the normal user, must match this regular expression. If this field is left empty, the user cannot set a different without administrator permissions.
In the next dialog, select the ISP. To choose from a predefined list of ISPs operating in your country, select . Alternatively, click to open a dialog in which to provide the data for your ISP. This includes a name for the dial-up connection and ISP as well as the login and password provided by your ISP. Enable to be prompted for the password each time you connect.
In the last dialog, specify additional connection options:
If you enable , set at least one name server. Use this feature only if your Internet connection is inexpensive, because there are programs that periodically request data from the Internet.
This option is enabled by default, with the effect that the name server address is updated each time you connect to the Internet.
If the provider does not transmit its domain name server after connecting, disable this option and enter the DNS data manually.
If this options is enabled, the connection is automatically reestablished after failure.
This option disables the detection of any prompts from the dial-up server. If the connection build-up is slow or does not work at all, try this option.
Selecting this option activates the firewall and sets the interface as external. This way, you are protected from outside attacks for the duration of your Internet connection.
With this option, specify a period of network inactivity after which the modem disconnects automatically.
This opens the address configuration dialog. If your ISP does not assign a dynamic IP address to your host, disable then enter your host's local IP address and the remote IP address. Ask your ISP for this information. Leave enabled and close the dialog by selecting .
Selecting returns to the original dialog, which displays a summary of the modem configuration. Close this dialog with .
Use this module to configure one or several ISDN cards for your system. If YaST did not detect your ISDN card, click on in the tab and manually select your card. Multiple interfaces are possible, but several ISPs can be configured for one interface. In the subsequent dialogs, set the ISDN options necessary for the proper functioning of the card.
In the next dialog, shown in Figure 9.5, “ISDN Configuration”, select the protocol to use. The default is , but for older or larger exchanges, select . If you are in the US, select . Select your country in the relevant field. The corresponding country code then appears in the field next to it. Finally, provide your and the if necessary. If you do not want to log all your ISDN traffic, uncheck the option.
defines how the ISDN interface should
be started: causes the ISDN driver to be
initialized each time the system boots.
requires you to load the ISDN driver as root with the command
rcisdn start. , used for
PCMCIA or USB devices, loads the driver after the device is plugged in.
When finished with these settings, select .
In the next dialog, specify the interface type for your ISDN card and add
ISPs to an existing interface. Interfaces may be either the
SyncPPP or the RawIP
type, but most ISPs operate in the SyncPPP mode,
which is described below.
The number to enter for depends on your particular setup:
A standard ISDN line provides three phone numbers (called multiple subscriber numbers, or MSNs). If the subscriber asked for more, there may be up to 10. One of these MSNs must be entered here, but without your area code. If you enter the wrong number, your phone operator automatically falls back to the first MSN assigned to your ISDN line.
Again, the configuration may vary depending on the equipment installed:
Smaller private branch exchanges (PBX) built for home purposes mostly use the Euro-ISDN (EDSS1) protocol for internal calls. These exchanges have an internal S0 bus and use internal numbers for the equipment connected to them.
Use one of the internal numbers as your MSN. You should be able to use at least one of the exchange's MSNs that have been enabled for direct outward dialing. If this does not work, try a single zero. For further information, consult the documentation delivered with your phone exchange.
Larger phone exchanges designed for businesses normally use the 1TR6 protocol for internal calls. Their MSN is called EAZ and usually corresponds to the direct-dial number. For the configuration under Linux, it should be sufficient to enter the last digit of the EAZ. As a last resort, try each of the digits from 1 to 9.
For the connection to be terminated just before the next charge unit is due, enable . However, remember that may not work with every ISP. You can also enable channel bundling (multilink PPP) by selecting the corresponding option. Finally, you can enable the firewall for your link by selecting and . To enable the normal user without administrator permissions to activate or deactivate the interface, select the .
opens a dialog in which to implement more complex connection schemes which are not relevant for normal home users. Leave the dialog by selecting .
In the next dialog, configure IP address settings. If you have not been given a static IP by your provider, select . Otherwise, use the fields provided to enter your host's local IP address and the remote IP address according to the specifications of your ISP. If the interface should be the default route to the Internet, select . Each host can only have one interface configured as the default route. Leave this dialog by selecting .
The following dialog allows you to set your country and select an ISP. The ISPs included in the list are call-by-call providers only. If your ISP is not in the list, select . This opens the dialog in which to enter all the details for your ISP. When entering the phone number, do not include any blanks or commas among the digits. Finally, enter your login and the password as provided by the ISP. When finished, select .
To use on a stand-alone workstation,
specify the name server (DNS server) as well. Most ISPs support dynamic
DNS, which means the IP address of a name server is sent by the ISP each
time you connect. For a single workstation, however, you still need to
provide a placeholder address like
192.168.22.99. If your ISP
does not support dynamic DNS, specify the name server IP addresses of the
ISP. If desired, specify a time-out for the connection—the period
of network inactivity (in seconds) after which the connection should be
automatically terminated. Confirm your settings with
. YaST displays a summary of the configured
interfaces. To activate these settings, select .
In some countries it is quite common to access the Internet through the TV cable network. The TV cable subscriber usually gets a modem that is connected to the TV cable outlet on one side and to a computer network card on the other (using a 10Base-TG twisted pair cable). The cable modem then provides a dedicated Internet connection with a fixed IP address.
Depending on the instructions provided by your ISP, when configuring the network card either select or . Most providers today use DHCP. A static IP address often comes as part of a special business account.
To configure your DSL device, select the module from the YaST section. This YaST module consists of several dialogs in which to set the parameters of DSL links based on one of the following protocols:
PPP over Ethernet (PPPoE)
PPP over ATM (PPPoATM)
CAPI for ADSL (Fritz Cards)
Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)—Austria
In the tab of the dialog, you will find a list of installed DSL devices. To change the configuration of a DSL device, select it in the list and click . If you click , you can manually configure a new DSL device.
The configuration of a DSL connection based on PPPoE or PPTP requires
that the corresponding network card be set up in the correct way. If you
have not done so yet, first configure the card by selecting
(see
Section 9.4.1, “Configuring the Network Card with YaST”). In the case of a DSL
link, addresses may be assigned automatically but not via DHCP, which is
why you should not enable the option .
Instead, enter a static dummy address for the interface, such as
192.168.22.1. In
, enter
255.255.255.0. If you are
configuring a stand-alone workstation, leave empty.
![]() | |
Values in and are only placeholders. They are only needed to initialize the network card and do not represent the DSL link as such. | |
In the first DSL configuration dialog (see
Figure 9.7, “DSL Configuration”), select the and the to which the DSL
modem is connected (in most cases, this is
eth0). Then use
to specify whether the DSL link should
be established during the boot process. Click to authorize the normal
user without root permissions to activate or deactivate the interface
with KInternet.
In the next dialog select your country and choose from a number of ISPs operating in it. The details of any subsequent dialogs of the DSL configuration depend on the options set so far, which is why they are only briefly mentioned in the following paragraphs. For details on the available options, read the detailed help available from the dialogs.
To use on a stand-alone workstation,
also specify the name server (DNS server). Most ISPs support dynamic
DNS—the IP address of a name server is sent by the ISP each time
you connect. For a single workstation, however, provide a placeholder
address like 192.168.22.99. If
your ISP does not support dynamic DNS, enter the name server IP address
provided by your ISP.
defines a period of network inactivity after which to terminate the connection automatically. A reasonable time-out value is between 60 and 300 seconds. If is disabled, it may be useful to set the time-out to zero to prevent automatic hang-up.
The configuration of T-DSL is very similar to the DSL setup. Just select as your provider and YaST opens the T-DSL configuration dialog. In this dialog, provide some additional information required for T-DSL—the line ID, the T-Online number, the user code and your password. All of these should be included in the information you received after subscribing to T-DSL.
NetworkManager is the ideal solution for laptops and other portable computers. With NetworkManager, you do not need to worry about configuring network interfaces and switching between networks when you are moving.
However, NetworkManager is not a suitable solution for all cases, so you can still choose between the traditional method for managing network connections (ifup) and NetworkManager. If you want to manage your network connection with NetworkManager, enable NetworkManager in the YaST Network Settings module as described in Section 21.2, “Enabling NetworkManager” and configure your network connections with NetworkManager. For a list of use cases and a detailed description how to configure and use NetworkManager, refer to Chapter 21, Using NetworkManager.
Some differences between ifup and NetworkManager include:
root Privileges
If you use NetworkManager for network setup, you can easily switch, stop or
start your network connection at any time from within your desktop
environment using an applet. NetworkManager also makes it possible to change and
configure wireless card connections without requiring root
privileges. For this reason, NetworkManager is the ideal solution for a mobile
workstation.
Traditional configuration with ifup also provides some ways to switch,
stop or start the connection with or without user intervention, like
user-managed devices. However, this always requires root
privileges to change or configure a network device. This is often a
problem for mobile computing, where it is not possible to preconfigure
all the connection possibilities.
Both traditional configuration and NetworkManager can handle network connections with a wireless network (with WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA-Enterprise access) and wired networks using DHCP and static configuration. They also support connection through dial-up, DSL and VPN. With NetworkManager you can also connect a mobile broadband (3G) modem, which is not possible with the traditional configuration.
NetworkManager tries to keep your computer connected at all times using the best connection available. If the network cable is accidentally disconnected, it tries to reconnect. It can find the network with the best signal strength from the list of your wireless connections and automatically use it to connect. To get the same functionality with ifup, a great deal of configuration effort is required.
The individual network connection settings created with NetworkManager are stored
in configuration profiles. The system connections
configured with either NetworkManager or YaST are saved in
/etc/networkmanager/system-connections/* or in
/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-*. Any user-defined
connections are stored in GConf for GNOME or
$HOME/.kde4/share/apps/networkmanagement/* for KDE.
In case no profile is configured, NetworkManager automatically creates one and
names it Auto $INTERFACE-NAME. That is made in an
attempt to work without any configuration for as many cases as (securely)
possible. If the automatically created profiles do not suit your needs,
use the network connection configuration dialogs provided by KDE or GNOME
to modify them as desired. For more information, refer to
Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”.
On centrally administered machines, certain NetworkManager features can be controlled or disabled with PolicyKit, for example if a user is allowed to modify administrator defined connections or if a user is allowed to define his own network configurations. To view or change the respective NetworkManager policies, start the graphical tool for PolicyKit. In the tree on the left side, find them below the entry.
The following table gives an overview of the PolicyKit identifiers related to NetworkManager:
Table 9.5. PolicyKit Identifiers for NetworkManager
|
Identifier |
Description |
|---|---|
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.enable-disable-network |
Enable or disable system networking |
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.sleep-wake |
Put NetworkManager to sleep or wake it up |
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.enable-disable-wwan |
Enable or disable mobile broadband devices |
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.network-control |
Allow control of network connections |
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.enable-disable-wifi |
Enable or disable WiFi devices |
|
org.freedesktop.NetworkManager.use-user-connections |
Allow use of user-specific connections |
|
org.freedesktop.network-manager-settings.system.modify |
Modify system connections |
|
org.freedesktop.network-manager-settings.system.wifi.share.open |
Connection sharing via an open WiFi network |
|
org.freedesktop.network-manager-settings.system.wifi.share.protected |
Connection sharing via a protected WiFi network |
Manual configuration of the network software should always be the last alternative. Using YaST is recommended. However, this background information about the network configuration can also assist your work with YaST.
When the Kernel detects a network card and creates a corresponding network interface, it assigns the device a name depending on the order of device discovery, or order of the loading of the Kernel modules. The default Kernel device names are only predictable in very simple or tightly controlled hardware environments. Systems which allow adding or removing hardware during runtime or support automatic configuration of devices cannot expect stable network device names assigned by the Kernel across reboots.
However, all system configuration tools rely on persistent interface
names. This problem is solved by udev. The udev persistent net generator
(/lib/udev/rules.d/75-persistent-net-generator.rules)
generates a rule matching the hardware (using its hardware address by
default) and assigns a persistently unique interface for the hardware. The
udev database of network interfaces is stored in the file
/etc/udev/rules.d/70-persistent-net.rules. Every line
in the file describes one network interface and specifies its persistent
name. System administrators can change the assigned names by editing the
NAME="" entries. The persistent rules can also be
modified using YaST.
Table 9.6, “Manual Network Configuration Scripts” summarizes the most important scripts involved in the network configuration.
Table 9.6. Manual Network Configuration Scripts¶
|
Command |
Function |
|---|---|
|
ifup, ifdown, ifstatus |
The |
|
rcnetwork |
The |
For more information about udev and persistent device names, see
Chapter 8, Dynamic Kernel Device Management with udev.
This section provides an overview of the network configuration files and explains their purpose and the format used.
/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg-*¶
These files contain the configurations for network interfaces. They
include information such as the start mode and the IP address. Possible
parameters are described in the manual page of
ifup. Additionally, most variables from the
dhcp and wireless files can be
used in the ifcfg-* files if a general setting
should be used for only one interface. However, most of the
/etc/sysconfig/network/config variables are global
and cannot be overridden in ifcfg-files. For example
NETWORKMANAGER or
NETCONFIG_* variables are global.
For ifcfg.template, see
Section 9.6.1.2, “/etc/sysconfig/network/config, /etc/sysconfig/network/dhcp, and /etc/sysconfig/network/wireless”.
/etc/sysconfig/network/config, /etc/sysconfig/network/dhcp, and /etc/sysconfig/network/wireless¶
The file config contains general settings for the
behavior of ifup, ifdown and
ifstatus. dhcp contains settings
for DHCP and wireless for wireless LAN cards. The
variables in all three configuration files are commented. Some of the
variables from /etc/sysconfig/network/config can
also be used in ifcfg-* files, where they are given
a higher priority. The
/etc/sysconfig/network/ifcfg.template file lists
variables that can be specified in a per interface scope. However, most
of the /etc/sysconfig/network/config variables are
global and cannot be overridden in ifcfg-files. For example,
NETWORKMANAGER or
NETCONFIG_* variables are global.
/etc/sysconfig/network/routes and /etc/sysconfig/network/ifroute-*¶
The static routing of TCP/IP packets is determined here. All the static
routes required by the various system tasks can be entered in the
/etc/sysconfig/network/routes file: routes to a
host, routes to a host via a gateway and routes to a network. For each
interface that needs individual routing, define an additional
configuration file:
/etc/sysconfig/network/ifroute-*. Replace
* with the name of the interface. The entries in the
routing configuration files look like this:
# Destination Dummy/Gateway Netmask Device # 127.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 lo 204.127.235.0 0.0.0.0 255.255.255.0 eth0 default 204.127.235.41 0.0.0.0 eth0 207.68.156.51 207.68.145.45 255.255.255.255 eth1 192.168.0.0 207.68.156.51 255.255.0.0 eth1
The route's destination is in the first column. This column may contain the IP address of a network or host or, in the case of reachable name servers, the fully qualified network or hostname.
The second column contains the default gateway or a gateway through
which a host or network can be accessed. The third column contains the
netmask for networks or hosts behind a gateway. For example, the mask is
255.255.255.255 for a host
behind a gateway.
The fourth column is only relevant for networks connected to the local host such as loopback, Ethernet, ISDN, PPP and dummy device. The device name must be entered here.
An (optional) fifth column can be used to specify the type of a route.
Columns that are not needed should contain a minus sign
- to ensure that the parser correctly interprets the
command. For details, refer to the routes(5)
man page.
The unified format for IPv4 and IPv6 now looks as follows:
prefix/lengthgateway- [interface]
And the so-called compatibility format looks accordingly:
prefixgatewaylength[interface]
For IPv4 you still can use the old format with netmask:
ipv4-networkgatewayipv4-netmask[interface]
The following examples are equivalent:
2001:db8:abba:cafe::/64 2001:db8:abba:cafe::dead - eth0 208.77.188.0/24 208.77.188.166 - eth0 2001:db8:abba:cafe:: 2001:db8:abba:cafe::dead 64 eth0 208.77.188.0 208.77.188.166 24 eth0 208.77.188.0 208.77.188.166 255.255.255.0 eth0
/etc/resolv.conf¶
The domain to which the host belongs is specified in this file (keyword
search). Also listed is the status of the name
server address to access (keyword nameserver).
Multiple domain names can be specified in the file. When resolving a
name that is not fully qualified, an attempt is made to generate one by
attaching the individual search entries.
Multiple name servers can be specified in multiple lines, each beginning
with nameserver. Comments are preceded by
# signs. Example 9.5, “/etc/resolv.conf”
shows what /etc/resolv.conf could look like.
However, the /etc/resolv.conf should not be edited
by hand. Instead, it is generated by the netconfig
script. To define static DNS configuration without using YaST, edit
the appropriate variables manually in the
/etc/sysconfig/network/config file:
NETCONFIG_DNS_STATIC_SEARCHLIST
list of DNS domain names used for hostname lookup
NETCONFIG_DNS_STATIC_SERVERS
list of name server IP addresses to use for hostname lookup
NETCONFIG_DNS_FORWARDER
defines the name of the DNS forwarder that has to be configured
To disable DNS configuration using netconfig, set
NETCONFIG_DNS_POLICY=''. For more information about
netconfig, see man 8 netconfig.
Example 9.5. /etc/resolv.conf¶
# Our domain search example.com # # We use dns.example.com (192.168.1.116) as nameserver nameserver 192.168.1.116
/sbin/netconfig¶netconfig is a modular tool to manage additional network configuration settings. It merges statically defined settings with settings provided by autoconfiguration mechanisms as DHCP or PPP according to a predefined policy. The required changes are applied to the system by calling the netconfig modules that are responsible for modifying a configuration file and restarting a service or a similar action.
netconfig recognizes three main actions. The netconfig modify and netconfig remove commands are used by daemons such as DHCP or PPP to provide or remove settings to netconfig. Only the netconfig update command is available for the user:
The netconfig modify command modifies the current
interface and service specific dynamic settings and updates the
network configuration. Netconfig reads settings from standard input
or from a file specified with the --lease-file
option and internally
stores them until a system reboot (or the next modify or remove
action). Already existing settings for the same interface and service
combination are overwritten. The interface is specified by the
filename-i
parameter. The service is specified by the interface_name-s
parameter.
service_name
The netconfig remove command removes the dynamic
settings provided by a modificatory action for the specified
interface and service combination and updates the network
configuration. The interface is specified by the -i
parameter. The
service is specified by the interface_name-s
parameter.
service_name
The netconfig update command updates the network
configuration using current settings. This is useful when the policy
or the static configuration has changed. Use the -m
parameter, if you
want to update a specified service only
(module_typedns, nis, or
ntp).
The netconfig policy and the static configuration settings are defined
either manually or using YaST in the
/etc/sysconfig/network/config file. The dynamic
configuration settings provided by autoconfiguration tools as DHCP or
PPP are delivered directly by these tools with the netconfig
modify and netconfig remove actions. NetworkManager
also uses netconfig modify and netconfig
remove actions. When NetworkManager is enabled, netconfig (in policy
mode auto) uses only NetworkManager settings, ignoring settings
from any other interfaces configured using the traditional ifup method.
If NetworkManager does not provide any setting, static settings are used as a
fallback. A mixed usage of NetworkManager and the traditional ifup method is not
supported.
For more information about netconfig, see man 8 netconfig.
/etc/hosts¶
In this file, shown in Example 9.6, “/etc/hosts”, IP
addresses are assigned to hostnames. If no name server is implemented,
all hosts to which an IP connection will be set up must be listed here.
For each host, enter a line consisting of the IP address, the fully
qualified hostname, and the hostname into the file. The IP address must
be at the beginning of the line and the entries separated by blanks and
tabs. Comments are always preceded by the # sign.
Example 9.6. /etc/hosts¶
127.0.0.1 localhost 192.168.2.100 jupiter.example.com jupiter 192.168.2.101 venus.example.com venus
/etc/networks¶
Here, network names are converted to network addresses. The format is
similar to that of the hosts file, except the
network names precede the addresses. See
Example 9.7, “/etc/networks”.
/etc/host.conf¶
Name resolution—the translation of host and network names via the
resolver library—is controlled by this file.
This file is only used for programs linked to libc4 or libc5. For
current glibc programs, refer to the settings in
/etc/nsswitch.conf. A parameter must always stand
alone in its own line. Comments are preceded by a #
sign. Table 9.7, “Parameters for /etc/host.conf” shows the parameters
available. A sample /etc/host.conf is shown in
Example 9.8, “/etc/host.conf”.
Table 9.7. Parameters for /etc/host.conf¶
|
order hosts, bind |
Specifies in which order the services are accessed for the name resolution. Available arguments are (separated by blank spaces or commas): |
|
hosts: searches the
| |
|
bind: accesses a name server | |
|
nis: uses NIS | |
|
multi on/off |
Defines if a host entered in |
|
nospoof on spoofalert on/off |
These parameters influence the name server spoofing but do not exert any influence on the network configuration. |
|
trim domainname |
The specified domain name is separated from the hostname after
hostname resolution (as long as the hostname includes the domain
name). This option is useful only if names from the local domain
are in the |
Example 9.8. /etc/host.conf¶
# We have named running order hosts bind # Allow multiple address multi on
/etc/nsswitch.conf¶
The introduction of the GNU C Library 2.0 was accompanied by the
introduction of the Name Service Switch (NSS).
Refer to the nsswitch.conf(5) man page and
The GNU C Library Reference Manual for details.
The order for queries is defined in the file
/etc/nsswitch.conf. A sample
nsswitch.conf is shown in
Example 9.9, “/etc/nsswitch.conf”. Comments are preceded by
# signs. In this example, the entry under the
hosts database means that a request is sent to
/etc/hosts (files) via
DNS.
Example 9.9. /etc/nsswitch.conf¶
passwd: compat group: compat hosts: files dns networks: files dns services: db files protocols: db files rpc: files ethers: files netmasks: files netgroup: files nis publickey: files bootparams: files automount: files nis aliases: files nis shadow: compat
The “databases” available over NSS are listed in Table 9.8, “Databases Available via /etc/nsswitch.conf”. The configuration options for NSS databases are listed in Table 9.9, “Configuration Options for NSS “Databases””.
Table 9.8. Databases Available via /etc/nsswitch.conf¶
|
|
Mail aliases implemented by |
|
|
Ethernet addresses. |
|
|
List of network and their subnet masks. Only needed, if you use subnetting. |
|
|
For user groups used by |
|
|
For hostnames and IP addresses, used by
|
|
|
Valid host and user lists in the network for the purpose of
controlling access permissions; see the
|
|
|
Network names and addresses, used by
|
|
|
Public and secret keys for Secure_RPC used by NFS and NIS+.. |
|
|
User passwords, used by |
|
|
Network protocols, used by |
|
|
Remote procedure call names and addresses, used by
|
|
|
Network services, used by |
|
|
Shadow passwords of users, used by |
Table 9.9. Configuration Options for NSS “Databases”¶
|
|
directly access files, for example,
|
|
|
access via a database |
|
|
NIS, see also Chapter 3, Using NIS (↑Security Guide) |
|
|
can only be used as an extension for |
|
|
can only be used as an extension for |
/etc/nscd.conf¶
This file is used to configure nscd (name service cache daemon). See the
nscd(8) and
nscd.conf(5) man pages. By default, the system
entries of passwd and groups are
cached by nscd. This is important for the performance of directory
services, like NIS and LDAP, because otherwise the network connection
needs to be used for every access to names or groups.
hosts is not cached by default, because the mechanism
in nscd to cache hosts makes the local system unable to trust forward
and reverse lookup checks. Instead of asking nscd to cache names, set up
a caching DNS server.
If the caching for passwd is activated, it usually
takes about fifteen seconds until a newly added local user is
recognized. Reduce this waiting time by restarting nscd with the command
rcnscd restart.
/etc/HOSTNAME ¶This contains the fully qualified hostname with the domain name attached. This file is read by several scripts while the machine is booting. It must contain only one line (in which the hostname is set).
Before you write your configuration to the configuration files, you can test it. To set up a test configuration, use the ip command. To test the connection, use the ping command. Older configuration tools, ifconfig and route, are also available.
The commands ip, ifconfig and route change the network configuration directly without saving it in the configuration file. Unless you enter your configuration in the correct configuration files, the changed network configuration is lost on reboot.
ip is a tool to show and configure network devices, routing, policy routing, and tunnels.
ip is a very complex tool. Its common syntax is
ip . You can work with the
following objects:
options
object
command
This object represents a network device.
This object represents the IP address of device.
This object represents a ARP or NDISC cache entry.
This object represents the routing table entry.
This object represents a rule in the routing policy database.
This object represents a multicast address.
This object represents a multicast routing cache entry.
This object represents a tunnel over IP.
If no command is given, the default command is used (usually list).
Change the state of a device with the command ip link
set device_namecommand.
For example, to deactivate device eth0, enter ip link
set eth0 down. To activate it again, use
ip link set eth0 up.
After activating a device, you can configure it. To set the IP address,
use ip addr
add . For example, to set the
address of the interface eth0 to 192.168.12.154/30 with standard
broadcast (option ip_address + dev
device_namebrd), enter ip
addr add 192.168.12.154/30 brd + dev
eth0.
To have a working connection, you must also configure the default
gateway. To set a gateway for your system, enter ip route
add gateway_ip_address. To translate one
IP address to another, use nat: ip route add
nat ip_address via other_ip_address.
To display all devices, use ip link ls. To display
the running interfaces only, use ip link ls up. To
print interface statistics for a device, enter ip -s link
ls device_name. To view addresses of
your devices, enter ip addr. In the output of the
ip addr, also find information about MAC addresses of
your devices. To show all routes, use ip route show.
For more information about using ip, enter
ip help or see the
ip(8) man page. The help
option is also available for all ip subcommands. If,
for example, you need help for
ip addr, enter
ip addr help. Find the
ip manual in
/usr/share/doc/packages/iproute2/ip-cref.pdf.
The ping command is the standard tool for testing whether a TCP/IP connection works. It uses the ICMP protocol to send a small data packet, ECHO_REQUEST datagram, to the destination host, requesting an immediate reply. If this works, ping displays a message to that effect, which indicates that the network link is basically functioning.
ping does more than only test the function of the connection between two computers: it also provides some basic information about the quality of the connection. In Example 9.10, “Output of the Command ping”, you can see an example of the ping output. The second-to-last line contains information about the number of transmitted packets, packet loss, and total time of ping running.
As the destination, you can use a hostname or IP address, for example,
ping example.com or
ping 192.168.3.100. The program sends
packets until you press
Ctrl+C.
If you only need to check the functionality of the connection, you can
limit the number of the packets with the -c option. For
example to limit ping to three packets, enter
ping -c 3 example.com.
Example 9.10. Output of the Command ping¶
ping -c 3 example.com PING example.com (192.168.3.100) 56(84) bytes of data. 64 bytes from example.com (192.168.3.100): icmp_seq=1 ttl=49 time=188 ms 64 bytes from example.com (192.168.3.100): icmp_seq=2 ttl=49 time=184 ms 64 bytes from example.com (192.168.3.100): icmp_seq=3 ttl=49 time=183 ms --- example.com ping statistics --- 3 packets transmitted, 3 received, 0% packet loss, time 2007ms rtt min/avg/max/mdev = 183.417/185.447/188.259/2.052 ms
The default interval between two packets is one second. To change the
interval, ping provides the option -i. For example, to
increase the ping interval to ten seconds, enter
ping -i 10 example.com.
In a system with multiple network devices, it is sometimes useful to
send the ping through a specific interface address. To do so, use the
-I option with the name of the selected device, for
example, ping -I wlan1
example.com.
For more options and information about using ping, enter
ping -h or see the
ping (8) man page.
![]() | Pinging IPv6 Addresses |
|---|---|
For IPv6 addresses use the ping6 command. Note, to
ping link-local addresses, you must specify the interface with
ping6 -I eth1 fe80::117:21ff:feda:a425 | |
ifconfig is a network configuration tool.
![]() | ifconfig and ip |
|---|---|
The ifconfig tool is obsolete. Use ip instead. In contrast to ip, you can use ifconfig only for interface configuration. It limits interface names to 9 characters. | |
Without arguments, ifconfig displays the status of
the currently active interfaces. As you can see in
Example 9.11, “Output of the ifconfig Command”,
ifconfig has very well-arranged and detailed output.
The output also contains information about the MAC address of your
device (the value of HWaddr) in the first line.
Example 9.11. Output of the ifconfig Command¶
eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:08:74:98:ED:51
inet6 addr: fe80::208:74ff:fe98:ed51/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:634735 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:4 frame:0
TX packets:154779 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:1
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:162531992 (155.0 Mb) TX bytes:49575995 (47.2 Mb)
Interrupt:11 Base address:0xec80
lo Link encap:Local Loopback
inet addr:127.0.0.1 Mask:255.0.0.0
inet6 addr: ::1/128 Scope:Host
UP LOOPBACK RUNNING MTU:16436 Metric:1
RX packets:8559 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:8559 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:0
RX bytes:533234 (520.7 Kb) TX bytes:533234 (520.7 Kb)
wlan1 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:0E:2E:52:3B:1D
inet addr:192.168.2.4 Bcast:192.168.2.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
inet6 addr: fe80::20e:2eff:fe52:3b1d/64 Scope:Link
UP BROADCAST NOTRAILERS RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
RX packets:50828 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
TX packets:43770 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
collisions:0 txqueuelen:1000
RX bytes:45978185 (43.8 Mb) TX bytes:7526693 (7.1 MB)
For more options and information about using
ifconfig, enter
ifconfig -h or see the
ifconfig (8) man page.
route is a program for manipulating the IP routing table. You can use it to view your routing configuration and to add or remove routes.
![]() | route and ip |
|---|---|
The program route is obsolete. Use ip instead. | |
route is especially useful if you need quick and
comprehensible information about your routing configuration to determine
problems with routing. To view your current routing configuration, enter
route -n as root.
Example 9.12. Output of the route -n Command¶
route -n Kernel IP routing table Destination Gateway Genmask Flags MSS Window irtt Iface 10.20.0.0 * 255.255.248.0 U 0 0 0 eth0 link-local * 255.255.0.0 U 0 0 0 eth0 loopback * 255.0.0.0 U 0 0 0 lo default styx.exam.com 0.0.0.0 UG 0 0 0 eth0
For more options and information about using route, enter
route -h or see the
route (8) man page.
Apart from the configuration files described above, there are also various scripts that load the network programs while the machine is booting. These are started as soon as the system is switched to one of the multiuser runlevels. Some of these scripts are described in Table 9.10, “Some Start-Up Scripts for Network Programs”.
Table 9.10. Some Start-Up Scripts for Network Programs¶
|
This script handles the configuration of the network interfaces. If the network service was not started, no network interfaces are implemented. | |
|
Starts xinetd. xinetd can be used to make server services available on the system. For example, it can start vsftpd whenever an FTP connection is initiated. | |
|
Starts the rpcbind utility that converts RPC program numbers to universal addresses. It is needed for RPC services, such as an NFS server. | |
|
Starts the NFS server. | |
|
Controls the postfix process. | |
|
Starts the NIS server. | |
|
Starts the NIS client. |
Some home users do not have a dedicated line connecting them to the Internet. Instead, they use dial-up connections. Depending on the dial-up method (ISDN or DSL), the connection is controlled by ipppd or pppd. Basically, all that needs to be done to go online is to start these programs correctly.
If you have a flat-rate connection that does not generate any additional costs for the dial-up connection, simply start the respective daemon. Control the dial-up connection with a desktop applet or a command-line interface. If the Internet gateway is not the host you are using, you might want to control the dial-up connection by way of a network host.
This is where smpppd (SUSE Meta PPP Daemon) is involved. It provides a uniform interface for auxiliary programs and acts in two directions. First, it programs the required pppd or ipppd and controls its dial-up properties. Second, it makes various providers available to the user programs and transmits information about the current status of the connection. As smpppd can also be controlled by way of the network, it is suitable for controlling dial-up connections to the Internet from a workstation in a private subnetwork.
The connections provided by smpppd are automatically configured by YaST. The actual dial-up programs KInternet and cinternet are also preconfigured. Manual settings are only required to configure additional features of smpppd such as remote control.
The configuration file of smpppd is
/etc/smpppd.conf. By default, it does not enable
remote control. The most important options of this configuration file
are:
yes|no
To control smpppd via the network, set this option to
yes. smpppd listens on port
3185. If this parameter is set to
yes, the parameters
bind-address, host-range and
password must be set accordingly.
ip address
If a host has several IP addresses, use this parameter to determine at which IP address smpppd should accept connections. The default is to listen at all addresses.
min ipmax ip
The parameter host-range defines a network range.
Hosts whose IP addresses are within this range are granted access to
smpppd. All hosts not within this range are denied access.
password
By assigning a password, limit the clients to authorized hosts. As this is a plain-text password, you should not overrate the security it provides. If no password is assigned, all clients are permitted to access smpppd.
yes|no
With this parameter, the smpppd service can be announced in the network via SLP.
More information about smpppd is available in the
smpppd(8) and
smpppd.conf(5) man pages.
qinternet can be used to control a local or remote smpppd. cinternet is
the command-line counterpart to the graphical KInternet. To prepare these
utilities for use with a remote smpppd, edit the configuration file
/etc/smpppd-c.conf manually or using qinternet. This
file only uses four options:
list of sites
list of sites where the front-ends search
for smpppd. The front-ends test the options in the order specified
here. local orders the establishment of a
connection to the local smpppd. gateway points to
an smpppd on the gateway. config-file indicates
that the connection should be established to the smpppd specified in
the server and port
options in /etc/smpppd-c.conf.
slp orders the front-ends to connect to an smpppd
found via SLP.
server
The host on which smpppd runs.
port
The port on which smpppd runs.
password
The password selected for smpppd.
Contents
Abstract
The service location protocol (SLP) was developed to simplify the configuration of networked clients within a local network. To configure a network client, including all required services, the administrator traditionally needs detailed knowledge of the servers available in the network. SLP makes the availability of selected services known to all clients in the local network. Applications that support SLP can use the information distributed and be configured automatically.
openSUSE® supports installation using installation sources provided with SLP and contains many system services with integrated support for SLP. YaST and Konqueror both have appropriate front-ends for SLP. You can use SLP to provide networked clients with central functions, such as an installation server, file server, or print server on your system.
![]() | SLP Support in openSUSE |
|---|---|
Services that offer SLP support include cupsd, rsyncd, ypserv, openldap2, ksysguardd, saned, kdm, vnc, login, smpppd, rpasswd , postfix, and sshd (via fish). | |
All packages necessary to use SLP services are installed by default.
However, if you want to provide services via SLP, check that the
openslp-server package is installed. For SLP
daemon server configuration install the
yast2-slp-server package.
slpd must run on your system to offer services with SLP. If the machine
should only operate as client, and does not offer services, it is not
necessary to run slpd. Like most system services in openSUSE, the
slpd daemon is controlled by means of a separate init
script. After the installation, the daemon is inactive by default. To
activate it temporarily, run
rcslpd start as
root or
rcslpd stop to stop it. Perform
a restart or status check with restart or
status. If slpd should be always active after booting,
enable slpd in YaST + or run the
insserv slpd command as
root.
To find services provided via SLP in your network, use an SLP front-end
such as slptool (openslp
package) or YaST:
slptool is a command line program that can be used to
announce SLP inquiries in the network or announce proprietary
services. slptool --help
lists all available options and functions. For example, to find all
time servers that announce themselves in the current network, run the
command:
slptool findsrvs service:ntp
YaST also provides an SLP browser. However, this
browser is not available from the YaST Control Center. To start it,
run yast2 slp as
root user. Click on a
on the lefthand side to get more
information about a service.
If you have an installation server with openSUSE installation media within your network, this can be registered and offered with SLP. For details, see Section 2.2, “Setting Up the Server Holding the Installation Sources”. If SLP installation is selected, linuxrc starts an SLP inquiry after the system has booted from the selected boot medium and displays the sources found.
Many applications in openSUSE have integrated SLP support through
the use of the libslp library. If a service has not
been compiled with SLP support, use one of the following methods to make
it available via SLP:
/etc/slp.reg.d
Create a separate registration file for each new service. This is an example for registering a scanner service:
## Register a saned service on this system ## en means english language ## 65535 disables the timeout, so the service registration does ## not need refreshes service:scanner.sane://$HOSTNAME:6566,en,65535 watch-port-tcp=6566 description=SANE scanner daemon
The most important line in this file is the service
URL, which begins with service:. This
contains the service type (scanner.sane) and the
address under which the service is available on the server.
$HOSTNAME is automatically replaced with
the full hostname. The name of the TCP port on which the relevant
service can be found follows, separated by a colon. Then enter the
language in which the service should appear and the duration of
registration in seconds. These should be separated from the service
URL by commas. Set the value for the duration of registration between
0 and 65535.
0 prevents registration. 65535
removes all restrictions.
The registration file also contains the two variables
watch-port-tcp and
description.
watch-port-tcp links the SLP service
announcement to whether the relevant service is active by having slpd
check the status of the service. The second variable contains a more
precise description of the service that is displayed in suitable
browsers.
/etc/slp.reg
The only difference between this method and the procedure with
/etc/slp.reg.d is that all services are grouped
within a central file.
If a service needs to be registered dynamically without the need of configuration files, use the slptool command line utility. The same utility can also be used to deregister an existing service offering without restarting slpd.
RFC 2608 generally deals with the definition of SLP. RFC 2609 deals with the syntax of the service URLs used in greater detail and RFC 2610 deals with DHCP via SLP.
The home page of the OpenSLP project.
/usr/share/doc/packages/openslp
This directory contains the documentation for SLP coming with the
openslp-server package, including a
README.SuSE containing the openSUSE details,
the RFCs, and two introductory HTML documents. Programmers who want to
use the SLP functions find more information in the
Programmers Guide that is included in the
openslp-devel package.
Contents
Abstract
DNS (domain name system) is needed to resolve the domain names and
hostnames into IP addresses. In this way, the IP address 192.168.2.100 is
assigned to the hostname jupiter, for example. Before
setting up your own name server, read the general information about DNS
in Section 9.3, “Name Resolution”. The following configuration
examples refer to BIND.
The domain namespace is divided into regions called zones. For
instance, if you have example.com, you have the
example section (or zone) of the
com domain.
The DNS server is a server that maintains the name and IP information for a domain. You can have a primary DNS server for master zone, a secondary server for slave zone, or a slave server without any zones for caching.
The master zone includes all hosts from your network and a DNS server master zone stores up-to-date records for all the hosts in your domain.
A slave zone is a copy of the master zone. The slave zone DNS server obtains its zone data with zone transfer operations from its master server. The slave zone DNS server responds authoritatively for the zone as long as it has valid (not expired) zone data. If the slave cannot obtain a new copy of the zone data, it stops responding for the zone.
Forwarders are DNS servers to which your DNS server should send
queries it cannot answer. To enable different configuration sources in
one configuration, netconfig is used (see also
man 8 netconfig).
The record is information about name and IP address. Supported records and their syntax are described in BIND documentation. Some special records are:
An NS record tells name servers which machines are in charge of a given domain zone.
The MX (mail exchange) records describe the machines to contact for directing mail across the Internet.
SOA (Start of Authority) record is the first record in a zone file. The SOA record is used when using DNS to synchronize data between multiple computers.
To install a DNS server, start YaST and select +. Choose + and select . Confirm the installation of the dependent packages to finish the installation process.
Use the YaST DNS module to configure a DNS server for the local network. When starting the module for the first time, a wizard starts, prompting you to make a few decisions concerning administration of the server. Completing this initial setup produces a basic server configuration. Use the expert mode to deal with more advanced configuration tasks, such as setting up ACLs, logging, TSIG keys, and other options.
The wizard consists of three steps or dialogs. At the appropriate places in the dialogs, you are given the opportunity to enter the expert configuration mode.
When starting the module for the first time, the dialog, shown in Figure 11.1, “DNS Server Installation: Forwarder Settings”, opens. The decides which devices should provide forwarders or whether you want to supply your own . For more information about netconfig, see man 8 netconfig.
Forwarders are DNS servers to which your DNS server sends queries it cannot answer itself. Enter their IP address and click .
The dialog consists of several parts and
is responsible for the management of zone files, described in
Section 11.6, “Zone Files”. For a new zone, provide a name for
it in . To add a reverse zone, the name must
end in .in-addr.arpa. Finally, select the
(master, slave, or forward). See
Figure 11.2, “DNS Server Installation: DNS Zones”. Click to configure other settings of an existing zone. To remove
a zone, click .
In the final dialog, you can open the DNS port in the firewall by clicking . Then decide whether to start the DNS server when booting ( or ). You can also activate LDAP support. See Figure 11.3, “DNS Server Installation: Finish Wizard”.
After starting the module, YaST opens a window displaying several configuration options. Completing it results in a DNS server configuration with the basic functions in place:
Under , define whether the DNS server should be started when the booting the system or manually. To start the DNS server immediately, click . To stop the DNS server, click . To save the current settings, select . You can open the DNS port in the firewall with and modify the firewall settings with .
By selecting , the zone files are managed by an LDAP database. Any changes to zone data written to the LDAP database are picked up by the DNS server as soon as it is restarted or prompted to reload its configuration.
If your local DNS server cannot answer a request, it tries to forward the request to a , if configured so. This forwarder may be added manually to the . If the forwarder is not static like in dial-up connections, handles the configuration. For more information about netconfig, see man 8 netconfig.
In this section, set basic server options. From the menu, select the desired item then specify the value in the corresponding entry field. Include the new entry by selecting .
To set what the DNS server should log and how, select
. Under , specify
where the DNS server should write the log data. Use the systemwide log
file /var/log/messages by selecting
or specify a different file by selecting
. In the latter case, additionally specify a
name, the maximum file size in megabytes and the number of logfile
versions to store.
Further options are available under . Enabling causes every query to be logged, in which case the log file could grow extremely large. For this reason, it is not a good idea to enable this option for other than debugging purposes. To log the data traffic during zone updates between DHCP and DNS server, enable . To log the data traffic during a zone transfer from master to slave, enable . See Figure 11.4, “DNS Server: Logging”.
Use this dialog to define ACLs (access control lists) to enforce access restrictions. After providing a distinct name under , specify an IP address (with or without netmask) under in the following fashion:
{ 192.168.1/24; }The syntax of the configuration file requires that the address ends with a semicolon and is put into curly braces.
The main purpose of TSIGs (transaction signatures) is to secure communications between DHCP and DNS servers. They are described in Section 11.8, “Secure Transactions”.
To generate a TSIG key, enter a distinctive name in the field labeled and specify the file where the key should be stored (). Confirm your choices with .
To use a previously created key, leave the field blank and select the file where it is stored under . After that, confirm with .
To add a slave zone, select , choose the zone type , write the name of the new zone, and click .
In the sub-dialog under , specify the master from which the slave should pull its data. To limit access to the server, select one of the ACLs from the list.
To add a master zone, select , choose the
zone type , write the name of the new zone,
and click . When adding a master zone, a reverse
zone is also needed. For example, when adding the zone
example.com that points to hosts in a subnet
192.168.1.0/24, you should also add a reverse zone
for the IP-address range covered. By definition, this should be named
1.168.192.in-addr.arpa.
To edit a master zone, select , select the master zone from the table, and click . The dialog consists of several pages: (the one opened first), , , , and .
The basic dialog, shown in Figure 11.5, “DNS Server: Zone Editor (Basics)”, lets you define settings for dynamic DNS and access options for zone transfers to clients and slave name servers. To permit the dynamic updating of zones, select as well as the corresponding TSIG key. The key must have been defined before the update action starts. To enable zone transfers, select the corresponding ACLs. ACLs must have been defined already.
In the dialog, select whether to enable zone transfers. Use the listed ACLs to define who can download zones.
The dialog allows you to define alternative name servers for the zones specified. Make sure that your own name server is included in the list. To add a record, enter its name under then confirm with . See Figure 11.6, “DNS Server: Zone Editor (NS Records)”.
To add a mail server for the current zone to the existing list, enter the corresponding address and priority value. After doing so, confirm by selecting . See Figure 11.7, “DNS Server: Zone Editor (MX Records)”.
This page allows you to create SOA (start of authority) records. For an explanation of the individual options, refer to Example 11.6, “The /var/lib/named/example.com.zone File”.
This dialog manages name resolution. In , enter the hostname then select its type.
represents the main entry. The value for
this should be an IP address. is an alias.
Use the types and for
detailed or partial records that expand on the information provided
in the and tabs. These three types resolve to an existing A
record. is for reverse zones. It is the
opposite of an A record, for example:
hostname.example.com. IN A 192.168.0.1 1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa IN PTR hostname.example.com.
![]() | Editing the Reverse Zone |
|---|---|
After adding a forward zone, go back to the main menu and select the reverse zone for editing. There in the tab activate the checkbox and select your forward zone. That way, all changes to the forward zone are automatically updated in the reverse zone. | |
On a openSUSE® system, the name server BIND (Berkeley
Internet Name Domain) comes preconfigured so it can be started
right after installation without any problems. If you already have a
functioning Internet connection and have entered
127.0.0.1 as the name
server address for localhost
in /etc/resolv.conf, you normally already have a
working name resolution without needing to know the DNS of the provider.
BIND carries out name resolution via the root name server, a notably
slower process. Normally, the DNS of the provider should be entered with
its IP address in the configuration file
/etc/named.conf under
forwarders to ensure effective and secure name
resolution. If this works so far, the name server runs as a pure
caching-only name server. Only when you configure
its own zones it becomes a proper DNS. Find a simple example documented
in /usr/share/doc/packages/bind/config.
![]() | Automatic Adaptation of the Name Server Information |
|---|---|
Depending on the type of Internet connection or the network connection,
the name server information can automatically be adapted to the current
conditions. To do this, set the
| |
However, do not set up an official domain until one is assigned to you by the responsible institution. Even if you have your own domain and it is managed by the provider, you are better off not using it, because BIND would otherwise not forward requests for this domain. The Web server at the provider, for example, would not be accessible for this domain.
To start the name server, enter the command
rcnamed start as
root. If “done”
appears to the right in green then named (as the name server process is
called) has been started successfully. Test the name server immediately
on the local system with the host or
dig programs, which should return
localhost as the default
server with the address
127.0.0.1. If this is not the
case, /etc/resolv.conf probably contains an
incorrect name server entry or the file does not exist at all. For the
first test, enter
host 127.0.0.1, which should
always work. If you get an error message, use
rcnamed status to see whether
the server is actually running. If the name server does not start or
behaves unexpectedly, you can usually find the cause in the log file
/var/log/messages.
To use the name server of the provider (or one already running on your
network) as the forwarder, enter the corresponding IP address or
addresses in the options section under
forwarders. The addresses included in
Example 11.1, “Forwarding Options in named.conf” are just examples. Adjust these entries to
your own setup.
Example 11.1. Forwarding Options in named.conf¶
options {
directory "/var/lib/named";
forwarders { 10.11.12.13; 10.11.12.14; };
listen-on { 127.0.0.1; 192.168.1.116; };
allow-query { 127/8; 192.168/16 };
notify no;
};
The options entry is followed by entries for the
zone, localhost, and
0.0.127.in-addr.arpa. The type
hint entry under “.” should always be present. The
corresponding files do not need to be modified and should work as they
are. Also make sure that each entry is closed with a “;” and
that the curly braces are in the correct places. After changing the
configuration file /etc/named.conf or the zone
files, tell BIND to reread them with
rcnamed reload. Achieve the same
by stopping and restarting the name server with
rcnamed restart. Stop the server
at any time by entering
rcnamed stop.
All the settings for the BIND name server itself are stored in the
/etc/named.conf file. However, the zone data for the
domains to handle (consisting of the hostnames, IP addresses, and so on)
are stored in separate files in the /var/lib/named
directory. The details of this are described later.
/etc/named.conf is roughly divided into two areas.
One is the options section for general settings
and the other consists of zone entries for the
individual domains. A logging section and
acl (access control list) entries are optional.
Comment lines begin with a # sign or
//. A minimal /etc/named.conf is
shown in Example 11.2, “A Basic /etc/named.conf”.
Example 11.2. A Basic /etc/named.conf¶
options {
directory "/var/lib/named";
forwarders { 10.0.0.1; };
notify no;
};
zone "localhost" in {
type master;
file "localhost.zone";
};
zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" in {
type master;
file "127.0.0.zone";
};
zone "." in {
type hint;
file "root.hint";
};filename";
Specifies the directory in which BIND can find the files containing
the zone data. Usually, this is /var/lib/named.
ip-address; };
Specifies the name servers (mostly of the provider) to which DNS
requests should be forwarded if they cannot be resolved directly.
Replace ip-address with an IP address like
192.168.1.116.
Causes DNS requests to be forwarded before an attempt is made to
resolve them via the root name servers. Instead of
forward first, forward
only can be written to have all requests forwarded and
none sent to the root name servers. This makes sense for firewall
configurations.
ip-address; };
Tells BIND on which network interfaces and port to accept client
queries. port 53 does not need to be specified
explicitly, because 53 is the default port. Enter
127.0.0.1 to permit requests from the local host.
If you omit this entry entirely, all interfaces are used by default.
Tells BIND on which port it should listen for IPv6 client requests.
The only alternative to any is
none. As far as IPv6 is concerned, the server only
accepts wild card addresses.
This entry is necessary if a firewall is blocking outgoing DNS requests. This tells BIND to post requests externally from port 53 and not from any of the high ports above 1024.
Tells BIND which port to use for IPv6 queries.
net; };
Defines the networks from which clients can post DNS requests.
Replace net with address information like
192.168.2.0/24. The /24
at the end is an abbreviated expression for the netmask (in this case
255.255.255.0).
Controls which hosts can request zone transfers. In the example, such
requests are completely denied with ! *.
Without this entry, zone transfers can be requested from anywhere
without restrictions.
In the absence of this entry, BIND generates several lines of
statistical information per hour in
/var/log/messages. Set it to 0 to suppress these
statistics completely or set an interval in minutes.
This option defines at which time intervals BIND clears its cache.
This triggers an entry in /var/log/messages each
time it occurs. The time specification is in minutes. The default is
60 minutes.
BIND regularly searches the network interfaces for new or nonexistent
interfaces. If this value is set to 0, this
is not done and BIND only listens at the interfaces detected at
start-up. Otherwise, the interval can be defined in minutes. The
default is sixty minutes.
no prevents other name servers from being informed
when changes are made to the zone data or when the name server is
restarted.
For a list of available options, read the manual page man 5 named.conf.
What, how, and where logging takes place can be extensively configured in BIND. Normally, the default settings should be sufficient. Example 11.3, “Entry to Disable Logging”, shows the simplest form of such an entry and completely suppresses any logging.
Example 11.4. Zone Entry for example.com¶
zone "example.com" in {
type master;
file "example.com.zone";
notify no;
};
After zone, specify the name of the domain to
administer (example.com)
followed by in and a block of relevant options
enclosed in curly braces, as shown in Example 11.4, “Zone Entry for example.com”.
To define a slave zone, switch the
type to slave and specify a
name server that administers this zone as master
(which, in turn, may be a slave of another master), as shown in
Example 11.5, “Zone Entry for example.net”.
Example 11.5. Zone Entry for example.net¶
zone "example.net" in {
type slave;
file "slave/example.net.zone";
masters { 10.0.0.1; };
};The zone options:
By specifying master, tell BIND that the zone is
handled by the local name server. This assumes that a zone file has
been created in the correct format.
This zone is transferred from another name server. It must be used
together with masters.
The zone . of the hint type is
used to set the root name servers. This zone definition can be left
as is.
example.com.zone or file
“slave/example.net.zone”;
This entry specifies the file where zone data for the domain is
located. This file is not required for a slave, because this data is
pulled from another name server. To differentiate master and slave
files, use the directory slave for the slave
files.
server-ip-address; };This entry is only needed for slave zones. It specifies from which name server the zone file should be transferred.
This option controls external write access, which would allow clients
to make a DNS entry—something not normally desirable for
security reasons. Without this entry, zone updates are not allowed at
all. The above entry achieves the same because ! *
effectively bans any such activity.
Two types of zone files are needed. One assigns IP addresses to hostnames and the other does the reverse: it supplies a hostname for an IP address.
![]() | Using the Dot (Period, Fullstop) in Zone Files |
|---|---|
The | |
The first case to consider is the zone file
example.com.zone, responsible for the domain
example.com, shown in
Example 11.6, “The /var/lib/named/example.com.zone File”.
Example 11.6. The /var/lib/named/example.com.zone File¶
1. $TTL 2D 2. example.com. IN SOA dns root.example.com. ( 3. 2003072441 ; serial 4. 1D ; refresh 5. 2H ; retry 6. 1W ; expiry 7. 2D ) ; minimum 8. 9. IN NS dns 10. IN MX 10 mail 11. 12. gate IN A 192.168.5.1 13. IN A 10.0.0.1 14. dns IN A 192.168.1.116 15. mail IN A 192.168.3.108 16. jupiter IN A 192.168.2.100 17. venus IN A 192.168.2.101 18. saturn IN A 192.168.2.102 19. mercury IN A 192.168.2.103 20. ntp IN CNAME dns 21. dns6 IN A6 0 2002:c0a8:174::
$TTL defines the default time to live that
should apply to all the entries in this file. In this example, entries
are valid for a period of two days (2 D).
This is where the SOA (start of authority) control record begins:
The name of the domain to administer is
example.com in the first position. This ends
with ".", because otherwise the zone would be
appended a second time. Alternatively, @ can be
entered here, in which case the zone would be extracted from the
corresponding entry in /etc/named.conf.
After IN SOA is the name of the name server
in charge as master for this zone. The name is expanded from
dns to dns.example.com, because it
does not end with a ".".
An e-mail address of the person in charge of this name server
follows. Because the @ sign already has a special
meaning, "." is entered here instead. For
root@example.com the entry must read
root.example.com.. The
"." must be included at the end to prevent the
zone from being added.
The ( includes all lines up to
) into the SOA record.
The serial number is an arbitrary number that
is increased each time this file is changed. It is needed to inform
the secondary name servers (slave servers) of changes. For this, a 10
digit number of the date and run number, written as YYYYMMDDNN, has
become the customary format.
The refresh rate specifies the time interval
at which the secondary name servers verify the zone serial
number. In this case, one day.
The retry rate specifies the time interval at
which a secondary name server, in case of error, attempts to contact
the primary server again. Here, two hours.
The expiration time specifies the time frame
after which a secondary name server discards the cached data if it has
not regained contact to the primary server. Here, a week.
The last entry in the SOA record specifies the negative
caching TTL—the time for which results of
unresolved DNS queries from other servers may be cached.
The IN NS specifies the name server
responsible for this domain. dns is extended
to dns.example.com because it does not end with a
".". There can be several lines like this—one
for the primary and one for each secondary name server. If
notify is not set to no in
/etc/named.conf, all the name servers listed here
are informed of the changes made to the zone data.
The MX record specifies the mail server that accepts, processes, and
forwards e-mails for the domain
example.com. In
this example, this is the host
mail.example.com. The number in
front of the hostname is the preference value. If there are multiple
MX entries, the mail server with the smallest value is taken first
and, if mail delivery to this server fails, an attempt is made with
the next higher value.
These are the actual address records where one or more IP addresses
are assigned to hostnames. The names are listed here without a
"." because they do not include their domain, so
example.com is added
to all of them. Two IP addresses are assigned to the host
gate, as it has two network cards.
Wherever the host address is a traditional one (IPv4), the record is
marked with A. If the address is an IPv6 address,
the entry is marked with AAAA.
![]() | IPv6 Syntax |
|---|---|
The IPv6 record has a slightly different syntax than IPv4. Because of the fragmentation possibility, it is necessary to provide information about missed bits before the address. To just fill up the IPv6 address with the needed number of “0”, add two colons at the correct place in the address. pluto AAAA 2345:00C1:CA11::1234:5678:9ABC:DEF0 pluto AAAA 2345:00D2:DA11::1234:5678:9ABC:DEF0 | |
The alias ntp can be used to address
dns (CNAME means
canonical name).
The pseudodomain in-addr.arpa is used for the reverse
lookup of IP addresses into hostnames. It is appended to the network part
of the address in reverse notation. So
192.168 is resolved into
168.192.in-addr.arpa. See
Example 11.7, “Reverse Lookup”.
Example 11.7. Reverse Lookup¶
1. $TTL 2D 2. 168.192.in-addr.arpa. IN SOA dns.example.com. root.example.com. ( 3. 2003072441 ; serial 4. 1D ; refresh 5. 2H ; retry 6. 1W ; expiry 7. 2D ) ; minimum 8. 9. IN NS dns.example.com. 10. 11. 1.5 IN PTR gate.example.com. 12. 100.3 IN PTR www.example.com. 13. 253.2 IN PTR cups.example.com.
$TTL defines the standard TTL that applies to all entries here.
The configuration file should activate reverse lookup for the network
192.168. Given
that the zone is called 168.192.in-addr.arpa,
it should not be added to the hostnames. Therefore, all hostnames are
entered in their complete form—with their domain and with a
"." at the end. The remaining entries correspond to
those described for the previous
example.com example.
See the previous example for example.com.
Again this line specifies the name server responsible for this zone.
This time, however, the name is entered in its complete form with the
domain and a "." at the end.
These are the pointer records hinting at the IP addresses on the
respective hosts. Only the last part of the IP address is entered at
the beginning of the line, without the "." at the
end. Appending the zone to this (without the
.in-addr.arpa) results in the complete IP
address in reverse order.
Normally, zone transfers between different versions of BIND should be possible without any problems.
The term dynamic update refers to operations by
which entries in the zone files of a master server are added, changed, or
deleted. This mechanism is described in RFC 2136. Dynamic update is
configured individually for each zone entry by adding an optional
allow-update or
update-policy rule. Zones to update dynamically
should not be edited by hand.
Transmit the entries to update to the server with the command
nsupdate. For the exact syntax of this command, check
the manual page for nsupdate (man 8
nsupdate). For security reasons, any such update should be
performed using TSIG keys as described in Section 11.8, “Secure Transactions”.
Secure transactions can be made with the help of transaction signatures (TSIGs) based on shared secret keys (also called TSIG keys). This section describes how to generate and use such keys.
Secure transactions are needed for communication between different servers and for the dynamic update of zone data. Making the access control dependent on keys is much more secure than merely relying on IP addresses.
Generate a TSIG key with the following command (for details, see
man dnssec-keygen):
dnssec-keygen -a hmac-md5 -b 128 -n HOST host1-host2
This creates two files with names similar to these:
Khost1-host2.+157+34265.private Khost1-host2.+157+34265.key
The key itself (a string like
ejIkuCyyGJwwuN3xAteKgg==) is found in both files. To
use it for transactions, the second file
(Khost1-host2.+157+34265.key) must be transferred to
the remote host, preferably in a secure way (using scp, for example). On
the remote server, the key must be included in the
/etc/named.conf file to enable a secure
communication between host1 and
host2:
key host1-host2 {
algorithm hmac-md5;
secret "ejIkuCyyGJwwuN3xAteKgg==";
};![]() | File Permissions of /etc/named.conf |
|---|---|
Make sure that the permissions of include "filename"
Replace | |
To enable the server host1 to use the key for
host2 (which has the address
10.1.2.3 in this example), the server's
/etc/named.conf must include the following rule:
server 10.1.2.3 {
keys { host1-host2. ;};
};
Analogous entries must be included in the configuration files of
host2.
Add TSIG keys for any ACLs (access control lists, not to be confused with file system ACLs) that are defined for IP addresses and address ranges to enable transaction security. The corresponding entry could look like this:
allow-update { key host1-host2. ;};
This topic is discussed in more detail in the BIND
Administrator Reference Manual under
update-policy.
DNSSEC, or DNS security, is described in RFC 2535. The tools available for DNSSEC are discussed in the BIND Manual.
A zone considered secure must have one or several zone keys associated
with it. These are generated with dnssec-keygen, just
like the host keys. The DSA encryption algorithm is currently used to
generate these keys. The public keys generated should be included in the
corresponding zone file with an $INCLUDE rule.
With the command dnssec-signzone, you can create sets
of generated keys (keyset- files), transfer them to
the parent zone in a secure manner, and sign them. This generates the
files to include for each zone in /etc/named.conf.
For additional information, refer to the BIND Administrator
Reference Manual from package
bind-doc, which is installed
under /usr/share/doc/packages/bind/. Consider
additionally consulting the RFCs referenced by the manual and the manual
pages included with BIND.
/usr/share/doc/packages/bind/README.SuSE contains
up-to-date information about BIND in openSUSE.
Contents
Abstract
The purpose of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is to assign network settings centrally (from a server) rather than configuring them locally on each and every workstation. A host configured to use DHCP does not have control over its own static address. It is enabled to configure itself completely and automatically according to directions from the server. If you use the NetworkManager on the client side, you do not need to configure the client at all. This is useful if you have changing environments and only one interface active at a time. Never use NetworkManager on a machine that runs a DHCP server.
One way to configure a DHCP server is to identify each client using the hardware address of its network card (which should be fixed in most cases), then supply that client with identical settings each time it connects to the server. DHCP can also be configured to assign addresses to each relevant client dynamically from an address pool set up for this purpose. In the latter case, the DHCP server tries to assign the same address to the client each time it receives a request, even over extended periods. This works only if the network does not have more clients than addresses.
DHCP makes life easier for system administrators. Any changes, even bigger ones, related to addresses and the network configuration in general can be implemented centrally by editing the server's configuration file. This is much more convenient than reconfiguring numerous workstations. It is also much easier to integrate machines, particularly new machines, into the network, because they can be given an IP address from the pool. Retrieving the appropriate network settings from a DHCP server is especially useful in case of laptops regularly used in different networks.
In this chapter, the DHCP server will run in the same subnet as the workstations, 192.168.2.0/24 with 192.168.2.1 as gateway. It has the fixed IP address 192.168.2.254 and serves two address ranges, 192.168.2.10 to 192.168.2.20 and 192.168.2.100 192.168.2.200.
A DHCP server supplies not only the IP address and the netmask, but also the hostname, domain name, gateway, and name server addresses for the client to use. In addition to that, DHCP allows a number of other parameters to be configured in a centralized way, for example, a time server from which clients may poll the current time or even a print server.
To install a DHCP server, start YaST and select +. Choose + and select . Confirm the installation of the dependent packages to finish the installation process.
![]() | LDAP Support |
|---|---|
The YaST DHCP module can be set up to store the server configuration locally (on the host that runs the DHCP server) or to have its configuration data managed by an LDAP server. If you want to use LDAP, set up your LDAP environment before configuring the DHCP server. For more information about LDAP, see Chapter 4, LDAP—A Directory Service (↑Security Guide). | |
The YaST DHCP module (yast2-dhcp-server)
allows you to set up your own DHCP server for the local network. The
module can run in wizard mode or expert configuration mode.
When the module is started for the first time, a wizard starts, prompting you to make a few basic decisions concerning server administration. Completing this initial setup produces a very basic server configuration that should function in its essential aspects. The expert mode can be used to deal with more advanced configuration tasks.
In the first step, YaST looks for the network interfaces available on your system and displays them in a list. From the list, select the interface to which the DHCP server should listen and click . After this, select to open the firewall for this interface, and click . See Figure 12.1, “DHCP Server: Card Selection”.
Use the check box to determine whether your DHCP settings should be automatically stored by an LDAP server. In the entry fields, provide the network specifics for all clients the DHCP server should manage. These specifics are the domain name, address of a time server, addresses of the primary and secondary name server, addresses of a print and a WINS server (for a mixed network with both Windows and Linux clients), gateway address, and lease time. See Figure 12.2, “DHCP Server: Global Settings”.
In this step, configure how dynamic IP addresses should be assigned to clients. To do so, specify an IP range from which the server can assign addresses to DHCP clients. All these addresses must be covered by the same netmask. Also specify the lease time during which a client may keep its IP address without needing to request an extension of the lease. Optionally, specify the maximum lease time—the period during which the server reserves an IP address for a particular client. See Figure 12.3, “DHCP Server: Dynamic DHCP”.
After the third part of the configuration wizard, a last dialog is shown in which you can define how the DHCP server should be started. Here, specify whether to start the DHCP server automatically when the system is booted or manually when needed (for example, for testing purposes). Click to complete the configuration of the server. See Figure 12.4, “DHCP Server: Start-Up”.
Both the DHCP server and the DHCP clients are available for
openSUSE. The DHCP server available is dhcpd (published by the
Internet Systems Consortium). On the client side, choose between two
different DHCP client programs: dhcp-client
(also from ISC) and the DHCP client daemon in the
dhcpcd package.
openSUSE installs dhcpcd by default. The program is very easy to
handle and is launched automatically on each system boot to watch for a
DHCP server. It does not need a configuration file to do its job and
works out of the box in most standard setups. For more complex
situations, use the ISC dhcp-client, which is controlled by means of the
configuration file /etc/dhclient.conf.
The core of any DHCP system is the dynamic host configuration protocol
daemon. This server leases addresses and watches how
they are used, according to the settings defined in the configuration
file /etc/dhcpd.conf. By changing the parameters and
values in this file, a system administrator can influence the program's
behavior in numerous ways. Look at the basic sample
/etc/dhcpd.conf file in
Example 12.1, “The Configuration File /etc/dhcpd.conf”.
Example 12.1. The Configuration File /etc/dhcpd.conf¶
default-lease-time 600; # 10 minutes
max-lease-time 7200; # 2 hours
option domain-name "example.com";
option domain-name-servers 192.168.1.116;
option broadcast-address 192.168.2.255;
option routers 192.168.2.1;
option subnet-mask 255.255.255.0;
subnet 192.168.2.0 netmask 255.255.255.0
{
range 192.168.2.10 192.168.2.20;
range 192.168.2.100 192.168.2.200;
}
This simple configuration file should be sufficient to get the DHCP server to assign IP addresses in the network. Make sure that a semicolon is inserted at the end of each line, because otherwise dhcpd is not started.
The sample file can be divided into three sections. The first one defines
how many seconds an IP address is leased to a requesting client by
default (default-lease-time) before it should apply
for renewal. This section also includes a statement of the maximum period
for which a machine may keep an IP address assigned by the DHCP server
without applying for renewal (max-lease-time).
In the second part, some basic network parameters are defined on a global level:
The line option domain-name defines the default
domain of your network.
With the entry option domain-name-servers, specify
up to three values for the DNS servers used to resolve IP addresses
into hostnames and vice versa. Ideally, configure a name server on your
machine or somewhere else in your network before setting up DHCP. That
name server should also define a hostname for each dynamic address and
vice versa. To learn how to configure your own name server, read
Chapter 11, The Domain Name System.
The line option broadcast-address defines the
broadcast address the requesting client should use.
With option routers, set where the server should
send data packets that cannot be delivered to a host on the local
network (according to the source and target host address and the subnet
mask provided). In most cases, especially in smaller networks, this
router is identical to the Internet gateway.
With option subnet-mask, specify the netmask
assigned to clients.
The last section of the file defines a network, including a subnet mask.
To finish, specify the address range that the DHCP daemon should use to
assign IP addresses to interested clients. In
Example 12.1, “The Configuration File /etc/dhcpd.conf”, clients may be given any address
between 192.168.2.10 and
192.168.2.20 as well as
192.168.2.100 and 192.168.2.200.
After editing these few lines, you should be able to activate the DHCP
daemon with the command
rcdhcpd start. It will be ready
for use immediately. Use the command
rcdhcpd check-syntax to perform
a brief syntax check. If you encounter any unexpected problems with your
configuration (the server aborts with an error or does not return
done on start), you should be able to find out what
has gone wrong by looking for information either in the main system log
/var/log/messages or on console 10
(Ctrl+Alt+F10).
On a default openSUSE system, the DHCP daemon is started in a chroot
environment for security reasons. The configuration files must be copied
to the chroot environment so the daemon can find them. Normally, there is
no need to worry about this because the command
rcdhcpd start automatically
copies the files.
DHCP can also be used to assign a predefined, static address to a specific client. Addresses assigned explicitly always take priority over dynamic addresses from the pool. A static address never expires in the way a dynamic address would, for example, if there were not enough addresses available and the server needed to redistribute them among clients.
To identify a client configured with a static address, dhcpd uses the
hardware address (which is a globally unique, fixed numerical code
consisting of six octet pairs) for the identification of all network
devices (for example, 00:30:6E:08:EC:80). If the respective
lines, like the ones in Example 12.2, “Additions to the Configuration File”, are added
to the configuration file of Example 12.1, “The Configuration File /etc/dhcpd.conf”, the DHCP
daemon always assigns the same set of data to the corresponding client.
Example 12.2. Additions to the Configuration File¶
host jupiter {
hardware ethernet 00:30:6E:08:EC:80;
fixed-address 192.168.2.100;
}
The name of the respective client (host
hostname, here
jupiter) is entered in the first line and the MAC
address in the second line. On Linux hosts, find the MAC address with
the command ip link show followed by
the network device (for example, eth0). The output
should contain something like
link/ether 00:30:6E:08:EC:80
In the preceding example, a client with a network card having the MAC
address 00:30:6E:08:EC:80 is assigned the IP address
192.168.2.100 and the hostname
jupiter automatically. The type of hardware to enter is
ethernet in nearly all cases, although
token-ring, which is often found on IBM systems, is
also supported.
To improve security, the openSUSE version of the ISC's DHCP server
comes with the non-root/chroot patch by Ari Edelkind applied. This
enables dhcpd to run with the user ID
nobody and run in a chroot
environment (/var/lib/dhcp). To make this possible,
the configuration file dhcpd.conf must be located
in /var/lib/dhcp/etc. The init script automatically
copies the file to this directory when starting.
Control the server's behavior regarding this feature by means of entries
in the file /etc/sysconfig/dhcpd. To run dhcpd
without the chroot environment, set the variable
DHCPD_RUN_CHROOTED in
/etc/sysconfig/dhcpd to “no”.
To enable dhcpd to resolve hostnames even from within the chroot environment, some other configuration files must be copied as well:
/etc/localtime
/etc/host.conf
/etc/hosts
/etc/resolv.conf
These files are copied to /var/lib/dhcp/etc/ when
starting the init script. Take these copies into account for any changes
that they require if they are dynamically modified by scripts like
/etc/ppp/ip-up. However, there should be no need to
worry about this if the configuration file only specifies IP addresses
(instead of hostnames).
If your configuration includes additional files that should be copied
into the chroot environment, set these under the variable
DHCPD_CONF_INCLUDE_FILES in the file
/etc/sysconfig/dhcpd. To ensure that the DHCP
logging facility keeps working even after a restart of the syslog-ng
daemon, there is an additional entry
SYSLOGD_ADDITIONAL_SOCKET_DHCP in the file
/etc/sysconfig/syslog.
More information about DHCP is available at the Web site of the
Internet Systems Consortium
(http://www.isc.org/products/DHCP/). Information is
also available in the dhcpd,
dhcpd.conf, dhcpd.leases, and
dhcp-options man pages.
Contents
Abstract
The NTP (network time protocol) mechanism is a protocol for synchronizing the system time over the network. First, a machine can obtain the time from a server that is a reliable time source. Second, a machine can itself act as a time source for other computers in the network. The goal is twofold—maintaining the absolute time and synchronizing the system time of all machines within a network.
Maintaining an exact system time is important in many situations. The built-in hardware (BIOS) clock does often not meet the requirements of applications such as databases or clusters. Manual correction of the system time would lead to severe problems because, for example, a backward leap can cause malfunction of critical applications. Within a network, it is usually necessary to synchronize the system time of all machines, but manual time adjustment is a bad approach. NTP provides a mechanism to solve these problems. The NTP service continuously adjusts the system time with the help of reliable time servers in the network. It further enables the management of local reference clocks, such as radio-controlled clocks.
The NTP daemon (ntpd) coming with the
ntp package is preset to use the local computer
clock as a time reference. Using the (BIOS) clock, however, only serves
as a fallback for cases where no time source of better precision is
available. YaST facilitates the configuration of an NTP client.
The YaST NTP client configuration (+) consists of tabs. Set the start mode of ntpd and the server to query on the tab.
Select , if you want to configure everything on your own.
On laptops and other machines that suspend automatically, select
. Using this mode,
YaST does not start ntpd on the local machine
for synchronizing. Instead YaST creates a crontab entry
(/etc/cron.d/novell.ntp-synchronize) that checks
the time with the time server as specified in the field. For more
information about cron, see
Section 7.1.2, “The cron Package”.
Select to start
ntpd automatically when the system is booted.
Either of
0.opensuse.pool.ntp.org,
1.opensuse.pool.ntp.org,
2.opensuse.pool.ntp.org, or
3.opensuse.pool.ntp.org is
pre-selected.
The servers and other time sources for the client to query are listed in the lower part of the tab. Modify this list as needed with , , and . provides the possibility to view the log files of your client.
Click to add a new source of time information. In the following dialog, select the type of source with which the time synchronization should be made. The following options are available:
In the pull-down list (see Figure 13.2, “YaST: NTP Server”, determine whether to set up time synchronization using a time server from your local network () or an Internet-based time server that takes care of your time zone (). For a local time server, click to start an SLP query for available time servers in your network. Select the most suitable time server from the list of search results and exit the dialog with . For a public time server, select your country (time zone) and a suitable server from the list under then exit the dialog with . In the main dialog, test the availability of the selected server with .
Another dialog enables you to select an NTP server. Activate to trigger the synchronization of the time information between the server and the client when the system is booted. allows you to specify additional options for ntpd.
Using , you can restrict the
actions that the remote computer can perform with the daemon running
on your computer. This field is enabled only after checking
on
the tab (see
Figure 13.3, “Advanced NTP Configuration: Security Settings”). The options correspond to
the restrict clauses in
/etc/ntp.conf.
For example, nomodify notrap noquery disallows the
server to modify NTP settings of your computer and to use the trap
facility (a remote event logging feature) of your NTP daemon. Using
these restrictions is recommended for servers out of your control
(for example, on the Internet).
Refer to /usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc (part
of the ntp-doc package) for detailed
information.
A peer is a machine to which a symmetric relationship is established: it acts both as a time server and as a client. To use a peer in the same network instead of a server, enter the address of the system. The rest of the dialog is identical to the dialog.
To use a radio clock in your system for the time synchronization,
enter the clock type, unit number, device name, and other options in
this dialog. Click to fine-tune
the driver. Detailed information about the operation of a local radio
clock is available in
/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/refclock.html.
Time information and queries can also be transmitted by broadcast in the network. In this dialog, enter the address to which such broadcasts should be sent. Do not activate broadcasting unless you have a reliable time source like a radio controlled clock.
If you want your client to receive its information via broadcast, enter the address from which the respective packets should be accepted in this fields.
In the tab (see Figure 13.3, “Advanced NTP Configuration: Security Settings”), determine whether ntpd should be started in a chroot jail. By default, is activated. This increases the security in the event of an attack over ntpd, as it prevents the attacker from compromising the entire system.
increases the security of your system by disallowing remote computers to view and modify NTP settings of your computer and to use the trap facility for remote event logging. Once enabled, these restrictions apply to all remote computers, unless you override the access control options for individual computers in the list of time sources in the tab. For all other remote computers, only querying for local time is allowed.
Enable if SuSEfirewall2 is active (which it is by default). If you leave the port closed, it is not possible to establish a connection to the time server.
The easiest way to use a time server in the network is to set server
parameters. For example, if a time server called
ntp.example.com is reachable from the network, add its
name to the file /etc/ntp.conf by adding the
following line:
server ntp.example.com
To add more time servers, insert additional lines with the keyword
server. After initializing ntpd with the command
rcntp start, it takes about one hour
until the time is stabilized and the drift file for correcting the local
computer clock is created. With the drift file, the systematic error of
the hardware clock can be computed as soon as the computer is powered on.
The correction is used immediately, resulting in a higher stability of
the system time.
There are two possible ways to use the NTP mechanism as a client: First, the client can query the time from a known server in regular intervals. With many clients, this approach can cause a high load on the server. Second, the client can wait for NTP broadcasts sent out by broadcast time servers in the network. This approach has the disadvantage that the quality of the server is unknown and a server sending out wrong information can cause severe problems.
If the time is obtained via broadcast, you do not need the server name.
In this case, enter the line broadcastclient in the
configuration file /etc/ntp.conf. To use one or more
known time servers exclusively, enter their names in the line starting
with servers.
If the system boots without network connection, ntpd starts up, but it cannot resolve DNS names of the time servers set in the configuration file. This can happen if you use Network Manager with an encrypted WLAN.
If you want ntpd to resolve DNS names at runtime, you must set the
dynamic option. Then, when the network is
establish some time after booting, ntpd looks up the names again and can
reach the time servers to get the time.
Manually edit /etc/ntp.conf and add
dynamic to one or more
server entries:
server ntp.example.com dynamic
Or use YaST and proceed as follows:
In YaST click +.
Select the server you want to configure. Then click .
Activate the field and add
dynamic. Separate it with a space, if there are
already other options entered.
Click to close the edit dialog. Repeat the previous step to change all servers as wanted.
Finally click to save the settings.
The software package ntp contains drivers for connecting local reference
clocks. A list of supported clocks is available in the
ntp-doc package in the file
/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/refclock.html. Every
driver is associated with a number. In ntp, the actual configuration
takes place by means of pseudo IP addresses. The clocks are entered in
the file /etc/ntp.conf as though they existed in the
network. For this purpose, they are assigned special IP addresses in the
form
127.127..
Here, t.ut stands for the type of the clock and
determines which driver is used and u for the
unit, which determines the interface used.
Normally, the individual drivers have special parameters that describe
configuration details. The file
/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/drivers/driver
(where NN.htmlNN is the number of the driver)
provides information about the particular type of clock. For example, the
“type 8” clock (radio clock over serial interface)
requires an additional mode that specifies the clock more precisely. The
Conrad DCF77 receiver module, for example, has mode 5. To use this
clock as a preferred reference, specify the keyword
prefer. The complete server line
for a Conrad DCF77 receiver module would be:
server 127.127.8.0 mode 5 prefer
Other clocks follow the same pattern. Following the installation of the
ntp-doc package, the
documentation for ntp is available in the directory
/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc. The file
/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/refclock.html
provides links to the driver pages describing the driver parameters.
Contents
Abstract
Distributing and sharing file systems over a network is a common task in corporate environments. The well-proven network file system (NFS) works together with NIS, the yellow pages protocol. For a more secure protocol that works together with LDAP and may also use Kerberos, check NFSv4.
NFS with NIS makes a network transparent to the user. With NFS, it is possible to distribute arbitrary file systems over the network. With an appropriate setup, users always find themselves in the same environment regardless of the terminal they currently use.
![]() | Need for DNS |
|---|---|
In principle, all exports can be made using IP addresses only. To avoid time-outs, you need a working DNS system. DNS is necessary at least for logging purposes, because the mountd daemon does reverse lookups. | |
The following are terms used in the YaST module.
A directory exported by an NFS server, which clients can integrate it into their system.
The NFS client is a system that uses NFS services from an NFS server over the Network File System protocol. The TCP/IP protocol is already integrated into the Linux kernel; there is no need to install any additional software.
The NFS server provides NFS services to clients. A running server
depends on the following daemons:
nfsd (worker),
idmapd (user and group name
mappings to IDs and vice versa),
statd (file locking), and
mountd (mount requests).
The NFS server software is not part of the default installation. To
install the NFS server software, start YaST and select +. Now choose + and select or use the option and search
for NFS Server. Confirm the installation of the
packages to finish the installation process.
Like NIS, NFS is a client/server system. However, a machine can be both—it can supply file systems over the network (export) and mount file systems from other hosts (import).
Configuring an NFS server can be done either through YaST or manually. For authentication, NFS can also be combined with Kerberos.
With YaST, turn a host in your network into an NFS server—a server that exports directories and files to all hosts granted access to it. The server can also provide applications to all members of a group without installing the applications locally on each and every host. To set up such a server, proceed as follows:
Start YaST and select +; see Figure 14.1, “NFS Server Configuration Tool”.
Activate the radio button and enter the .
Click if you need secure access to the server. A prerequisite for this is to have Kerberos installed on your domain and to have both the server and the clients kerberized. Click .
Enter the directories to export in the upper text field. Below, enter the hosts that should have access to them. This dialog is shown in Figure 14.2, “Configuring an NFS Server with YaST”.
The figure shows the scenario where NFSv4 is enabled in the previous
dialog. Bindmount Targets is shown in the right
pane. For more details, click . In the lower
half of the dialog, there are four options that can be set for each
host: single host, netgroups,
wildcards, and IP networks. For a
more thorough explanation of these options, refer to the
exports man page.
Click to complete the configuration.
![]() | Automatic Firewall Configuration |
|---|---|
If a firewall is active on your system (SuSEfirewall2), YaST adapts
its configuration for the NFS server by enabling the
| |
Activate to support NFSv4 clients. Clients with NFSv3 can still access the server's exported directories if they are exported appropriately. This is explained in detail in Section 14.3.1.3, “Coexisting v3 and v4 Exports”.
After activating NFSv4, enter an appropriate domain name. Make sure the
name is the same as the one in the
/etc/idmapd.conf file of any NFSv4 client that accesses this
particular server. This parameter is for the idmapd service that is
required for NFSv4 support (on both server and client). Leave it as
localdomain (the default) if you do not have special
requirements. For more information, see the links in
Section 14.5, “For More Information”.
Click . The dialog that follows has two sections. The upper half consists of two columns named and . is a directly editable column that lists the directories to export.
For a fixed set of clients, there are two types of directories that can be exported—directories that act as pseudo root file systems and those that are bound to some subdirectory of the pseudo file system. This pseudo file system acts as a base point under which all file systems exported for the same client set take their place. For a client or set of clients, only one directory on the server can be configured as pseudo root for export. For this client, export multiple directories by binding them to some existing subdirectory in the pseudo root.
In the lower half of the dialog, enter the client (wild card) and export options for a particular directory. After adding a directory in the upper half, another dialog for entering the client information and options pops up automatically. After that, to add a new client or a set of clients, click .
In the small dialog that opens, enter the host wild card. There are
four possible types of host wild cards that can be set for each host: a
single host (name or IP address), netgroups, wild cards (such as
* indicating all machines can access the server),
and IP networks. Then, in , include
fsid=0 in the comma-separated list of options to
configure the directory as pseudo root. If this directory needs to be
bound to another directory under an already configured pseudo root,
make sure that a target bind path is given in the option list with
bind=/target/path.
For example, suppose that the directory /exports
is chosen as the pseudo root directory for all the clients that can
access the server. Then add this in the upper half and make sure that
the options entered for this directory include
fsid=0. If there is another directory,
/data, that also needs to be NFSv4 exported, add
this directory to the upper half. While entering options for this, make
sure that bind=/exports/data is in the list and that
/exports/data is an already existing subdirectory
of /exports. Any change in the option
bind=/target/path, whether addition, deletion,
or change in value, is reflected in . This column is not a directly editable column, but
instead summarizes directories and their nature. After all information
is provided, click to complete the
configuration. The service will become available immediately.
Make sure that is not checked in the initial dialog before clicking .
The next dialog has two parts. In the upper text field, enter the
directories to export. Below, enter the hosts that should have access
to them. There are four types of host wild cards that can be set for
each host: a single host (name or IP address), netgroups, wild cards
(such as * indicating all machines can access the
server), and IP networks.
This dialog is shown in Figure 14.4, “Exporting Directories with NFSv2 and v3”. Find a more thorough explanation of these options in man exports. Click to complete the configuration.
NFSv3 and NFSv4 exports can coexist on a server. After enabling the
support for NFSv4 in the initial configuration dialog, those exports
for which fsid=0 and
bind=/target/path are not included in the
option list are considered v3 exports. Consider the example in
Figure 14.2, “Configuring an NFS Server with YaST”.
If you add another directory, such as /data2,
using then in the corresponding
options list do not mention either fsid=0 or
bind=/target/path, this export acts as a v3
export.
![]() | |
Automatic Firewall Configuration
If SuSEfirewall2 is active on your system, YaST adapts its
configuration for the NFS server by enabling the
| |
The configuration files for the NFS export service are
/etc/exports and
/etc/sysconfig/nfs. In addition to these files,
/etc/idmapd.conf is needed for the NFSv4 server
configuration. To start or restart the services, run the command
rcnfsserver restart. This also starts the
rpc.idmapd if NFSv4 is configured in
/etc/sysconfig/nfs. The NFS server depends on a
running RPC portmapper. Therefore, also start or restart the portmapper
service with rcrpcbind restart.
NFSv4 is the latest version of NFS protocol available on openSUSE. Configuring directories for export with NFSv4 differs slightly from previous NFS versions.
The /etc/exports file contains a list of entries.
Each entry indicates a directory that is shared and how it is shared.
A typical entry in /etc/exports consists of:
/shared/directory host(option_list)
For example:
/export 192.168.1.2(rw,fsid=0,sync,crossmnt) /export/data 192.168.1.2(rw,bind=/data,sync)
Here the IP address 192.168.1.2 is used to identify
the allowed client. You can also use the name of the host, a wild card
indicating a set of hosts (*.abc.com,
*, etc.), or netgroups
(@my-hosts).
The directory which specifies fsid=0 is special. It
is the root of the filesystem that is exported, sometimes referred to
as the pseudo root filesystem. This directory must also have the
crossmnt for correct operation with NFSv4. All
other directories exported via NFSv4 must be mounted below this point.
If you want to export a directory that is not within the exported
root, it needs to be bound into the exported tree. This can be done
using the bind= syntax.
In the example above, /data is not within
/export, so we export
/export/data, and specify that the
/data directory should be bound to that name. The
directory /export/data must exist and should
normally be empty.
When clients mount from this server, they just mount
servername:/ rather than
servername:/export. It is not necessary to mount
servername:/data, because it will automatically
appear beneath wherever servername:/ was mounted.
The /etc/sysconfig/nfs file contains a few
parameters that determine NFSv4 server daemon behavior. It is
important to set the parameter NFS4_SUPPORT
to yes. NFS4_SUPPORT
determines whether the NFS server supports NFSv4 exports and clients.
Every user on a Linux machine has a name and ID. idmapd does the name-to-ID mapping for NFSv4 requests to the server and replies to the client. It must be running on both server and client for NFSv4, because NFSv4 uses only names for its communication.
Make sure that there is a uniform way in which usernames and IDs (uid) are assigned to users across machines that might probably be sharing file systems using NFS. This can be achieved by using NIS, LDAP, or any uniform domain authentication mechanism in your domain.
The parameter Domain must be set the same for both,
client and server in the /etc/idmapd.conf file.
If you are not sure, leave the domain as
localdomain in the server and client files. A
sample configuration file looks like the following:
[General] Verbosity = 0 Pipefs-Directory = /var/lib/nfs/rpc_pipefs Domain = localdomain [Mapping] Nobody-User = nobody Nobody-Group = nobody
For further reference, read the man page of idmapd
and idmapd.conf; man idmapd,
man idmapd.conf.
After changing /etc/exports or
/etc/sysconfig/nfs, start or restart the NFS
server service with rcnfsserver restart. After
changing /etc/idmapd.conf, reload the
configuration file with the command killall -HUP
rpc.idmapd.
If the NFS service needs to start at boot time, run the command chkconfig nfsserver on.
This section is specific to NFSv3 and NFSv2 exports. Refer to Section 14.3.1.1, “Exporting for NFSv4 Clients” for exporting with NFSv4.
Exporting file systems with NFS involves two configuration files:
/etc/exports and
/etc/sysconfig/nfs. A typical
/etc/exports file entry is in the format:
/shared/directory host(list_of_options)
For example:
/export 192.168.1.2(rw,sync)
Here, the directory /export is shared with the
host 192.168.1.2 with the option list
rw,sync. This IP address can be replaced with
a client name or set of clients using a wild card (such as
*.abc.com) or even netgroups.
For a detailed explanation of all options and their meaning, refer to the man page of exports (man exports).
After changing /etc/exports or
/etc/sysconfig/nfs, start or restart the NFS
server using the command rcnfsserver restart.
To use Kerberos authentication for NFS, GSS security must be enabled. Select in the initial YaST NFS Server dialog. You must have a working Kerberos server to use this feature. YaST does not set up the server but just uses the provided functionality. If you want to use Kerberos authentication in addition to the YaST configuration, complete at least the following steps before running the NFS configuration:
Make sure that both the server and the client are in the same Kerberos
domain. They must access the same KDC (Key Distribution Center) server
and share their krb5.keytab file (the default
location on any machine is /etc/krb5.keytab). For
more information about Kerberos, see Chapter 6, Network Authentication with Kerberos (↑Security Guide).
Start the gssd service on the client with rcgssd start.
Start the svcgssd service on the server with rcsvcgssd start.
For more information about configuring kerberized NFS, refer to the links in Section 14.5, “For More Information”.
To configure your host as an NFS client, you do not need to install additional software. All needed packages are installed by default.
Authorized users can mount NFS directories from an NFS server into the local file tree using the YaST NFS client module. Click on and enter the hostname of the NFS server, the directory to import, and the mount point at which to mount this directory locally. The changes will take effect after clicking in the first dialog.
In the tab, enable to allow access to the service from remote computers.
The firewall status is displayed next to the check box. When using
NFSv4, make sure that the checkbox is
selected and that the contains the
same value as used by the NFSv4 server. The default domain is
localdomain.
Click to save your changes. See Figure 14.5, “NFS Client Configuration with YaST”.
The configuration is written to /etc/fstab and the
specified file systems are mounted. When you start the YaST
configuration client at a later time, it also reads the existing
configuration from this file.
The prerequisite for importing file systems manually from an NFS server
is a running RPC port mapper. Start it by entering rcrpcbind
start as
root. Then remote file systems
can be mounted in the file system like local partitions using
mount:
mounthost:remote-pathlocal-path
To import user directories from the nfs.example.com
machine, for example, use:
mount nfs.example.com:/home /home
The autofs daemon can be used to mount remote file systems
automatically. Add the following entry in the your
/etc/auto.master file:
/nfsmounts /etc/auto.nfs
Now the /nfsmounts directory acts as the root for
all the NFS mounts on the client if the auto.nfs
file is filled appropriately. The name auto.nfs is
chosen for the sake of convenience—you can choose any name. In
auto.nfs add entries for all the NFS mounts as
follows:
localdata -fstype=nfs server1:/data nfs4mount -fstype=nfs4 server2:/
Activate the settings with rcautofs start as
root. In this example, /nfsmounts/localdata,
the /data directory of
server1, is mounted with NFS and
/nfsmounts/nfs4mount from
server2 is mounted with NFSv4.
If the /etc/auto.master file is edited while the
service autofs is running, the automounter must be restarted for the
changes to take effect with rcautofs restart.
/etc/fstab¶
A typical NFSv3 mount entry in /etc/fstab looks
like this:
nfs.example.com:/data /local/path nfs rw,noauto 0 0
NFSv4 mounts may also be added to the /etc/fstab
file. For these mounts, use nfs4 instead of
nfs in the third column and make sure that the
remote file system is given as / after the
nfs.example.com: in the first column. A sample
line for an NFSv4 mount in /etc/fstab looks like
this:
nfs.example.com:/ /local/pathv4 nfs4 rw,noauto 0 0
The noauto option prevents the file system from
being mounted automatically at start up. If you want to mount the
respective file system manually, it is possible to shorten the mount
command specifying the mount point only:
mount /local/path
Note, that if you do not enter the noauto option,
the initialization scripts of the system will handle the mount of those
file systems at start up.
In addition to the man pages of exports,
nfs, and mount, information about
configuring an NFS server and client is available in
/usr/share/doc/packages/nfsidmap/README. For further
documentation online refer to the following Web sites:
Find the detailed technical documentation online at SourceForge.
For instructions for setting up kerberized NFS, refer to NFS Version 4 Open Source Reference Implementation.
If you have questions on NFSv4, refer to the Linux NFSv4 FAQ.
Contents
Abstract
Using Samba, a Unix machine can be configured as a file and print server for Mac OS X, Windows, and OS/2 machines. Samba has developed into a fully-fledged and rather complex product. Configure Samba with YaST, SWAT (a Web interface), or by editing the configuration file manually.
The following are some terms used in Samba documentation and in the YaST module.
Samba uses the SMB (server message block) protocol that is based on the NetBIOS services. Microsoft released the protocol so other software manufacturers could establish connections to a Microsoft domain network. With Samba, the SMB protocol works on top of the TCP/IP protocol, so the TCP/IP protocol must be installed on all clients.
CIFS (common Internet file system) protocol is another protocol supported by Samba. CIFS defines a standard remote file system access protocol for use over the network, enabling groups of users to work together and share documents across the network.
NetBIOS is a software interface (API) designed for communication between machines providing a name service. It enables machines connected to the network to reserve names for themselves. After reservation, these machines can be addressed by name. There is no central process that checks names. Any machine on the network can reserve as many names as it wants as long as the names are not already in use. The NetBIOS interface can be implemented for different network architectures. An implementation that works relatively closely with network hardware is called NetBEUI, but this is often referred to as NetBIOS. Network protocols implemented with NetBIOS are IPX from Novell (NetBIOS via TCP/IP) and TCP/IP.
The NetBIOS names sent via TCP/IP have nothing in common with the
names used in /etc/hosts or those defined by DNS.
NetBIOS uses its own, completely independent naming convention.
However, it is recommended to use names that correspond to DNS
hostnames to make administration easier or use DNS natively. This is
the default used by Samba.
Samba server provides SMB/CIFS services and NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients. For Linux, there are three daemons for Samba server: smbd for SMB/CIFS services, nmbd for naming services, and winbind for authentication.
The Samba client is a system that uses Samba services from a Samba server over the SMB protocol. All common operating systems, such as Mac OS X, Windows, and OS/2, support the SMB protocol. The TCP/IP protocol must be installed on all computers. Samba provides a client for the different UNIX flavors. For Linux, there is a kernel module for SMB that allows the integration of SMB resources on the Linux system level. You do not need to run any daemon for the Samba client.
SMB servers provide resources to the clients by means of shares. Shares are printers and directories with their subdirectories on the server. It is exported by means of a name and can be accessed by its name. The share name can be set to any name—it does not have to be the name of the export directory. A printer is also assigned a name. Clients can access the printer by its name.
A domain controller (DC) is a server that handles accounts in domain. For data replication, additional domain controllers are available in one domain.
To install a Samba server, start YaST and select +. Choose + and select . Confirm the installation of the required packages to finish the installation process.
You can start or stop the Samba server automatically (during boot) or manually. Starting and stopping policy is a part of the YaST Samba server configuration described in Section 15.4.1, “Configuring a Samba Server with YaST”.
To stop or start running Samba services with YaST, use + and check winbind, smb, and nmb. From a command line, stop services required for Samba with rcsmb stop && rcnmb stop and start them with rcnmb start && rcsmb start; rcsmb cares about winbind if needed.
A Samba server in openSUSE® can be configured in two different ways: with YaST or manually. Manual configuration offers a higher level of detail, but lacks the convenience of the YaST GUI.
To configure a Samba server, start YaST and select +.
When starting the module for the first time, the dialog starts, prompting you to make just a few basic decisions concerning administration of the server. At the end of the configuration it prompts for the Samba administrator password (. For later starts, the dialog appears.
The dialog consists of two steps and optional detailed settings:
Select an existing name from or enter a new one and click .
In the next step, specify whether your server should act as a primary domain controller (PDC), backup domain controller (BDC), or not to act as a domain controller at all. Continue with .
Select whether you want to start Samba or and click . Then in the final pop-up box, set the .
You can change all settings later in the dialog with the , , , , and tabs.
During the first start of the Samba server module the dialog appears directly after the two initial steps described in Section 15.4.1.1, “Initial Samba Configuration”. Use it to adjust your Samba server configuration.
After editing your configuration, click to save your settings.
In the tab, configure the start of the Samba server. To start the service every time your system boots, select . To activate manual start, choose . More information about starting a Samba server is provided in Section 15.3, “Starting and Stopping Samba”.
In this tab, you can also open ports in your firewall. To do so, select . If you have multiple network interfaces, select the network interface for Samba services by clicking , selecting the interfaces, and clicking .
In the tab, determine the Samba shares to activate. There are some predefined shares, like homes and printers. Use to switch between and . Click to add new shares and to delete the selected share.
enables
members of the group in to share
directories they own with other users. For example,
users for a local scope or
DOMAIN\Users for a domain scope. The user
also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.
With , limit the total
amount of shares that may be created. To permit access to user shares
without authentication, enable .
In the tab, you can determine the domain with which the host is associated () and whether to use an alternative hostname in the network (). It is also possible to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution. In this case, activate and decide whether to . To set expert global settings or set a user authentication source, click .
To enable users from other domains to access your domain, make the appropriate settings in the tab. To add a new domain, click . To remove the selected domain, click .
In the tab , you can determine the LDAP server to use for authentication. To test the connection to your LDAP server, click . To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click .
For more information about LDAP configuration, see Chapter 4, LDAP—A Directory Service (↑Security Guide).
An alternative tool for Samba server administration is SWAT
(Samba Web Administration Tool). It provides a simple Web interface with
which to configure the Samba server. To use SWAT, open
http://localhost:901 in a Web browser and log in as user
root. If you do not have a
special Samba root account, use the system
root account.
![]() | Activating SWAT |
|---|---|
After Samba server installation, SWAT is not activated. To activate it, open + in YaST, enable the network services configuration, select from the table, and click . | |
If you intend to use Samba as a server, install
samba. The main
configuration file of Samba is /etc/samba/smb.conf.
This file can be divided into two logical parts. The
[global] section contains the central and global
settings. The [share] sections contain the individual
file and printer shares. By means of this approach, details regarding
the shares can be set differently or globally in the
[global] section, which enhances the structural
transparency of the configuration file.
The following parameters of the [global] section
need some adjustment to match the requirements of your network setup so
other machines can access your Samba server via SMB in a Windows
environment.
workgroup = TUX-NET
This line assigns the Samba server to a workgroup. Replace
TUX-NET with an appropriate workgroup of your
networking environment. Your Samba server appears under its DNS name
unless this name has been assigned to some other machine in the
network. If the DNS name is not available, set the server name using
netbiosname=.
For more details about this parameter, see the
MYNAMEsmb.conf man page.
os level = 20
This parameter triggers whether your Samba server tries to become
LMB (local master browser) for its workgroup. With the Samba 3
release series, it is seldom necessary to override the default
setting (20). Choose a very low value such as
2 to spare the existing Windows network from any
disturbances caused by a misconfigured Samba server. More
information about this important topic can be found in the Network
Browsing chapter of the Samba 3 Howto; for more information on the
Samba 3 Howto, see Section 15.7, “For More Information”.
If no other SMB server is present in your network (such as a Windows
2000 server) and you want the Samba server to keep a list of all
systems present in the local environment, set the os
level to a higher value (for example,
65). Your Samba server is then chosen as LMB for
your local network.
When changing this setting, consider carefully how this could affect an existing Windows network environment. First test the changes in an isolated network or at a noncritical time of day.
wins support and wins server
To integrate your Samba server into an existing Windows network with
an active WINS server, enable the wins server
option and set its value to the IP address of that WINS server.
If your Windows machines are connected to separate subnets and need
to still be aware of each other, you need to set up a WINS server.
To turn a Samba server into such a WINS server, set the option
wins support = Yes. Make sure that only one Samba
server of the network has this setting enabled. The options
wins server and wins support
must never be enabled at the same time in your
smb.conf file.
The following examples illustrate how a CD-ROM drive and the user
directories (homes) are made available to the SMB
clients.
To avoid having the CD-ROM drive accidentally made available, these lines are deactivated with comment marks (semicolons in this case). Remove the semicolons in the first column to share the CD-ROM drive with Samba.
Example 15.1. A CD-ROM Share (deactivated)¶
;[cdrom] ; comment = Linux CD-ROM ; path = /media/cdrom ; locking = No
[cdrom] and comment
The [cdrom] section entry is the name of the
share that can be seen by all SMB clients on the network. An
additional comment can be added to further
describe the share.
path = /media/cdrom
path exports the directory
/media/cdrom.
By means of a very restrictive default configuration, this kind of
share is only made available to the users present on this system. If
this share should be made available to everybody, add a line
guest ok = yes to the configuration. This setting
gives read permissions to anyone on the network. It is recommended
to handle this parameter with great care. This applies even more to
the use of this parameter in the [global]
section.
[homes]
The [homes] share is of special importance here. If
the user has a valid account and password for the Linux file server
and his own home directory, he can be connected to it.
Example 15.2. [homes] Share¶
[homes] comment = Home Directories valid users = %S browseable = No read only = No create mask = 0640 directory mask = 0750
As long as there is no other share using the share name of the
user connecting to the SMB server, a share is dynamically
generated using the [homes] share directives.
The resulting name of the share is the username.
valid users = %S
%S is replaced with the concrete name of the
share as soon as a connection has been successfully established.
For a [homes] share, this is always the
username. As a consequence, access rights to a user's share are
restricted exclusively to that user.
browseable = No
This setting makes the share invisible in the network environment.
read only = No
By default, Samba prohibits write access to any exported share by
means of the read only = Yes parameter. To
make a share writable, set the value read only =
No, which is synonymous with writable =
Yes.
create mask = 0640
Systems that are not based on MS Windows NT do not understand the
concept of UNIX permissions, so they cannot assign permissions
when creating a file. The parameter create
mask defines the access permissions assigned to newly
created files. This only applies to writable shares. In effect,
this setting means the owner has read and write permissions and
the members of the owner's primary group have read permissions.
valid users = %S prevents read access even if
the group has read permissions. For the group to have read or
write access, deactivate the line valid users =
%S.
To improve security, each share access can be protected with a password. SMB offers the following ways of checking permissions:
security = share)A password is firmly assigned to a share. Everyone who knows this password has access to that share.
security = user)This variant introduces the concept of the user to SMB. Each user must register with the server with his or her own password. After registration, the server can grant access to individual exported shares dependent on usernames.
security = server)
To its clients, Samba pretends to be working in user level mode.
However, it passes all password queries to another user level mode
server, which takes care of authentication. This setting requires
the additional password server parameter.
security = ADS)In this mode, Samba will act as a domain member in an Active Directory environment. To operate in this mode, the machine running Samba needs Kerberos installed and configured. You must join the machine using Samba to the ADS realm. This can be done using the YaST module.
security = domain)
This mode will only work correctly if the machine has been joined
into a Windows NT Domain. Samba will try to validate username and
password by passing it to a Windows NT Primary or Backup Domain
Controller. The same way as a Windows NT Server would do. It expects
the encrypted passwords parameter to be set to
yes.
The selection of share, user, server, or domain level security applies to the entire server. It is not possible to offer individual shares of a server configuration with share level security and others with user level security. However, you can run a separate Samba server for each configured IP address on a system.
More information about this subject can be found in the Samba 3 HOWTO.
For multiple servers on one system, pay attention to the options
interfaces and bind interfaces only.
Clients can only access the Samba server via TCP/IP. NetBEUI and NetBIOS via IPX cannot be used with Samba.
Configure a Samba client to access resources (files or printers) on the Samba or Windows server. Enter the NT or Active Directory domain or workgroup in the dialog +. If you activate , the user authentication runs over the Samba, NT or Kerberos server.
Click for advanced configuration
options. For example, use the table to enable mounting server home directory
automatically with authentication. This way users will be able to access
their home directories when hosted on CIFS. For details, see the the
pam_mount man page.
After completing all settings, confirm the dialog to finish the configuration.
In networks where predominantly Windows clients are found, it is often
preferable that users may only register with a valid account and
password. In a Windows-based network, this task is handled by a primary
domain controller (PDC). You can use a Windows NT server configured as
PDC, but this task can also be done with a Samba server. The entries that
must be made in the [global] section of
smb.conf are shown in
Example 15.3, “Global Section in smb.conf”.
Example 15.3. Global Section in smb.conf¶
[global]
workgroup = TUX-NET
domain logons = Yes
domain master = Yes
If encrypted passwords are used for verification purposes the Samba
server must be able to handle these. The entry encrypt passwords
= yes in the [global] section enables this
(with Samba version 3, this is now the default). In addition, it is
necessary to prepare user accounts and passwords in an encryption format
that conforms with Windows. Do this with the command smbpasswd
-a name. Create the domain account for the
computers, required by the Windows domain concept, with the following
commands:
useradd hostname\$ smbpasswd -a -m hostname
With the useradd command, a dollar sign is added. The
command smbpasswd inserts this automatically when the
parameter -m is used. The commented configuration
example
(/usr/share/doc/packages/samba/examples/smb.conf.SUSE)
contains settings that automate this task.
add machine script = /usr/sbin/useradd -g nogroup -c "NT Machine Account" \
-s /bin/false %m\$
To make sure that Samba can execute this script correctly, choose a Samba
user with the required administrator permissions and add it to the
ntadmin group. Then all users
belonging to this Linux group can be assigned Domain
Admin status with the command:
net groupmap add ntgroup="Domain Admins" unixgroup=ntadmin
For more information about this topic, see Chapter 12 of the Samba 3
HOWTO, found in
/usr/share/doc/packages/samba/Samba3-HOWTO.pdf.
Detailed Samba information is available in the digital documentation.
Enter apropos samba at the command
line to display some manual pages or just browse the
/usr/share/doc/packages/samba directory if Samba
documentation is installed for more online documentation and examples.
Find a commented example configuration
(smb.conf.SUSE) in the examples
subdirectory.
The Samba 3 HOWTO provided by the Samba team includes a section about
troubleshooting. In addition to that, Part V of the document provides a
step-by-step guide to checking your configuration. You can find Samba 3
HOWTO in
/usr/share/doc/packages/samba/Samba3-HOWTO.pdf after
installing the package samba-doc.
Also read the Samba page in the openSUSE wiki at http://en.openSUSE.org/Samba.
Contents
Abstract
With a share of more than 50%, the Apache HTTP Server (Apache) is the world's most widely-used Web server according to the survey from http://www.netcraft.com/. Apache, developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/), is available for most operating systems. openSUSE® includes Apache version 2.2. In this chapter, learn how to install, configure and set up a Web server; how to use SSL, CGI, and additional modules; and how to troubleshoot Apache.
With the help of this section, quickly set up and start Apache. You must
be root to install and configure Apache.
Make sure the following requirements are met before trying to set up the Apache Web server:
The machine's network is configured properly. For more information about this topic, refer to Chapter 9, Basic Networking.
The machine's exact system time is maintained by synchronizing with a time server. This is necessary because parts of the HTTP protocol depend on the correct time. See Chapter 13, Time Synchronization with NTP to learn more about this topic.
The latest security updates are installed. If in doubt, run a YaST Online Update.
The default Web server port (80) is opened in the
firewall. For this, configure the SuSEFirewall2 to allow the service
in the external zone. This can be done
using YaST. See
Section “Configuring the Firewall with YaST” (Chapter 13, Masquerading and Firewalls, ↑Security Guide) for details.
Apache on openSUSE is not installed by default. To install it with a standard, predefined configuration that runs “out of the box”, proceed as follows:
Procedure 16.1. Installing Apache with the Default Configuration
Start YaST and select +.
Choose + and select int .
Confirm the installation of the dependent packages to finish the installation process.
The installation includes the multiprocessing module
apache2-prefork as well as the PHP5 module.
Refer to Section 16.4, “Installing, Activating, and Configuring Modules” for more information
about modules.
You can start Apache automatically at boot time or start it manually.
Procedure 16.2. Starting Apache Automatically
To make sure that Apache is automatically started during boot in
runlevels 3 and 5, execute the
following command:
chkconfig -a apache2
Alternatively, start YaST and select +.
Search for apache2 and the service.
The Web server starts immediately.
Save your changes with .
The system is configured to automatically start Apache in runlevels
3 and 5 during boot.
To manually start Apache using the shell, run rcapache2 start.
Procedure 16.3. Checking if Apache is Running
If you do not receive error messages when starting Apache, this usually indicates that the Web server is running. To test this:
Start a browser and open http://localhost/.
If Apache is up and running, you get a test page stating “It works!”.
If you do not see this page, refer to Section 16.8, “Troubleshooting”.
Now that the Web server is running, you can add your own documents, adjust the configuration according to your needs, or add functionality by installing modules.
openSUSE offers two configuration options:
Manual configuration offers a higher level of detail, but lacks the convenience of the YaST GUI.
![]() | Reload or Restart Apache after Configuration Changes |
|---|---|
Most configuration changes require a reload (some also a restart) of
Apache to take effect. Manually reload Apache with
rcapache2 If you configure Apache with YaST, this can be taken care of automatically if you set to as described in Section 16.2.3.2, “HTTP Server Configuration”. | |
This section gives an overview of the Apache configuration files. If you use YaST for configuration, you do not need to touch these files—however, the information might be useful for you if you want to switch to manual configuration later on.
Apache configuration files can be found in two different locations:
/etc/sysconfig/apache2¶
/etc/sysconfig/apache2 controls some global
settings of Apache, like modules to load, additional configuration
files to include, flags with which the server should be started, and
flags that should be added to the command line. Every configuration
option in this file is extensively documented and therefore not
mentioned here. For a general-purpose Web server, the settings in
/etc/sysconfig/apache2 should be sufficient for
any configuration needs.
/etc/apache2/¶
/etc/apache2/ hosts all configuration files for
Apache. In the following, the purpose of each file is explained. Each
file includes several configuration options (also referred to as
directives). Every configuration option in these
files is extensively documented and therefore not mentioned here.
The Apache configuration files are organized as follows:
/etc/apache2/
|
|- charset.conv
|- conf.d/
| |
| |- *.conf
|
|- default-server.conf
|- errors.conf
|- httpd.conf
|- listen.conf
|- magic
|- mime.types
|- mod_*.conf
|- server-tuning.conf
|- ssl.*
|- ssl-global.conf
|- sysconfig.d
| |
| |- global.conf
| |- include.conf
| |- loadmodule.conf . .
|
|- uid.conf
|- vhosts.d
| |- *.confApache Configuration Files in /etc/apache2/
charset.conv
Specifies which character sets to use for different languages. Do not edit this file.
conf.d/*.conf
Configuration files added by other modules. These configuration
files can be included into your virtual host configuration where
needed. See vhosts.d/vhost.template for
examples. By doing so, you can provide different module sets for
different virtual hosts.
default-server.conf
Global configuration for all virtual hosts with reasonable defaults. Instead of changing the values, overwrite them with a virtual host configuration.
errors.conf
Defines how Apache responds to errors. To customize these messages for all virtual hosts, edit this file. Otherwise overwrite these directives in your virtual host configurations.
httpd.conf
The main Apache server configuration file. Avoid changing this file. It primarily contains include statements and global settings. Overwrite global settings in the pertinent configuration files listed here. Change host-specific settings (such as document root) in your virtual host configuration.
listen.conf
Binds Apache to specific IP addresses and ports. Name-based virtual hosting is also configured here. For details, see Section 16.2.2.1.1, “Name-Based Virtual Hosts”.
magic
Data for the mime_magic module that helps Apache automatically determine the MIME type of an unknown file. Do not change this file.
mime.types
MIME types known by the system (this actually is a link to
/etc/mime.types). Do not edit this file. If you
need to add MIME types not listed here, add them to
mod_mime-defaults.conf.
mod_*.conf
Configuration files for the modules that are installed by default.
Refer to Section 16.4, “Installing, Activating, and Configuring Modules” for details.
Note that configuration files for optional modules reside in the
directory conf.d.
server-tuning.conf
Contains configuration directives for the different MPMs (see Section 16.4.4, “Multiprocessing Modules”) as well as general configuration options that control Apache's performance. Properly test your Web server when making changes here.
ssl-global.conf and ssl.*
Global SSL configuration and SSL certificate data. Refer to Section 16.6, “Setting Up a Secure Web Server with SSL” for details.
sysconfig.d/*.conf
Configuration files automatically generated from
/etc/sysconfig/apache2. Do not change any of
these files—edit /etc/sysconfig/apache2
instead. Do not put other configuration files in this directory.
uid.conf
Specifies under which user and group ID Apache runs. Do not change this file.
vhosts.d/*.conf
Your virtual host configuration should be located here. The
directory contains template files for virtual hosts with and without
SSL. Every file in this directory ending with
.conf is automatically included in the Apache
configuration. Refer to
Section 16.2.2.1, “Virtual Host Configuration” for
details.
Configuring Apache manually involves editing plain text configuration
files as user root.
The term virtual host refers to Apache's ability to serve multiple universal resource identifiers (URIs) from the same physical machine. This means that several domains, such as www.example.com and www.example.net, are run by a single Web server on one physical machine.
It is common practice to use virtual hosts to save administrative effort (only a single Web server needs to be maintained) and hardware expenses (each domain does not require a dedicated server). Virtual hosts can be name based, IP based, or port based.
To list all existing virtual hosts, use the command httpd2
-S. This outputs a list showing the default
server and all virtual hosts together with their IP addresses and
listening ports. Furthermore, the list also contains an entry for each
virtual host showing its location in the configuration files.
Virtual hosts can be configured via YaST as described in
Section 16.2.3.1.4, “Virtual Hosts”
or by manually editing a configuration file. By default, Apache in
openSUSE is prepared for one configuration file per virtual host
in /etc/apache2/vhosts.d/. All files in this
directory with the extension .conf are
automatically included to the configuration. A basic template for a
virtual host is provided in this directory
(vhost.template or
vhost-ssl.template for a virtual host with SSL
support).
![]() | Always Create a Virtual Host Configuration |
|---|---|
It is recommended to always create a virtual host configuration file, even if your Web server only hosts one domain. By doing so, you not only have the domain-specific configuration in one file, but you can always fall back to a working basic configuration by simply moving, deleting, or renaming the configuration file for the virtual host. For the same reason, you should also create separate configuration files for each virtual host.
When using name-based virtual hosts it is recommended to set up a
default configuration that will be used when a domain name does not
match a virtual host configuration. The default virtual host is the
one whose configuration is loaded first. Since the order of the
configuration files is determined by filename, start the filename of
the default virtual host configuration with an underscore character
( | |
The
<VirtualHost></VirtualHost>
block holds the information that applies to a particular domain. When
Apache receives a client request for a defined virtual host, it uses
the directives enclosed in this section. Almost all directives can be
used in a virtual host context. See
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/quickreference.html
for further information about Apache's configuration directives.
With name-based virtual hosts, more than one Web site is served per IP
address. Apache uses the host field in the HTTP header that is sent by
the client to connect the request to a matching
ServerName entry of one of the virtual host
declarations. If no matching ServerName is
found, the first specified virtual host is used as a default.
The directive NameVirtualHost tells Apache on
which IP address and, optionally, which port it should listen to for
requests by clients containing the domain name in the HTTP header.
This option is configured in the configuration file
/etc/apache2/listen.conf.
The first argument can be a fully qualified domain name, but it is
recommended to use the IP address. The second argument is the port and
is optional. By default, port 80 is used and
is configured via the Listen directive.
The wild card * can be used for both the IP address
and the port number to receive requests on all interfaces. IPv6
addresses must be enclosed in square brackets.
Example 16.1. Variations of Name-Based VirtualHost Entries¶
# NameVirtualHostIP-address[:Port]NameVirtualHost 192.168.3.100:80 NameVirtualHost 192.168.3.100 NameVirtualHost *:80 NameVirtualHost * NameVirtualHost [2002:c0a8:364::]:80
The opening VirtualHost tag takes the IP
address (or fully qualified domain name) previously declared with the
NameVirtualHost as an argument in a
name-based virtual host configuration. A port number previously
declared with the NameVirtualHost directive
is optional.
The wild card * is also allowed as a substitute
for the IP address. This syntax is only valid in combination with the
wild card usage in NameVirtualHost * . When
using IPv6 addresses, the address must be included in square brackets.
Example 16.2. Name-Based VirtualHost Directives¶
<VirtualHost 192.168.3.100:80> ... </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost 192.168.3.100> ... </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *:80> ... </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost *> ... </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost [2002:c0a8:364::]> ... </VirtualHost>
This alternative virtual host configuration requires the setup of multiple IPs for a machine. One instance of Apache hosts several domains, each of which is assigned a different IP.
The physical server must have one IP address for each IP-based virtual host. If the machine does not have multiple network cards, virtual network interfaces (IP aliasing) can also be used.
The following example shows Apache running on a machine with the IP
192.168.3.100, hosting two
domains on the additional IPs
192.168.3.101 and
192.168.3.102. A separate
VirtualHost block is needed for every virtual
server.
Example 16.3. IP-Based VirtualHost Directives¶
<VirtualHost 192.168.3.101> ... </VirtualHost> <VirtualHost 192.168.3.102> ... </VirtualHost>
Here, VirtualHost directives are only
specified for interfaces other than 192.168.3.100.
When a Listen directive is also configured
for 192.168.3.100, a separate IP-based virtual host
must be created to answer HTTP requests to that
interface—otherwise the directives found in the default server
configuration (/etc/apache2/default-server.conf)
are applied.
At least the following directives should be present in each virtual
host configuration in order to set up a virtual host. See
/etc/apache2/vhosts.d/vhost.template for more
options.
ServerName
The fully qualified domain name under which the host should be addressed.
DocumentRoot
Path to the directory from which Apache should serve files for this
host. For security reasons, access to the entire file system is
forbidden by default, so you must explicitly unlock this directory
within a Directory container.
ServerAdmin
E-mail address of the server administrator. This address is, for example, shown on error pages Apache creates.
ErrorLog
The error log file for this virtual host. Although it is not
necessary to create separate error log files for each virtual host,
it is common practice to do so, because it makes the debugging of
errors much easier. /var/log/apache2/ is the
default directory for Apache's log files.
CustomLog
The access log file for this virtual host. Although it is not
necessary to create separate access log files for each virtual
host, it is common practice to do so, because it allows the
separate analysis of access statistics for each host.
/var/log/apache2/ is the default directory for
Apache's log files.
As mentioned above, access to the whole file system is forbidden by
default for security reasons. Therefore, explicitly unlock the
directories in which you have placed the files Apache should
serve—for example the DocumentRoot:
<Directory "/srv/www/www.example.com/htdocs"> Order allow,deny Allow from all </Directory>
The complete configuration file looks like this:
Example 16.4. Basic VirtualHost Configuration¶
<VirtualHost 192.168.3.100>
ServerName www.example.com
DocumentRoot /srv/www/www.example.com/htdocs
ServerAdmin webmaster@example.com
ErrorLog /var/log/apache2/www.example.com_log
CustomLog /var/log/apache2/www.example.com-access_log common
<Directory "/srv/www/www.example.com/htdocs">
Order allow,deny
Allow from all
</Directory>
</VirtualHost>To configure your Web server with YaST, start YaST and select +. When starting the module for the first time, the starts, prompting you to make a few basic decisions concerning administration of the server. After having finished the wizard, the dialog starts each time you call the module. For more information, see Section 16.2.3.2, “HTTP Server Configuration”.
The HTTP Server Wizard consists of five steps. In the last step of the dialog, you are given the opportunity to enter the expert configuration mode to make even more specific settings.
Here, specify the network interfaces and ports Apache uses to listen for
incoming requests. You can select any combination of existing network
interfaces and their respective IP addresses. Ports from all three
ranges (well-known ports, registered ports, and dynamic or private
ports) that are not reserved by other services can be used. The default
setting is to listen on all network interfaces (IP addresses) on port
80.
Check to open the ports in the firewall that the Web server listens on. This is necessary to make the Web server available on the network, which can be a LAN, WAN, or the public Internet. Keeping the port closed is only useful in test situations where no external access to the Web server is necessary. If you have multiple network interfaces, click to specify on which interface(s) the port(s) should be opened.
Click to continue with the configuration.
The configuration option allows for the activation or deactivation of the script languages that the Web server should support. For the activation or deactivation of other modules, refer to Section 16.2.3.2.2, “Server Modules”. Click to advance to the next dialog.
This option pertains to the default Web server. As explained in Section 16.2.2.1, “Virtual Host Configuration”, Apache can serve multiple virtual hosts from a single physical machine. The first declared virtual host in the configuration file is commonly referred to as the default host. Each virtual host inherits the default host's configuration.
To edit the host settings (also called directives), choose the appropriate entry in the table then click . To add new directives, click . To delete a directive, select it and click .
Here is list of the default settings of the server:
Document Root
Path to the directory from which Apache serves files for this host.
/srv/www/htdocs is the default location.
Alias
With the help of Alias directives, URLs can
be mapped to physical file system locations. This means that a
certain path even outside the Document Root in the
file system can be accessed via a URL aliasing that path.
The default openSUSE Alias
/icons points to
/usr/share/apache2/icons for the Apache icons
displayed in the directory index view.
ScriptAlias
Similar to the Alias directive, the
ScriptAlias directive maps a URL to a file
system location. The difference is that
ScriptAlias designates the target directory
as a CGI location, meaning that CGI scripts should be executed in
that location.
Directory
With Directory settings, you can enclose a
group of configuration options that will only apply to the specified
directory.
Access and display options for the directories
/srv/www/htdocs,
/usr/share/apache2/icons and
/srv/www/cgi-bin are configured here. It should
not be necessary to change the defaults.
Include
With include, additional configuration files can be specified. Two
Include directives are already
preconfigured: /etc/apache2/conf.d/ is the
directory containing the configuration files that come with external
modules. With this directive, all files in this directory ending in
.conf are included. With the second directive,
/etc/apache2/conf.d/apache2-manual.conf, the
apache2-manual configuration file is included.
Server Name
This specifies the default URL used by clients to contact the Web
server. Use a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) to reach the Web
server at http://
or its IP address. You cannot choose an arbitrary name here—the
server must be “known” under this name.
FQDN/
Server Administrator E-Mail
E-mail address of the server administrator. This address is, for example, shown on error pages Apache creates.
After finishing with the step, click to continue with the configuration.
In this step, the wizard displays a list of already configured virtual hosts (see Section 16.2.2.1, “Virtual Host Configuration”). If you have not made manual changes prior to starting the YaST HTTP wizard, no virtual host is present.
To add a host, click to open a dialog in which to
enter basic information about the host, such as ,
(DocumentRoot), and the . is used to
determine how a host is identified (name based or IP based). Specify the
name or IP address with
Clicking advances to the second part of the virtual host configuration dialog.
In part two of the virtual host configuration you can specify whether or
not to enable CGI scripts and which directory to use for these scripts.
It is also possible to enable SSL. If you do so, you must specify the
path to the certificate as well. See
Section 16.6.2, “Configuring Apache with SSL” for details on SSL and
certificates. With the option, you
can specify which file to display when the client requests a directory
(by default, index.html). Add one or more filenames
(space-separated) if you want to change this. With , the content of the users public directories
(~) is
made available on the server under
user/public_html/http://www.example.com/~.
user
![]() | Creating Virtual Hosts |
|---|---|
It is not possible to add virtual hosts at will. If using name-based virtual hosts, each hostname must be resolved on the network. If using IP-based virtual hosts, you can assign only one host to each IP address available. | |
This is the final step of the wizard. Here, determine how and when the Apache server is started: when booting or manually. Also see a short summary of the configuration made so far. If you are satisfied with your settings, click to complete configuration. If you want to change something, click until you have reached the desired dialog. Clicking opens the dialog described in Section 16.2.3.2, “HTTP Server Configuration”.
The dialog also lets you make even more adjustments to the configuration than the wizard (which only runs if you configure your Web server for the first time). It consists of four tabs described in the following. No configuration option you change here is effective immediately—you always must confirm your changes with to make them effective. Clicking leaves the configuration module and discards your changes.
In , select whether Apache should be
running () or stopped
(). In ,
, , or
addresses and ports on which the server should
be available. The default is to listen on all interfaces on port
80. You should always check , because otherwise the Web server is not reachable
from outside. Keeping the port closed is only useful in test situations
where no external access to the Web server is necessary. If you have
multiple network interfaces, click to specify on which interface(s) the port(s) should
be opened.
With , watch either the access log or the error log. This is useful if you want to test your configuration. The log file opens in a separate window from which you can also restart or reload the Web server. For details, see Section 16.3, “Starting and Stopping Apache”. These commands are effective immediately and their log messages are also displayed immediately.
You can change the status (enabled or disabled) of Apache2 modules by clicking . Click to add a new module that is already installed but not yet listed. Learn more about modules in Section 16.4, “Installing, Activating, and Configuring Modules”.
These dialogs are identical to the ones already described. Refer to Section 16.2.3.1.3, “Default Host” and Section 16.2.3.1.4, “Virtual Hosts”.
If configured with YaST as described in Section 16.2.3, “Configuring Apache with YaST”, Apache is started at boot time in runlevels 3 and 5 and stopped in runlevels 0, 1, 2, and 6. You can change this behavior using YaST's runlevel editor or the command line tool chkconfig.
To start, stop, or manipulate Apache on a running system, use the init script /usr/sbin/rcapache2. The rcapache2 command takes the following parameters:
status
Checks if Apache is started.
start
Starts Apache if it is not already running.
startssl
Starts Apache with SSL support if it is not already running. For more information about SSL support, refer to Section 16.6, “Setting Up a Secure Web Server with SSL”.
stop
Stops Apache by terminating the parent process.
restart
Stops and then restarts Apache. Starts the Web server if it was not running before.
try-restart
Stops then restarts Apache only if it is already running.
reload or graceful
Stops the Web server by advising all forked Apache processes to first finish their requests before shutting down. As each process dies, it is replaced by a newly started one, resulting in a complete “restart” of Apache.
![]() | Restarting Apache in Production Environments |
|---|---|
To activate changes in the Apache configuration without causing
connection break-offs, use the
rcapache2 | |
restart-graceful
Starts a second Web server that immediately serves all incoming
requests. The previous instance of the Web server continues to handle
all existing requests for a defined period of time configured with
GracefulShutdownTimeout.
rcapache2 restart-graceful is
either useful when upgrading to a new version or when having changed
configuration options that require a restart. Using this option
ensures a minimum server downtime.
GracefulShutdownTimeout needs to be set,
otherwise restart-graceful will result in a regular
restart. If set to zero, the server will wait indefinitely until all
remaining requests have been fully served.
A graceful restart can fail if the original Apache instance is not able to clear all necessary resources. In this case, the command will result in a graceful stop.
stop-graceful
Stops the Web server after a defined period of time configured with
GracefulShutdownTimeout in order to ensure
that existing requests can be finished.
GracefulShutdownTimeout needs to be set,
otherwise stop-graceful will result in a regular
restart. If set to zero, the server will wait indefinitely until all
remaining requests have been fully served.
configtest or extreme-configtest
Checks the syntax of the configuration files without affecting a
running Web server. Because this check is forced every time the server
is started, reloaded, or restarted, it is usually not necessary to run
the test explicitly (if a configuration error is found, the Web server
is not started, reloaded, or restarted). The
extreme-configtest options start the Web server as
user nobody and actually
load the configuration, so more errors can be detected. Note that
although the configuration is loaded, it is not possible to test the
SSL setup because the SSL certificates cannot be read by
nobody.
probe
Probes for the necessity of a reload (checks whether the configuration has changed) and suggests the required arguments for the rcapache2 command.
server-status and full-server-status
Dumps a short or full status screen, respectively. Requires either
lynx or w3m installed as well as the module
mod_status enabled. In addition to that,
status must be added to
APACHE_SERVER_FLAGS in the file
/etc/sysconfig/apache2.
![]() | Additional Flags |
|---|---|
If you specify additional flags to the rcapache2, these are passed through to the Web server. | |
The Apache software is built in a modular fashion: all functionality except some core tasks are handled by modules. This has progressed so far that even HTTP is processed by a module (http_core).
Apache modules can be compiled into the Apache binary at build time or dynamically loaded at runtime. Refer to Section 16.4.2, “Activation and Deactivation” for details of how to load modules dynamically.
Apache modules can be divided into four different categories:
Base modules are compiled into Apache by default. Apache in
openSUSE has only mod_so (needed to load
other modules) and http_core compiled in. All
others are available as shared objects: rather than being included in
the server binary itself, they can be included at runtime.
In general, modules labeled as extensions are included in the Apache software package, but are usually not compiled into the server statically. In openSUSE, they are available as shared objects that can be loaded into Apache at runtime.
Modules labeled external are not included in the official Apache distribution. However, openSUSE provides several of them.
MPMs are responsible for accepting and handling requests to the Web server, representing the core of the Web server software.
If you have done a default installation as described in
Section 16.1.2, “Installation”, the following
modules are already installed: all base and extension modules, the
multiprocessing module Prefork MPM, and the external modules
mod_php5 and
mod_python.
You can install additional external modules by starting YaST and choosing +. Now choose + and search for apache. Among other packages, the results list contains all available external Apache modules.
Activate or deactivate particular modules either manually or with YaST. In YaST, script language modules (PHP5, Perl, and Python) need to be enabled or disabled with the module configuration described in Section 16.2.3.1, “HTTP Server Wizard”. All other modules can be enabled or disabled as described in Section 16.2.3.2.2, “Server Modules”.
If you prefer to activate or deactivate the modules manually, use the
commands a2enmod mod_foo
or a2dismod mod_foo,
respectively. a2enmod -l outputs a list of all
currently active modules.
![]() | Including Configuration Files for External Modules |
|---|---|
If you have activated external modules manually, make sure to load
their configuration files in all virtual host configurations.
Configuration files for external modules are located under
| |
All base and extension modules are described in detail in the Apache documentation. Only a brief description of the most important modules is available here. Refer to http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/mod/ to learn details about each module.
mod_actions
Provides methods to execute a script whenever a certain MIME type
(such as application/pdf), a file with a
specific extension (like .rpm), or a certain
request method (such as GET) is requested.
This module is enabled by default.
mod_alias
Provides Alias and
Redirect directives with which you can map a
URl to a specific directory (Alias) or
redirect a requested URL to another location. This module is enabled
by default.
mod_auth*
The authentication modules provide different authentication methods:
basic authentication with mod_auth_basic or
digest authentication with mod_auth_digest.
Digest authentication in Apache 2.2 is considered experimental.
mod_auth_basic and
mod_auth_digest must be combined with an
authentication provider module, mod_authn_*
(for example, mod_authn_file for text
file–based authentication) and with an authorization module
mod_authz_* (for example,
mod_authz_user for user authorization).
More information about this topic is available in the Authentication HOWTO at http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/howto/auth.html.
mod_autoindex
Autoindex generates directory listings when no index file (for
example, index.html) is present. The look and
feel of these indexes is configurable. This module is enabled by
default. However, directory listings are disabled by default via the
Options directive—overwrite this
setting in your virtual host configuration. The default configuration
file for this module is located at
/etc/apache2/mod_autoindex-defaults.conf.
mod_cgi
mod_cgi is needed to execute CGI scripts.
This module is enabled by default.
mod_deflate
Using this module, Apache can be configured to compress given file types on the fly before delivering them.
mod_dir
mod_dir provides the
DirectoryIndex directive with which you can
configure which files are automatically delivered when a directory is
requested (index.html by default). It also
provides an automatic redirect to the correct URL when a directory
request does not contain a trailing slash. This module is enabled by
default.
mod_env
Controls the environment that is passed to CGI scripts or SSI pages. Environment variables can be set or unset or passed from the shell that invoked the httpd process. This module is enabled by default.
mod_expires
With mod_expires, you can control how often
proxy and browser caches refresh your documents by sending an
Expires header. This module is enabled by
default.
mod_include
mod_include lets you use Server Side
Includes (SSI), which provide a basic functionality to generate HTML
pages dynamically. This module is enabled by default.
mod_info
Provides a comprehensive overview of the server configuration under
http://localhost/server-info/. For security reasons, you should
always limit access to this URL. By default only
localhost is allowed to
access this URL. mod_info is configured at
/etc/apache2/mod_info.conf.
mod_log_config
With this module, you can configure the look of the Apache log files. This module is enabled by default.
mod_mime
The mime module makes certain that a file is delivered with the
correct MIME header based on the filename's extension (for example
text/html for HTML documents). This module
is enabled by default.
mod_negotiation
Necessary for content negotiation. See http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/content-negotiation.html for more information. This module is enabled by default.
mod_rewrite
Provides the functionality of mod_alias, but
offers more features and flexibility. With
mod_rewrite, you can redirect URLs based on
multiple rules, request headers, and more.
mod_setenvif
Sets environment variables based on details of the client's request, such as the browser string the client sends, or the client's IP address. This module is enabled by default.
mod_speling
mod_speling attempts to automatically
correct typographical errors in URLs, such as capitalization errors.
mod_ssl
Enables encrypted connections between Web server and clients. See Section 16.6, “Setting Up a Secure Web Server with SSL” for details. This module is enabled by default.
mod_status
Provides information on server activity and performance under
http://localhost/server-status/. For security reasons, you should
always limit access to this URL. By default, only
localhost is allowed to
access this URL. mod_status is configured at
/etc/apache2/mod_status.conf
mod_suexec
mod_suexec lets you run CGI scripts under a
different user and group. This module is enabled by default.
mod_userdir
Enables user-specific directories available under
~. The
user/UserDir directive must be specified in the
configuration. This module is enabled by default.
openSUSE provides two different multiprocessing modules (MPMs) for use with Apache:
The prefork MPM implements a nonthreaded, preforking Web server. It makes the Web server behave similarly to Apache version 1.x. In this version it isolates each request and handles it by forking a separate child process. Thus problematic requests cannot affect others, avoiding a lockup of the Web server.
While providing stability with this process-based approach, the prefork MPM consumes more system resources than its counterpart, the worker MPM. The prefork MPM is considered the default MPM for Unix-based operating systems.
![]() | MPMs in This Document |
|---|---|
This document assumes Apache is used with the prefork MPM. | |
The worker MPM provides a multi-threaded Web server. A thread is a “lighter” form of a process. The advantage of a thread over a process is its lower resource consumption. Instead of only forking child processes, the worker MPM serves requests by using threads with server processes. The preforked child processes are multi-threaded. This approach makes Apache perform better by consuming fewer system resources than the prefork MPM.
One major disadvantage is the stability of the worker MPM: if a thread becomes corrupt, all threads of a process can be affected. In the worst case, this may result in a server crash. Especially when using the Common Gateway Interface (CGI) with Apache under heavy load, internal server errors might occur due to threads being unable to communicate with system resources. Another argument against using the worker MPM with Apache is that not all available Apache modules are thread-safe and thus cannot be used in conjunction with the worker MPM.
![]() | Using PHP Modules with MPMs |
|---|---|
Not all available PHP modules are thread-safe. Using the worker MPM
with | |
Find a list of all external modules shipped with openSUSE here. Find the module's documentation in the listed directory.
Adds support to Apache to provide AppArmor confinement to individual CGI
scripts handled by modules like mod_php5 and
mod_perl.
Package Name: apache2-mod_apparmor
|
| More Information: Part “Confining Privileges with AppArmor” (↑Security Guide) |
mod_mono
Using mod_mono allows you to run ASP.NET
pages in your server.
Package Name: apache2-mod_mono
|
Configuration File:
/etc/apache2/conf.d/mod_mono.conf
|
mod_perl
mod_perl enables you to run Perl scripts in
an embedded interpreter. The persistent interpreter embedded in the
server avoids the overhead of starting an external interpreter and
the penalty of Perl start-up time.
Package Name: apache2-mod_perl
|
Configuration File: /etc/apache2/conf.d/mod_perl.conf
|
More Information:
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2-mod_perl
|
mod_php5
PHP is a server-side, cross-platform HTML embedded scripting language.
Package Name: apache2-mod_php5
|
Configuration File: /etc/apache2/conf.d/php5.conf
|
More Information:
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2-mod_php5
|
mod_python
mod_python allows embedding Python within
the Apache HTTP server for a considerable boost in performance and
added flexibility in designing Web-based applications.
Package Name: apache2-mod_python
|
More Information:
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2-mod_python
|
mod_tidy
mod_tidy validates each outgoing HTML page
by means of the TidyLib. In case of a validation error, a page with
an error list is delivered. Otherwise the original HTML page is
delivered.
Package Name: apache2-mod_tidy
|
Configuration File: /etc/apache2/mod_tidy.conf
|
More Information: /usr/share/doc/packages/apache2-mod_tidy
|
Apache can be extended by advanced users by writing custom modules. To
develop modules for Apache or compile third-party modules, the package
apache2-devel is required along with the
corresponding development tools. apache2-devel
also contains the apxs2 tools, which are necessary
for compiling additional modules for Apache.
apxs2 enables the compilation and installation of modules from source code (including the required changes to the configuration files), which creates dynamic shared objects (DSOs) that can be loaded into Apache at runtime.
The apxs2 binaries are located under
/usr/sbin:
/usr/sbin/apxs2—suitable for building an
extension module that works with any MPM. The installation location is
/usr/lib/apache2.
/usr/sbin/apxs2-prefork—suitable for
prefork MPM modules. The installation location is
/usr/lib/apache2-prefork.
/usr/sbin/apxs2-worker—suitable for worker
MPM modules. The installation location is
/usr/lib/apache2-worker.
Install and activate a module from source code with the following commands:
cd /path/to/module/source; apxs2 -cia
mod_foo.c
where -c compiles the module, -i
installs it, and -a activates it. Other options of
apxs2 are described in the
apxs2(1) man page.
Apache's Common Gateway Interface (CGI) lets you create dynamic content with programs or scripts usually referred to as CGI scripts. CGI scripts can be written in any programming language. Usually, script languages such as Perl or PHP are used.
To enable Apache to deliver content created by CGI scripts,
mod_cgi needs to be activated.
mod_alias is also needed. Both modules are
enabled by default. Refer to
Section 16.4.2, “Activation and Deactivation” for details on
activating modules.
![]() | CGI Security |
|---|---|
Allowing the server to execute CGI scripts is a potential security hole. Refer to Section 16.7, “Avoiding Security Problems” for additional information. | |
In openSUSE, the execution of CGI scripts is only allowed in the
directory /srv/www/cgi-bin/. This location is
already configured to execute CGI scripts. If you have created a virtual
host configuration (see
Section 16.2.2.1, “Virtual Host Configuration”) and
want to place your scripts in a host-specific directory, you must unlock
and configure this directory.
Example 16.5. VirtualHost CGI Configuration¶
ScriptAlias /cgi-bin/ "/srv/www/www.example.com/cgi-bin/"<Directory "/srv/www/www.example.com/cgi-bin/"> Options +ExecCGI
AddHandler cgi-script .cgi .pl
Order allow,deny
Allow from all </Directory>
Tells Apache to handle all files within this directory as CGI scripts. | |
Enables CGI script execution | |
Tells the server to treat files with the extensions .pl and .cgi as CGI scripts. Adjust according to your needs. | |
The |
CGI programming differs from "regular" programming in that the CGI
programs and scripts must be preceded by a MIME-Type header such as
Content-type: text/html. This header is sent to the
client, so it understands what kind of content it receives. Secondly,
the script's output must be something the client, usually a Web browser,
understands—HTML in most cases or plain text or images, for
example.
A simple test script available under
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2/test-cgi is part of
the Apache package. It outputs the content of some environment variables
as plain text. Copy this script to either
/srv/www/cgi-bin/ or the script directory of your
virtual host (/srv/www/www.example.com/cgi-bin/) and name
it test.cgi.
Files accessible by the Web server should be owned by the user
root. For additional
information see Section 16.7, “Avoiding Security Problems”. Because the Web
server runs with a different user, the CGI scripts must be
world-executable and world-readable. Change into the CGI directory and
use the command chmod 755 test.cgi to apply the
proper permissions.
Now call http://localhost/cgi-bin/test.cgi or
http://www.example.com/cgi-bin/test.cgi. You should see the
“CGI/1.0 test script report”.
If you do not see the output of the test program but an error message instead, check the following:
CGI Troubleshooting
Have you reloaded the server after having changed the configuration? Check with rcapache2 probe.
If you have configured your custom CGI directory, is it configured
properly? If in doubt, try the script within the default CGI directory
/srv/www/cgi-bin/ and call it with
http://localhost/cgi-bin/test.cgi.
Are the file permissions correct? Change into the CGI directory and execute ls -l test.cgi. Its output should start with
-rwxr-xr-x 1 root root
Make sure that the script does not contain programming errors. If you
have not changed test.cgi, this should not be the
case, but if you are using your own programs, always make sure that
they do not contain programming errors.
Whenever sensitive data, such as credit card information, is transferred
between Web server and client, it is desirable to have a secure,
encrypted connection with authentication.
mod_ssl provides strong encryption using the
secure sockets layer (SSL) and transport layer security (TLS) protocols
for HTTP communication between a client and the Web server. Using
SSL/TSL, a private connection between Web server and client is
established. Data integrity is ensured and client and server are able to
authenticate each other.
For this purpose, the server sends an SSL certificate that holds information proving the server's valid identity before any request to a URL is answered. In turn, this guarantees that the server is the uniquely correct end point for the communication. Additionally, the certificate generates an encrypted connection between client and server that can transport information without the risk of exposing sensitive, plain-text content.
mod_ssl does not implement the SSL/TSL protocols
itself, but acts as an interface between Apache and an SSL library. In
openSUSE, the OpenSSL library is used. OpenSSL is automatically
installed with Apache.
The most visible effect of using mod_ssl with
Apache is that URLs are prefixed with https:// instead
of http://.
![]() | Example Certificate |
|---|---|
An example certificate for a hypothetical company “Snake
Oil” is available when installing the package
| |
In order to use SSL/TSL with the Web server, you need to create an SSL certificate. This certificate is needed for the authorization between Web server and client, so that each party can clearly identify the other party. To ensure the integrity of the certificate, it must be signed by a party every user trusts.
There are three types of certificates you can create: a “dummy” certificate for testing purposes only, a self-signed certificate for a defined circle of users that trust you, and a certificate signed by an independent, publicly-known certificate authority (CA).
Creating a certificate is basically a two step process. First, a private key for the certificate authority is generated then the server certificate is signed with this key.
![]() | For More Information |
|---|---|
To learn more about concepts and definitions of SSL/TSL, refer to http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/ssl/ssl_intro.html. | |
Generating a dummy certificate is simple. Just call the script
/usr/bin/gensslcert. It creates or overwrites the
files listed below. Make use of gensslcert's
optional switches to fine-tune the certificate. Call
/usr/bin/gensslcert -h for
more information.
/etc/apache2/ssl.crt/ca.crt
/etc/apache2/ssl.crt/server.crt
/etc/apache2/ssl.key/server.key
/etc/apache2/ssl.csr/server.csr
/root/.mkcert.cfg
A copy of ca.crt is also placed at
/srv/www/htdocs/CA.crt for download.
![]() | For Testing Purposes Only |
|---|---|
A dummy certificate should never be used on a production system. Only use it for testing purposes. | |
If you are setting up a secure Web server for an Intranet or for a defined circle of users, it might be sufficient if you sign a certificate with your own certificate authority (CA).
Creating a self-signed certificate is an interactive nine-step process.
Change into the directory
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2 and run the
following command: ./mkcert.sh
make --no-print-directory /usr/bin/openssl /usr/sbin/
custom. Do not attempt to run this command from
outside this directory. The program provides a series of prompts, some
of which require user input.
Procedure 16.4. Creating a Self-Signed Certificate with mkcert.sh¶
Decide the signature algorithm used for certificates
Choose RSA (R, the default), because some older browsers have problems with DSA.
Generating RSA private key for CA (1024 bit)
No interaction needed.
Generating X.509 certificate signing request for
CA
Create the CA's distinguished name here. This requires you to answer
a few questions, such as country name or organization name. Enter
valid data, because everything you enter here later shows up in the
certificate. You do not need to answer every question. If one does
not apply to you or you want to leave it blank, use “.”.
Common name is the name of the CA itself—choose a significant
name, such as My company CA.
![]() | Common Name of the CA |
|---|---|
The common name of the CA must be different from the server's common name, so do not choose the fully qualified hostname in this step. | |
Generating X.509 certificate for CA signed by
itself
Choose certificate version 3 (the default).
Generating RSA private key for SERVER (1024 bit)
No interaction needed.
Generating X.509 certificate signing request for
SERVER
Create the distinguished name for the server key here. Questions are almost identical to the ones already answered for the CA's distinguished name. The data entered here applies to the Web server and does not necessarily need to be identical to the CA's data (for example, if the server is located elsewhere).
![]() | Selecting a Common Name |
|---|---|
The common name you enter here must be the fully qualified hostname of your secure server (for example, www.example.com). Otherwise the browser issues a warning that the certificate does not match the server when accessing the Web server. | |
Generating X.509 certificate signed by own CA
Choose certificate version 3 (the default).
Encrypting RSA private key of CA with a passphrase for
security
It is strongly recommended to encrypt the private key of the CA with a password, so choose Y and enter a password.
Encrypting RSA private key of SERVER with a passphrase for
security
Encrypting the server key with a password requires you to enter this password every time you start the Web server. This makes it difficult to automatically start the server on boot or to restart the Web server. Therefore, it is common sense to say N to this question. Keep in mind that your key is unprotected when not encrypted with a password and make sure that only authorized persons have access to the key.
![]() | Encrypting the Server Key |
|---|---|
If you choose to encrypt the server key with a password, increase
the value for | |
The script's result page presents a list of certificates and keys it
has generated. Contrary to what the script outputs, the files have not
been generated in the local directory conf, but to
the correct locations under /etc/apache2/.
The last step is to copy the CA certificate file from
/etc/apache2/ssl.crt/ca.crt to a location where
your users can access it in order to incorporate it into the list of
known and trusted CAs in their Web browsers. Otherwise a browser
complains that the certificate was issued by an unknown authority. The
certificate is valid for one year.
![]() | Self-Signed Certificates |
|---|---|
Only use a self-signed certificate on a Web server that is accessed by people who know and trust you as a certificate authority. It is not recommended to use such a certificate for a public shop, for example. | |
There are a number of official certificate authorities that sign your certificates. The certificate is signed by a trustworthy third party, so can be fully trusted. Publicly operating secure Web servers usually have got an officially signed certificate.
The best-known official CAs are Thawte (http://www.thawte.com/) or Verisign (http://www.verisign.com). These and other CAs are already compiled into all browsers, so certificates signed by these certificate authorities are automatically accepted by the browser.
When requesting an officially signed certificate, you do not send a certificate to the CA. Instead, issue a Certificate Signing Request (CSR). To create a CSR, call the script /usr/share/ssl/misc/CA.sh -newreq.
First the script asks for a password with which the CSR should be
encrypted. Then you are asked to enter a distinguished name. This
requires you to answer a few questions, such as country name or
organization name. Enter valid data—everything you enter here
later shows up in the certificate and is checked. You do not need to
answer every question. If one does not apply to you or you want to
leave it blank, use “.”. Common name is the name of the CA
itself—choose a significant name, such as My
company CA. Last, a challenge password and an alternative
company name must be entered.
Find the CSR in the directory from which you called the script. The
file is named newreq.pem.
The default port for SSL and TLS requests on the Web server side is 443. There is no conflict between a “regular” Apache listening on port 80 and an SSL/TLS-enabled Apache listening on port 443. In fact, HTTP and HTTPS can be run with the same Apache instance. Usually separate virtual hosts are used to dispatch requests to port 80 and port 443 to separate virtual servers.
![]() | Firewall Configuration |
|---|---|
Do not forget to open the firewall for SSL-enabled Apache on port 443. This can be done with YaST as described in Section “Configuring the Firewall with YaST” (Chapter 13, Masquerading and Firewalls, ↑Security Guide). | |
The SSL module is enabled by default in the global server configuration.
In case it has been disabled on your host, activate it with the
following command: a2enmod ssl. To finally enable
SSL, the server needs to be started with the flag “SSL”. To
do so, call a2enflag SSL. If you have chosen to
encrypt your server certificate with a password, you should also
increase the value for APACHE_TIMEOUT in
/etc/sysconfig/apache2, so you have enough time to
enter the passphrase when Apache starts. Restart the server to make
these changes active. A reload is not sufficient.
The virtual host configuration directory contains a template
/etc/apache2/vhosts.d/vhost-ssl.template with
SSL-specific directives that are extensively documented. Refer to
Section 16.2.2.1, “Virtual Host Configuration” for the
general virtual host configuration.
To get started, copy the template to
/etc/apache2/vhosts.d/
and edit it. Adjusting the values for the following directives should be
sufficient:
mySSL-host.conf
DocumentRoot
ServerName
ServerAdmin
ErrorLog
TransferLog
By default it is not possible to run multiple SSL-enabled virtual hosts on a server with only one IP address. Name-based virtual hosting requires that Apache knows which server name has been requested. The problem with SSL connections is, that such a request can only be read after the SSL connection has already been established (by using the default virtual host). As a result, users will receive a warning message stating that the certificate does not match the server name.
openSUSE comes with an extension to the SSL protocol called Server Name Indication (SNI) addresses this issue by sending the name of the virtual domain as part of the SSL negotiation. This enables the server to “switch” to the correct virtual domain early and present the browser the correct certificate.
SNI is enabled by default on openSUSE. In order to enable
Name-Based Virtual Hosts for SSL, configure the server as described in
Section 16.2.2.1.1, “Name-Based Virtual Hosts”
(note that you need to use port 443 rather than port
80 with SSL).
![]() | SNI Browser Support |
|---|---|
SNI must also be supported on the client side. Although SNI is supported by most browsers, some browsers for mobile hardware as well as Internet Explorer and Safari on Windows* XP lack SNI support. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Server_Name_Indication for details.
Configure how to handle non-SNI capable browser with the directive
When set to | |
A Web server exposed to the public Internet requires an ongoing administrative effort. It is inevitable that security issues appear, both related to the software and to accidental misconfiguration. Here are some tips for how to deal with them.
If there are vulnerabilities found in the Apache software, a security advisory will be issued by SUSE. It contains instructions for fixing the vulnerabilities, which in turn should be applied as soon as possible. The SUSE security announcements are available from the following locations:
Web Page. http://www.novell.com/linux/security/securitysupport.html
Mailing List Archive. http://lists.opensuse.org/opensuse-security-announce/
RSS Feed. http://www.novell.com/linux/security/suse_security.xml
By default in openSUSE, the DocumentRoot
directory /srv/www/htdocs and the CGI directory
/srv/www/cgi-bin belong to the user and group
root. You should not change these permissions.
If the directories are writable for all, any user can place files into
them. These files might then be executed by Apache with the permissions
of wwwrun, which may give the user unintended
access to file system resources. Use subdirectories of
/srv/www to place the
DocumentRoot and CGI directories for your
virtual hosts and make sure that directories and files belong to user
and group root.
By default, access to the whole file system is denied in
/etc/apache2/httpd.conf. You should never overwrite
these directives, but specifically enable access to all directories
Apache should be able to read. For details, see
Section 16.2.2.1.3, “Basic Virtual Host Configuration”.
In doing so, ensure that no critical files, such as password or system
configuration files, can be read from the outside.
Interactive scripts in Perl, PHP, SSI, or any other programming language can essentially run arbitrary commands and therefore present a general security issue. Scripts that will be executed from the server should only be installed from sources the server administrator trusts—allowing users to run their own scripts is generally not a good idea. It is also recommended to do security audits for all scripts.
To make the administration of scripts as easy as possible, it is common
practice to limit the execution of CGI scripts to specific directories
instead of globally allowing them. The directives
ScriptAlias and Option
ExecCGI are used for configuration. The openSUSE
default configuration does not allow execution of CGI scripts from
everywhere.
All CGI scripts run as the same user, so different scripts can potentially conflict with each other. The module suEXEC lets you run CGI scripts under a different user and group.
When enabling user directories (with
mod_userdir or
mod_rewrite) you should strongly consider not
allowing .htaccess files, which would allow users
to overwrite security settings. At least you should limit the user's
engagement by using the directive
AllowOverRide. In openSUSE,
.htaccess files are enabled by default, but the
user is not allowed to overwrite any Option
directives when using mod_userdir (see the
/etc/apache2/mod_userdir.conf configuration file).
If Apache does not start, the Web page is not accessible, or users cannot connect to the Web server, it is important to find the cause of the problem. Here are some typical places to look for error explanations and important things to check:
Instead of starting and stopping the Web server with the binary
/usr/sbin/httpd2, rather use the
rcapache2 script instead (described in
Section 16.3, “Starting and Stopping Apache”). It is verbose about
errors, and it even provides tips and hints for fixing configuration
errors.
In case of both fatal and nonfatal errors, check the Apache log files
for causes, mainly the error log file located at
/var/log/apache2/error_log by default.
Additionally, you can control the verbosity of the logged messages
with the LogLevel directive if more detail is
needed in the log files.
![]() | A Simple Test |
|---|---|
Watch the Apache log messages with the command tail -F
/var/log/apache2/ | |
A common mistake is to not open the ports for Apache in the firewall configuration of the server. If you configure Apache with YaST, there is a separate option available to take care of this specific issue (see Section 16.2.3, “Configuring Apache with YaST”). If you are configuring Apache manually, open firewall ports for HTTP and HTTPS via YaST's firewall module.
If the error cannot be tracked down with the help of any these, check the online Apache bug database at http://httpd.apache.org/bug_report.html. Additionally, the Apache user community can be reached via a mailing list available at http://httpd.apache.org/userslist.html. A recommended newsgroup is comp.infosystems.www.servers.unix.
The package apache2-doc contains the complete
Apache manual in various localizations for local installation and
reference. It is not installed by default—the quickest way to
install it is to use the command zypper in
apache2-doc. Once installed, the Apache manual is available at
http://localhost/manual/. You may also access it on
the Web at http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.2/.
SUSE-specific configuration hints are available in the directory
/usr/share/doc/packages/apache2/README.*.
For a list of new features in Apache 2.2, refer to http://httpd.apache.org/docs/2.2/new_features_2_2.html. Information about upgrading from version 2.0 to 2.2 is available at http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.2/upgrading.html.
More information about external Apache modules that are briefly described in Section 16.4.5, “External Modules” is available at the following locations:
mod_mono
mod_perl
mod_php5
mod_python
mod_tidy
More information about developing Apache modules or about getting involved in the Apache Web server project are available at the following locations:
If you experience difficulties specific to Apache in openSUSE, take a look at the openSUSE wiki at http://old-en.opensuse.org/Apache. The history of Apache is provided at http://httpd.apache.org/ABOUT_APACHE.html. This page also explains why the server is called Apache.
Contents
Abstract
Using the YaST module, you can configure your machine to function as an FTP (File Transfer Protocol) server. Anonymous and/or authenticated users can connect to your machine and download files using the FTP protocol. Depending on the configuration, they can also upload files to the FTP server. YaST provides a unified configuration interface for various FTP server daemons installed on your system.
You can use the YaST configuration module to configure two different FTP server daemons:
vsftpd (Very Secure FTP Daemon)
and
pure-ftpd
Only installed servers can be configured. Standard
openSUSE® media do not contain the
pure-ftpd package. However,
if the pure-ftpd package is
installed from another repository, it can be configured using the YaST
module.
The vsftpd and pure-ftpd servers have slightly different configuration options, especially in the dialog. This chapter describes the settings of the vsftpd server , being the default server for openSUSE .
If the YaST FTP Server module is not available in your system, install
the yast2-ftp-server package.
To configure the FTP server using YaST, follow these steps:
Open YaST Control Center and choose + or run
the yast2 ftp-server command as root.
If there is not any FTP server installed in your system, you will be asked which server to install when the YaST FTP Server module starts. Choose a server (vsftpd is the standard server for openSUSE) and confirm the dialog. If there are two servers installed, choose the preferred server and click .
In the dialog, configure the options for starting of the FTP server. For more information, see Section 17.1, “Starting the FTP server”.
In the dialog, configure FTP directories, welcome message, file creation masks and various other parameters. For more information, see Section 17.2, “FTP General Settings”.
In the dialog, set the parameters that affect the load on the FTP server. For more information, see Section 17.3, “FTP Performance Settings”.
In the dialog, set whether the FTP server should be available for anonymous and/or authenticated users. For more information, see Section 17.4, “Authentication”.
In the dialog, configure the operation mode of the FTP server, SSL connections and firewall settings. For more information, see Section 17.5, “Expert Settings”.
Press to save the configurations.
In the frame of the dialog set the way the FTP server is started up. You can choose between starting the server automatically during the system boot and starting it manually. If the FTP server should be started only after an FTP connection request, choose .
The current status of the FTP server is shown in the frame of the dialog. Start the FTP server by clicking . To stop the server, click . After having changed the settings of the server click . Your configurations will be saved by leaving the configuration module with .
The frame of the dialog shows which FTP server is used: either vsftpd or pure-ftpd. If both servers are installed, you can switch between them—the current configuration will automatically be converted. The pure-ftpd package is not included in the standard openSUSE media so you have to install it from a different installation source if you want to use it.
In the frame of the dialog you can set the which is shown after connecting to the FTP server.
If you check the option, all local users will be placed in a chroot jail in their home directory after login. This option has security implications, especially if the users have upload permission or shell access, so be careful enabling this option.
If you check the option, all FTP requests and responses are logged.
You can limit permissions of files created by anonymous and/or authenticated users with umask. Set the file creation mask for anonymous users in and the file creation mask for authenticated users in . The masks should be entered as octal numbers with a leading zero. For more information about umask, see the umask man page (man 1p umask).
In the frame set the directories used
for anonymous and authorized users. With , you
can select a directory to be used from the local filesystem. The default
FTP directory for anonymous users is /srv/ftp. Note
that vsftpd does not allow this directory to be writable for all users.
The subdirectory upload with write permissions for
anonymous users is created instead.
![]() | Write Permissions in FTP Directory |
|---|---|
The pure-ftpd server allows the FTP directory for anonymous users to be writable. When switching between servers, make sure you remove the write permissions in the directory that was used with pure-ftpd before switching back to the vsftpd server. | |
In the dialog set the parameters which affect the load on the FTP server. is the maximum time (in minutes) the remote client may spend between FTP commands. In case of longer inactivity, the remote client is disconnected. determines the maximum number of clients which can be connected from a single IP address. determines the maximum number of clients which may be connected. Any additional clients will get an error message.
The maximum data transfer rate (in KB/s) is set in for local authenticated users, and in for anonymous clients respectively. The default value
for the rate settings is 0, which means unlimited data
transfer rate.
In the frame of the dialog, you are able to set which users are allowed to access your FTP server. You can choose between the following options: granting access to anonymous users only, to authenticated users only (with accounts on the system) or to both types of users.
If you want to allow users to upload files to the FTP server, check in the frame of the dialog. Here you are able to allow uploading or creating directories even for anonymous users by checking the respective box.
![]() | vsftp—Allowing File Upload for Anonymous Users |
|---|---|
If a vsftpd server is used and you want anonymous users to be able to upload files or create directories, a subdirectory with writing permissions for all users has to be created in the anonymous FTP directory. | |
An FTP server can run in active or in passive mode. By default the server runs in passive mode. To switch into active mode, just uncheck option in dialog. You can also change the range of ports on the server used for the data stream by tweaking the and options.
If you want encrypted communication between clients and the server, you can . Check the versions of the protocol to be supported and specify the DSA certificate to be used for SSL encrypted connections.
If your system is protected by a firewall, check to enable a connection to the FTP server.
For more information about FTP servers read the manual pages of vsftpd and vsftpd.conf.
Contents
Abstract
Mobile computing is mostly associated with laptops, PDAs and cellular phones (and the data exchange between them). Mobile hardware components, such as external hard disks, flash drives, or digital cameras, can be connected to laptops or desktop systems. A number of software components are involved in mobile computing scenarios and some applications are tailor-made for mobile use.
The hardware of laptops differs from that of a normal desktop system. This is because criteria like exchangeability, space requirements and power consumption must be taken into account. The manufacturers of mobile hardware have developed standard interfaces like PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card International Association), Mini PCI and Mini PCIe that can be used to extend the hardware of laptops. The standards cover memory cards, network interface cards, ISDN (and modem cards) and external hard disks.
![]() | openSUSE and Tablet PCs |
|---|---|
openSUSE also supports Tablet PCs. Tablet PCs come with a touchpad/digitizer that allows you to use a digital pen or even fingertips to edit data right on the screen instead of using mouse and keyboard. They are installed and configured much like any other system. For a detailed introduction to the installation and configuration of Tablet PCs, refer to Chapter 22, Using Tablet PCs. | |
The inclusion of energy-optimized system components during laptop manufacturing contributes to their suitability for use without access to the electrical power grid. Their contribution towards conservation of power is at least as important as that of the operating system. openSUSE® supports various methods that influence the power consumption of a laptop and have varying effects on the operating time under battery power. The following list is in descending order of contribution towards power conservation:
Throttling the CPU speed.
Switching off the display illumination during pauses.
Manually adjusting the display illumination.
Disconnecting unused, hotplug-enabled accessories (USB CD-ROM, external mouse, unused PCMCIA cards, WLAN, etc.).
Spinning down the hard disk when idling.
Detailed background information about power management in openSUSE is provided in Chapter 19, Power Management.
Your system needs to adapt to changing operating environments when used for mobile computing. Many services depend on the environment and the underlying clients must be reconfigured. openSUSE handles this task for you.
The services affected in the case of a laptop commuting back and forth between a small home network and an office network are:
This includes IP address assignment, name resolution, Internet connectivity and connectivity to other networks.
A current database of available printers and an available print server must be present, depending on the network.
As with printing, the list of the corresponding servers must be current.
If your laptop is temporarily connected to a projector or an external monitor, different display configurations must be available.
openSUSE offers several ways of integrating laptops into existing operating environments:
NetworkManager is especially tailored for mobile networking on laptops. It provides a means to easily and automatically switch between network environments or different types of networks such as mobile broadband (such as GPRS, EDGE, or 3G), wireless LAN, and Ethernet. NetworkManager supports WEP and WPA-PSK encryption in wireless LANs. It also supports dial-up connections (with smpppd). Both desktop environments (GNOME and KDE) include a front-end for NetworkManager. For more information about the desktop applets, see Section 21.4, “Using KNetworkManager” and Section 21.5, “Using GNOME NetworkManager Applet”.
Table 18.1. Use Cases for NetworkManager
|
My computer… |
Use NetworkManager |
|---|---|
|
is a laptop |
Yes |
|
is sometimes attached to different networks |
Yes |
|
provides network services (such as DNS or DHCP) |
No |
|
only uses a static IP address |
No |
Use the YaST tools to configure networking whenever NetworkManager should not handle network configuration.
![]() | DNS configuration and various types of network connections |
|---|---|
If you travel frequently with your laptop and change different types
of network connections, NetworkManager works fine when all DNS addresses are
assigned correctly assigned with DHCP. If some of your connections
use static DNS address(es), add it to the
| |
The service location protocol (SLP) simplifies the connection of a laptop to an existing network. Without SLP, the administrator of a laptop usually requires detailed knowledge of the services available in a network. SLP broadcasts the availability of a certain type of service to all clients in a local network. Applications that support SLP can process the information dispatched by SLP and be configured automatically. SLP can also be used to install a system, minimizing the effort of searching for a suitable installation source. Find detailed information about SLP in Chapter 10, SLP Services in the Network.
There are various special task areas in mobile use that are covered by dedicated software: system monitoring (especially the battery charge), data synchronization, and wireless communication with peripherals and the Internet. The following sections cover the most important applications that openSUSE provides for each task.
Two KDE system monitoring tools are provided by openSUSE:
is an application which lets you adjust energy saving related behavior of the KDE desktop. You can typically access it via the tray icon, which changes according to the type of the current power supply. Other way to open its configuration dialog is through the : +++.
Click the tray icon to access options to configure its behavior. You can choose one of five displayed power profiles which best fits your needs. For example, the scheme disables the screen saver and the power management in general, so that your presentation is not interrupted by system events. Click to open a more complex configuration screen. Here you can edit individual profiles and set advanced power management options and notifications, such as what to do when the laptop lid has been closed, or when the battery charge is low.
(also called ) gathers measurable system parameters into one monitoring environment. It presents the output information in 2 tabs by default. gives detailed information about currently running processes, such as CPU load, memory usage, or process ID number and nice value. The presentation and filtering of the collected data can be customized — to add a new type of process information, left-click on the process table header and choose which column to hide or add to the view. It is also possible to monitor different system parameters in various data pages or collect the data of various machines in parallel over the network. KSysguard can also run as a daemon on machines without a KDE environment. Find more information about this program in its integrated help function or in the SUSE help pages.
In the GNOME environment use and .
When switching between working on a mobile machine disconnected from the network and working at a networked workstation in an office, it is necessary to keep processed data synchronized across all instances. This could include e-mail folders, directories and individual files that need to be present for work on the road as well as at the office. The solution in both cases is as follows:
Use an IMAP account for storing your e-mails in the
office network. Then access the e-mails from the workstation using
any disconnected IMAP–enabled e-mail client, like Mozilla
Thunderbird Mail, Evolution, or KMail. The e-mail client must be
configured so that the same folder is always accessed for
Sent messages. This ensures that all messages are
available along with their status information after the
synchronization process has completed. Use an SMTP server
implemented in the mail client for sending messages instead of the
system-wide MTA postfix or sendmail to receive reliable feedback
about unsent mail.
There are several utilities suitable for synchronizing data between a laptop and a workstation. One of the most widely used is a command-line tool called rsync. For more information, see Chapter 23, Copying and Sharing Files.
As well as connecting to a home or office network with a cable, a laptop can also use wireless connection to access other computers, peripherals, cellular phones or PDAs. Linux supports three types of wireless communication:
With the largest range of these wireless technologies, WLAN is the only one suitable for the operation of large and sometimes even spatially separate networks. Single machines can connect with each other to form an independent wireless network or access the Internet. Devices called access points act as base stations for WLAN-enabled devices and act as intermediaries for access to the Internet. A mobile user can switch among access points depending on location and which access point is offering the best connection. Like in cellular telephony, a large network is available to WLAN users without binding them to a specific location for accessing it. Find details about WLAN in Chapter 20, Wireless LAN.
Bluetooth has the broadest application spectrum of all wireless technologies. It can be used for communication between computers (laptops) and PDAs or cellular phones, as can IrDA. It can also be used to connect various computers within range. Bluetooth is also used to connect wireless system components, like a keyboard or a mouse. The range of this technology is, however, not sufficient to connect remote systems to a network. WLAN is the technology of choice for communicating through physical obstacles like walls.
IrDA is the wireless technology with the shortest range. Both communication parties must be within viewing distance of each other. Obstacles like walls cannot be overcome. One possible application of IrDA is the transmission of a file from a laptop to a cellular phone. The short path from the laptop to the cellular phone is then covered using IrDA. The long range transport of the file to the recipient of the file is handled by the mobile network. Another application of IrDA is the wireless transmission of printing jobs in the office.
Ideally, you protect data on your laptop against unauthorized access in multiple ways. Possible security measures can be taken in the following areas:
Always physically secure your system against theft whenever possible. Various securing tools (like chains) are available in retail stores.
Use biometric authentication in addition to standard authentication via login and password. openSUSE supports fingerprint authentication. For more details, see Chapter 7, Using the Fingerprint Reader (↑Security Guide).
Important data should not only be encrypted during transmission, but also on the hard disk. This ensures its safety in case of theft. The creation of an encrypted partition with openSUSE is described in Chapter 10, Encrypting Partitions and Files (↑Security Guide). Another possibility is to create encrypted home directories when adding the user with YaST.
![]() | Data Security and Suspend to Disk |
|---|---|
Encrypted partitions are not unmounted during a suspend to disk event. Thus, all data on these partitions is available to any party who manages to steal the hardware and issue a resume of the hard disk. | |
Any transfer of data should be secured, no matter how the transfer is done. Find general security issues regarding Linux and networks in Chapter 1, Security and Confidentiality (↑Security Guide). Security measures related to wireless networking are provided in Chapter 20, Wireless LAN.
openSUSE supports the automatic detection of mobile storage devices over FireWire (IEEE 1394) or USB. The term mobile storage device applies to any kind of FireWire or USB hard disk, USB flash drive, or digital camera. These devices are automatically detected and configured as soon as they are connected with the system over the corresponding interface. The file managers of both GNOME and KDE offer flexible handling of mobile hardware items. To unmount any of these media safely, use the (KDE) or (GNOME) feature of either file manager.
As soon as an external hard disk is correctly recognized by the
system, its icon appears in the file manager. Clicking the icon
displays the contents of the drive. It is possible to create folders
and files here and edit or delete them. To rename a hard disk from the
name it had been given by the system, select the corresponding menu
item from the menu that opens when the icon is right-clicked. This
name change is limited to display in the file manager. The descriptor
by which the device is mounted in /media remains
unaffected by this.
These devices are handled by the system just like external hard disks. It is similarly possible to rename the entries in the file manager.
Digital cameras recognized by the system also appear as external drives in the overview of the file manager. KDE allows reading and accessing the pictures at the URL camera:/ . The images can then be processed using digiKam or f-spot. For advanced photo processing, use GIMP.
A desktop system or a laptop can communicate with a cellular phone via Bluetooth or IrDA. Some models support both protocols and some only one of the two. The usage areas for the two protocols and the corresponding extended documentation has already been mentioned in Section 18.1.3.3, “Wireless Communication”. The configuration of these protocols on the cellular phones themselves is described in their manuals.
The support for synchronizing with handheld devices manufactured by Palm, Inc., is already built into Evolution and Kontact. Initial connection with the device is easily performed with the assistance of a wizard. Once the support for Palm Pilots is configured, it is necessary to determine which type of data should be synchronized (addresses, appointments, etc.).
A more sophisticated synchronization solution is available with the
program opensync (see packages libopensync, msynctool
and the respective plug-ins for the different devices).
The central point of reference for all questions regarding mobile devices and Linux is http://tuxmobil.org/. Various sections of that Web site deal with the hardware and software aspects of laptops, PDAs, cellular phones and other mobile hardware.
A similar approach to that of http://tuxmobil.org/ is made by http://www.linux-on-laptops.com/. Information about laptops and handhelds can be found here.
SUSE maintains a mailing list in German dedicated to the subject of laptops. See http://lists.opensuse.org/opensuse-mobile-de/. On this list, users and developers discuss all aspects of mobile computing with openSUSE. Postings in English are answered, but the majority of the archived information is only available in German. Use http://lists.opensuse.org/opensuse-mobile/ for English postings.
Information about OpenSync is available on
http://en.opensuse.org/OpenSync.
Contents
Power management is especially important on laptop computers, but is also useful on other systems. ACPI (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface) is available on all modern computers (laptops, desktops, and servers). Power management technologies require suitable hardware and BIOS routines. Most laptops and many modern desktops and servers meet these requirements. It is also possible to control CPU frequency scaling to save power or decrease noise.
Power saving functions are not only significant for the mobile use of laptops, but also for desktop systems. The main functions and their use in ACPI are:
not supported.
This mode writes the entire system state to the RAM. Subsequently, the
entire system except the RAM is put to sleep. In this state, the
computer consumes very little power. The advantage of this state is
the possibility of resuming work at the same point within a few
seconds without having to boot and restart applications. This function
corresponds to the ACPI state S3. The support of
this state is still under development and therefore largely depends on
the hardware.
In this operating mode, the entire system state is written to the hard
disk and the system is powered off. There must be a swap partition at
least as big as the RAM to write all the active data. Reactivation
from this state takes about 30 to 90 seconds. The state prior to the
suspend is restored. Some manufacturers offer useful hybrid variants
of this mode, such as RediSafe in IBM Thinkpads. The corresponding
ACPI state is S4. In Linux, suspend to disk is
performed by kernel routines that are independent from ACPI.
ACPI checks the battery charge status and provides information about it. Additionally, it coordinates actions to perform when a critical charge status is reached.
Following a shutdown, the computer is powered off. This is especially important when an automatic shutdown is performed shortly before the battery is empty.
In connection with the CPU, energy can be saved in three different ways: frequency and voltage scaling (also known as PowerNow! or Speedstep), throttling and putting the processor to sleep (C-states). Depending on the operating mode of the computer, these methods can also be combined.
ACPI was designed to enable the operating system to set up and control the individual hardware components. ACPI supersedes both Power Management Plug and Play (PnP) and Advanced Power Management (APM). It delivers information about the battery, AC adapter, temperature, fan and system events, like “close lid” or “battery low.”
The BIOS provides tables containing information about the individual
components and hardware access methods. The operating system uses this
information for tasks like assigning interrupts or activating and
deactivating components. Because the operating system executes commands
stored in the BIOS, the functionality depends on the BIOS implementation.
The tables ACPI can detect and load are reported in
/var/log/boot.msg. See
Section 19.2.3, “Troubleshooting” for more information about
troubleshooting ACPI problems.
The CPU can save energy in three ways:
Depending on the operating mode of the computer, these methods can be combined. Saving energy also means that the system heats up less and the fans are activated less frequently.
Frequency scaling and throttling are only relevant if the processor is busy, because the most economic C-state is applied anyway when the processor is idle. If the CPU is busy, frequency scaling is the recommended power saving method. Often the processor only works with a partial load. In this case, it can be run with a lower frequency. Usually, dynamic frequency scaling controlled by the kernel on-demand governor is the best approach.
Throttling should be used as the last resort, for example, to extend the battery operation time despite a high system load. However, some systems do not run smoothly when they are throttled too much. Moreover, CPU throttling does not make sense if the CPU has little to do.
PowerNow! and Speedstep are the designations AMD and Intel use for this technology. However, this technology is also applied in processors of other manufacturers. The clock frequency of the CPU and its core voltage are reduced at the same time, resulting in more than linear energy savings. This means that when the frequency is halved (half performance), far less than half of the energy is consumed. This technology is independent from ACPI.
There are two main approaches to performing CPU frequency scaling—by the kernel itself (CPUfreq infrastructure with in-kernel governors) or by a userspace application. The in-kernel governors are policy governors that can change the CPU frequency based on different criteria (a sort of pre-configured power schemes for the CPU). The following governors are available with the CPUfreq subsystem:
The CPU frequency is statically set to the highest possible for maximum performance. Consequently, saving power is not the focus of this governor.
The CPU frequency is statically set to the lowest possible. This can have severe impact on the performance, as the system will never rise above this frequency no matter how busy the processors are.
The kernel implementation of a dynamic CPU frequency policy: The governor monitors the processor utilization. As soon as it exceeds a certain threshold, the governor will set the frequency to the highest available. If the utilization is less than the threshold, the next lowest frequency is used. If the system continues to be underutilized, the frequency is again reduced until the lowest available frequency is set.
Similar to the on-demand implementation, this governor also dynamically adjusts frequencies based on processor utilization, except that it allows for a more gradual increase in power. If processor utilization exceeds a certain threshold, the governor does not immediately switch to the highest available frequency (as the on-demand governor does), but only to next higher frequency available.
The relevant files for the kernel governors are located at
/sys/devices/system/cpu/cpu*/cpufreq/. If your
machine has more than one CPU,
/sys/devices/system/cpu/ will hold a subdirectory
for each processor: cpu0,
cpu1, etc. If your system currently uses the
on-demand or conservative governor, you will see a separate
subdirectory for those governors in cpufreq,
containing the parameters for the governors.
This technology omits a certain percentage of the clock signal impulses
for the CPU. At 25% throttling, every fourth impulse is omitted. At
87.5%, only every eighth impulse reaches the processor. However, the
energy savings are a little less than linear. Normally, throttling is
only used if frequency scaling is not available or to maximize power
savings. This technology must be controlled by a special process, as
well. The system interface for Processor Throttling States (T-states)
is /proc/acpi/processor/*/throttling.
Modern processors have several power saving modes called
C-states. They reflect the capability of an idle
processor to turn off unused components in order to save power. The
operating system puts the processor to sleep whenever there is no
activity. In this case, the operating system sends the CPU a
halt command. There are three idle states:
C1, C2, and
C3. In the most economic state,
C3, even the synchronization of the processor cache
with the main memory is halted. Therefore, this state can only be
applied if no other device modifies the contents of the main memory via
bus master activity. Some drivers prevent the use of
C3. The current state is displayed in
/proc/acpi/processor/*/power.
To view or adjust the current settings of the CPUfreq subsystem use
the tools provided by
cpufrequtils for that.
After you have installed the
cpufrequtils package, use the
cpufreq-info to retrieve CPUfreq kernel
information. The cpufreq-set command can be used to
modify CPUfreq settings. For example, run the following command as
root to activate the on-demand governor at runtime:
cpufreq-set -g ondemand
For more details and the available options, refer to the
cpufreq-info and the cpufreq-set
man pages or run
cpufreq-info --help or
cpufreq-set --help,
respectively.
A useful tool for monitoring system power consumption is powerTOP,
available after installation of the
powertop package. It
helps you to identify the reasons for unnecessary high power consumption
(for example, processes that are mainly responsible for waking up a
processor from its idle state) and to optimize your system settings to
avoid these. It supports both Intel and AMD processors. For detailed
information, refer to the powerTOP project page at
http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/powertop/.
Apart from the tools above, the following ACPI utilities is available:
To merely display information, like the battery charge level and the temperature, you can use the acpi command. For a list of available options, run acpi --help.
For editing the ACPI tables in the BIOS, install the
acpica package.
There are two different types of problems. On one hand, the ACPI code of the kernel may contain bugs that were not detected in time. In this case, a solution will be made available for download. More often, the problems are caused by the BIOS. Sometimes, deviations from the ACPI specification are purposely integrated in the BIOS to circumvent errors in the ACPI implementation of other widespread operating systems. Hardware components that have serious errors in the ACPI implementation are recorded in a blacklist that prevents the Linux kernel from using ACPI for these components.
The first thing to do when problems are encountered is to update the BIOS. If the computer does not boot at all, one of the following boot parameters may be helpful:
Do not use ACPI for configuring the PCI devices.
Only perform a simple resource configuration. Do not use ACPI for other purposes.
Disable ACPI.
![]() | Problems Booting without ACPI |
|---|---|
Some newer machines (especially SMP systems and AMD64 systems) need ACPI for configuring the hardware correctly. On these machines, disabling ACPI can cause problems. | |
Sometimes, the machine is confused by hardware that is attached over USB or FireWire. If a machine refuses to boot, unplug all unneeded hardware and try again.
Monitor the boot messages of the system with the command dmesg
| grep -2i acpi (or all messages, because the
problem may not be caused by ACPI) after booting. If an error occurs
while parsing an ACPI table, the most important table—the DSDT
(Differentiated System Description Table)—can
be replaced with an improved version. In this case, the faulty DSDT of
the BIOS is ignored. The procedure is described in
Section 19.4.1, “ACPI Activated with Hardware Support but Functions Do Not Work”.
In the kernel configuration, there is a switch for activating ACPI debug messages. If a kernel with ACPI debugging is compiled and installed, experts searching for an error can be supported with detailed information.
If you experience BIOS or hardware problems, it is always advisable to contact the manufacturers. Especially if they do not always provide assistance for Linux, they should be confronted with the problems. Manufacturers will only take the issue seriously if they realize that an adequate number of their customers use Linux.
http://tldp.org/HOWTO/ACPI-HOWTO/ (detailed ACPI HOWTO, contains DSDT patches)
http://www.acpi.info (Advanced Configuration & Power Interface Specification)
http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/acpi/ (the ACPI4Linux project at Sourceforge)
http://acpi.sourceforge.net/dsdt/index.php (DSDT patches by Bruno Ducrot)
In Linux, the hard disk can be put to sleep entirely if it is not needed or it can be run in a more economic or quieter mode. On modern laptops, you do not need to switch off the hard disks manually, because they automatically enter an economic operating mode whenever they are not needed. However, if you want to maximize power savings, test some of the following methods, using the hdparm command.
It can be used to modify various hard disk settings. The option
-y instantly switches the hard disk to the standby mode.
-Y puts it to sleep. hdparm -S
x causes the hard disk to be spun down after a certain
period of inactivity. Replace x as follows:
0 disables this mechanism, causing the hard disk to
run continuously. Values from 1 to
240 are multiplied by 5 seconds. Values from
241 to 251 correspond to 1 to 11
times 30 minutes.
Internal power saving options of the hard disk can be controlled with the
option -B. Select a value from 0 to
255 for maximum saving to maximum throughput. The
result depends on the hard disk used and is difficult to assess. To make
a hard disk quieter, use the option -M. Select a value
from 128 to 254 for quiet to fast.
Often, it is not so easy to put the hard disk to sleep. In Linux,
numerous processes write to the hard disk, waking it up repeatedly.
Therefore, it is important to understand how Linux handles data that
needs to be written to the hard disk. First, all data is buffered in the
RAM. This buffer is monitored by the
pdflush daemon. When the data
reaches a certain age limit or when the buffer is filled to a certain
degree, the buffer content is flushed to the hard disk. The buffer size
is dynamic and depends on the size of the memory and the system load. By
default, pdflush is set to short intervals to achieve maximum data
integrity. It checks the buffer every 5 seconds and writes the data to
the hard disk. The following variables are interesting:
/proc/sys/vm/dirty_writeback_centisecs
Contains the delay until a pdflush thread wakes up (in hundredths of a second).
/proc/sys/vm/dirty_expire_centisecs
Defines after which timeframe a dirty page should be written out
latest. Default is 3000, which means 30 seconds.
/proc/sys/vm/dirty_background_ratio
Maximum percentage of dirty pages until pdflush begins to write them.
Default is 5%.
/proc/sys/vm/dirty_ratio
When the dirty page exceeds this percentage of the total memory, processes are forced to write dirty buffers during their time slice instead of continuing to write.
![]() | Impairment of the Data Integrity |
|---|---|
Changes to the pdflush daemon settings endanger the data integrity. | |
Apart from these processes, journaling file systems, like
ReiserFS,
Ext3,
Ext4 and others write their
metadata independently from pdflush, which also prevents the hard disk
from spinning down. To avoid this, a special kernel extension has been
developed for mobile devices. To make use of the extension, install the
laptop-mode-tools package and
see
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/laptops/laptop-mode.txt
for details.
Another important factor is the way active programs behave. For example, good editors regularly write hidden backups of the currently modified file to the hard disk, causing the disk to wake up. Features like this can be disabled at the expense of data integrity.
In this connection, the mail daemon postfix makes use of the variable
POSTFIX_LAPTOP. If this variable is set to
yes, postfix accesses the hard disk far less
frequently.
All error messages and alerts are logged in the file
/var/log/messages. The following sections cover the
most common problems.
If you experience problems with ACPI, search the output of
dmesg for ACPI-specific messages by using the command
dmesg|grep -i acpi.
A BIOS update may be required to resolve the problem. Go to the home page of your laptop manufacturer, look for an updated BIOS version, and install it. Ask the manufacturer to comply with the latest ACPI specification. If the errors persist after the BIOS update, proceed as follows to replace the faulty DSDT table in your BIOS with an updated DSDT:
Procedure 19.1. Updating the DSDT Table in the BIOS
For the procedure below, make sure the following packages are
installed: kernel-source,
acpica, and
mkinitrd.
Download the DSDT for your system from
http://acpi.sourceforge.net/dsdt/index.php.
Check if the file is decompressed and compiled as shown by the file
extension .aml (ACPI machine language). If this is
the case, continue with step 3.
If the file extension of the downloaded table is
.asl (ACPI source language) instead, compile it by
executing the following command:
iasl -sa file.asl
Copy the (resulting) file DSDT.aml to any
location (/etc/DSDT.aml is recommended).
Edit /etc/sysconfig/kernel and adapt the path to
the DSDT file accordingly.
Start mkinitrd. Whenever you install the kernel and
use mkinitrd to create an
initrd file, the modified DSDT is integrated and
loaded when the system is booted.
Refer to the kernel sources to see if your processor is supported. You
may need a special kernel module or module option to activate CPU
frequency control. If the
kernel-source package is
installed, this information is available in
/usr/src/linux/Documentation/cpu-freq/*.
ACPI systems may have problems with suspend and standby due to a faulty DSDT implementation (BIOS). If this is the case, update the BIOS.
When the system tries to unload faulty modules, the system is arrested
or the suspend event is not triggered. The same can also happen if you
do not unload modules or stop services that prevent a successful
suspend. In both cases, try to identify the faulty module that prevented
the sleep mode. The log file
/var/log/pm-suspend.log contains detailed
information about what is going on and where possible errors are. Modify
the SUSPEND_MODULES variable in
/usr/lib/pm-utils/defaults to unload problematic
modules prior to a suspend or standby.
Refer to http://old-en.opensuse.org/Pm-utils and http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Suspend_to_RAM to get more detailed information on how to modify the suspend and resume process.
http://www.acpi.info (Advanced Configuration and Power Interface Specification)
http://www.lesswatts.org/projects/acpi/ (the ACPI4Linux project at Sourceforge)
http://acpi.sourceforge.net/dsdt/index.php (DSDT patches by Bruno Ducrot)
http://wiki.opensuse.org/SDB:Suspend_to_RAM—How to get Suspend to RAM working
http://old-en.opensuse.org/Pm-utils—How to modify the general suspend framework
Contents
Abstract
Wireless LANs, or Wireless Local Area Network (WLANs), have become an indispensable aspect of mobile computing. Today, most laptops have built-in WLAN cards. This chapter describes how to set up a WLAN card with YaST, encrypt transmissions, and use tips and tricks. Alternatively, you can configure and manage WLAN access with NetworkManager. For details, refer to Chapter 21, Using NetworkManager.
WLAN cards communicate using the 802.11 standard, prepared by the IEEE organization. Originally, this standard provided for a maximum transmission rate of 2 Mbit/s. Meanwhile, several supplements have been added to increase the data rate. These supplements define details such as the modulation, transmission output, and transmission rates (see Table 20.1, “Overview of Various WLAN Standards”). Additionally, many companies implement hardware with proprietary or draft features.
Table 20.1. Overview of Various WLAN Standards¶
|
Name |
Band (GHz) |
Maximum Transmission Rate (Mbit/s) |
Note |
|---|---|---|---|
|
802.11 Legacy |
2.4 |
2 |
Outdated; virtually no end devices available |
|
802.11a |
5 |
54 |
Less interference-prone |
|
802.11b |
2.4 |
11 |
Less common |
|
802.11g |
2.4 |
54 |
Widespread, backwards-compatible with 11b |
|
802.11n |
2.4 and/or 5 |
300 |
Common |
802.11 Legacy cards are not supported by openSUSE®. Most cards using 802.11a, 802.11b, 802.11g and 802.11n are supported. New cards usually comply with the 802.11n standard, but cards using 802.11g are still available.
In wireless networking, various techniques and configurations are used to ensure fast, high-quality, and secure connections. Different operating types suit different setups. It can be difficult to choose the right authentication method. The available encryption methods have different advantages and pitfalls.
Basically, wireless networks can be classified into three network modes:
Managed networks have a managing element: the access point. In this mode (also referred to as infrastructure mode), all connections of the WLAN stations in the network run through the access point, which may also serve as a connection to an ethernet. To make sure only authorized stations can connect, various authentication mechanisms (WPA, etc) are used.
Ad-hoc networks do not have an access point. The stations communicate directly with each other, therefore an ad-hoc network is usually faster than a managed network. However, the transmission range and number of participating stations are greatly limited in ad-hoc networks. They also do not support WPA authentication. If you intend to use WPA security, you should not use Ad-Hoc_Mode.
In master mode your network card is used as the access point. It works only if your WLAN card supports this mode. Find out the details of your WLAN card on http://linux-wless.passys.nl.
Because a wireless network is much easier to intercept and compromise than a wired network, the various standards include authentication and encryption methods. In the original version of the IEEE 802.11 standard, these are described under the term WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy). However, because WEP has proven to be insecure (see Section 20.6.3, “Security”), the WLAN industry (joined under the name Wi-Fi Alliance) has defined an extension called WPA, which is supposed to eliminate the weaknesses of WEP. The later IEEE 802.11i standard includes WPA and some other authentication and encryption methods. IEEE 802.11i is also referred to as WPA2, because WPA is based on a draft version of 802.11i.
To make sure that only authorized stations can connect, various authentication mechanisms are used in managed networks:
An open system is a system that does not require authentication. Any station can join the network. Nevertheless, WEP encryption can be used, see Section 20.4, “Encryption”.
In this procedure, the WEP key is used for the authentication. However, this procedure is not recommended, because it makes the WEP key more susceptible to attacks. All an attacker needs to do is to listen long enough to the communication between the station and the access point. During the authentication process, both sides exchange the same information, once in encrypted form and once in unencrypted form. This makes it possible for the key to be reconstructed with suitable tools. Because this method makes use of the WEP key for the authentication and for the encryption, it does not enhance the security of the network. A station that has the correct WEP key can authenticate, encrypt, and decrypt. A station that does not have the key cannot decrypt received packets. Accordingly, it cannot communicate, regardless of whether it had to authenticate itself.
WPA-PSK (PSK stands for preshared key) works similarly to the Shared Key procedure. All participating stations as well as the access point need the same key. The key is 256 bits in length and is usually entered as a passphrase. This system does not need a complex key management like WPA-EAP and is more suitable for private use. Therefore, WPA-PSK is sometimes referred to as WPA “Home”.
Actually, WPA-EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol) is not an authentication system but a protocol for transporting authentication information. WPA-EAP is used to protect wireless networks in enterprises. In private networks, it is scarcely used. For this reason, WPA-EAP is sometimes referred to as WPA “Enterprise”.
WPA-EAP needs a Radius server to authenticate users. EAP offers three different methods for connecting and authenticating to the server:
Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS): TLS authentication relies on the mutual exchange of certificates for both server and client. First, the server presents its certificate to the client where it is evaluated. If the certificate is considered valid, the client in turn presents its certificate to the server. While TLS is secure, it requires a working certification management infrastructure in your network. This infrastructure is rarely found in private networks.
Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTSL)
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP-PEAP): Both TTLS and PEAP are two-stage protocols. In the first stage, a secure connection is established and in the second the client authentication data is exchanged. They require far less certification management overhead than TLS, if any.
There are various encryption methods to ensure that no unauthorized person can read the data packets that are exchanged in a wireless network or gain access to the network:
This standard makes use of the RC4 encryption algorithm, originally with a key length of 40 bits, later also with 104 bits. Often, the length is declared as 64 bits or 128 bits, depending on whether the 24 bits of the initialization vector are included. However, this standard has some weaknesses. Attacks against the keys generated by this system may be successful. Nevertheless, it is better to use WEP than to not encrypt the network at all.
Some vendors have implemented the non-standard “Dynamic WEP”. It works exactly as WEP and shares the same weaknesses, except that the key is periodically changed by a key management service.
This key management protocol defined in the WPA standard uses the same encryption algorithm as WEP, but eliminates its weakness. Because a new key is generated for every data packet, attacks against these keys are fruitless. TKIP is used together with WPA-PSK.
CCMP describes the key management. Usually, it is used in connection with WPA-EAP, but it can also be used with WPA-PSK. The encryption takes place according to AES and is stronger than the RC4 encryption of the WEP standard.
![]() | Security Risks in Wireless Networks |
|---|---|
Unencrypted WLAN connections allow third parties to intercept all network data. Be sure to protect your network traffic by using one of the supported authentication and encryption methods. Use the best possible encryption method your hardware allows. However, to use a certain encryption method, all devices in the network must support this method, otherwise they cannot communicate with each other. For example, if your router supports both WEP and WPA but the driver for your WLAN card only supports WEP, WEP is the least common denominator you can use. But even a weak encryption with WEP is better than none at all. Refer to Section 20.4, “Encryption” and Section 20.6.3, “Security” for information. | |
To configure a wireless LAN with YaST, you need to define the following parameters:
Use either a static IP address or let a DHCP server dynamically assign an IP address to the interface.
Defines how to integrate your machine into a WLAN, depending on the network topology. For background information, refer to Section 20.2, “Operating Modes”.
Unique string identifying a network.
Depending on the authentication and encryption method your network uses, you need to enter one or more keys and/or certificates.
Several input options are available for entering the respective keys: , (only available for WEP authentication methods), and .
A WLAN card is usually detected during installation. If your machine is a mobile computer, NetworkManager is usually activated by default. If instead you want to configure your WLAN card with YaST, you need to deactivate NetworkManager first:
Start YaST as user root.
In the YaST Control Center, select + to open the dialog.
If your network is currently controlled by NetworkManager, you see a warning message that the network settings cannot be edited by YaST.
To enable editing with YaST, leave the message with and on the tab, activate .
For further configuration, proceed with Section 20.5.2, “Configuration for Access Points” or Section 20.5.3, “Establishing an Ad-Hoc Network”.
Otherwise confirm your changes with to write the network configuration.
In this section, learn how to configure your WLAN card to connect to an (external) access point or how to use your WLAN card as access point if your WLAN card supports this. For configuration of networks without an access point, refer to Section 20.5.3, “Establishing an Ad-Hoc Network”.
Procedure 20.1. Configuring Your WLAN Card for Using an Access Point¶
Start YaST and open the dialog.
Switch to the tab where all network cards are listed that have been detected by the system. If you need more information about general network configuration, refer to Section 9.4, “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST”.
Choose your wireless card from the list and click to open the dialog.
On the tab, configure whether to use a dynamic or a static IP address for the machine. Usually with is fine.
Click to proceed to the dialog.
To use your WLAN card to connect to an access point, set the to .
If however you want to use your WLAN card as access point, set the to . Note that not all WLAN cards support this mode.
![]() | Using WPA-PSK or WPA-EAP |
|---|---|
If you want to use WPA-PSK or WPA-EAP authentication modes, the operating mode must be set to . | |
To connect to a certain network, enter the . Alternatively, click and select a network from the list of available wireless networks.
All stations in a wireless network need the same ESSID for communicating with each other. If no ESSID is specified, your WLAN card automatically associates with the access point that has the best signal strength.
![]() | WPA Authentication Requires an ESSID |
|---|---|
If you select authentication, a network name (ESSID) must be set. | |
Select an for your network. Which mode is suitable, depends on your WLAN card's driver and the ability of the other devices in the network.
If you have chosen to set the to , finish the configuration by clicking . Confirm the message about this potential security risk and leave the tab (showing the newly configured WLAN card) with .
If you haven chosen any of the other authentication modes, proceed with Procedure 20.2, “Entering the Encryption Details”.
Procedure 20.2. Entering the Encryption Details¶
The following authentication methods require an encryption key: , , and .
For WEP, usually only key is needed—however, up to 4 different WEP keys can be defined for your station. One of them needs to be set as the default key and is used for encryption. The others are used for decryption. Per default, a key length of 128-bit is used, but you can also choose to set the length to 64-bit.
For higher security, WPA-EAP uses a RADIUS server to authenticate
users. For authentication at the server, three different methods are
available: TLS, TTLS and PEAP. The credentials and certificates you
need for WPA-EAP depend on the authentication method used for the
RADIUS server. Ask your system administrator to provide the needed
information and credentials. YaST searches for any certificate under
/etc/cert. Therefore, save the certificates given
to you to this location and restrict access to these files to
0600 (owner read and write).
To enter the key for or :
Set the either to , or .
Enter the respective (usually only one key is used):
If you have selected , enter a word or a character string from which a key is generated according to the specified key length (per default, 128-bit) .
requests an input of 5 characters for a 64-bit key and 13 characters for a 128-bit key.
For , enter 10 characters for a 64-bit key or 26 characters for a 128-bit key in hexadecimal notation.
To adjust the key length to a lower bit rate (which might be necessary for older hardware), click and set the to bit. The dialog also shows the WEP keys that have been entered so far. Unless another key is explicitly set as default, YaST always uses the first key as default key.
To enter more keys for WEP or to modify one of the keys, select the respective entry and click . Select the and enter the key.
Confirm your changes with .
To enter a key for :
Select the input method or .
Enter the respective .
In the mode, the input must be 8 to 63 characters. In the mode, enter 64 characters.
If you have chosen authentication, click to switch to the dialog, where you enter the credentials and certificates you have been given by your network administrator.
Select the the RADIUS server uses for authentication. The details you need to enter in the following depend on the selected .
For TLS, provide , , , and . To increase security, you can also configure a used to validate the server's authenticity.
TTLS and PEAP require and , whereas and are optional.
To enter the advanced authentication dialog for your WPA-EAP setup, click .
Select the for the second stage of EAP-TTLS or EAP-PEAP communication (inner authentication). The choice of methods depends on the authentication method for the RADIUS server you selected in the previous dialog.
If the automatically-determined setting does not work for you, choose a specific to force the use of a certain PEAP implementation.
Confirm your changes with . The tab shows the details of your newly configured WLAN card.
Click to finalize the configuration and to leave the dialog.
In some cases it is useful to connect two computers equipped with a WLAN card. To establish an ad-hoc network with YaST, do the following:
Start YaST and open the dialog.
Switch to the tab, choose your wireless card from the list and click to open the dialog.
Choose and enter the following data:
:
192.168.1.1.
Change this address on the second computer to
192.168.1.2,
for example.
:
/24
: Choose any name you like.
Proceed with .
Set the to .
Choose a . This can be any name, but it has to be used on every computer in the ad-hoc network.
Select an for your network. Which mode is suitable, depends on your WLAN card's driver and the ability of the other devices in the network.
If you have chosen to set the to , finish the configuration by clicking . Confirm the message about this potential security risk and leave the tab showing the newly configured WLAN card with .
If you haven chosen any of the other authentication modes, proceed with Procedure 20.2, “Entering the Encryption Details”.
If you do not have smpppd
installed, YaST asks you to do so.
Configure the other WLAN cards in the network accordingly, using the same , the same but different IP addresses.
Usually there is no need to change the preconfigured settings when configuring your WLAN card. However, if you need detailed configuration of your WLAN connection, YaST allows you to tweak the following settings:
The specification of a channel on which the WLAN station should work. This is only needed in and modes. In mode, the card automatically searches the available channels for access points.
Depending on the performance of your network, you may want to set a certain bit rate for the transmission from one point to another. In the default setting , the system tries to use the highest possible data transmission rate. Some WLAN cards do not support the setting of bit rates.
In an environment with several access points, one of them can be preselected by specifying the MAC address.
When you are on the road, power saving technologies can help to maximize the operating time of your battery. Using power management may affect the connection quality and increase the network latency.
To access the advanced options:
Start YaST and open the dialog.
Switch to the tab, choose your wireless card from the list and click to open the dialog.
Click to proceed to the dialog.
Click .
In mode, select one of the offered channels (11 to 14, depending on your country) for the communication of your station with the other stations. In mode, determine on which your card should offer access point functionality. The default setting for this option is .
Select the to use.
Enter the MAC address of the you want to connect to.
Choose if to or not.
Confirm your changes with and click and to finish the configuration.
The following tools and tips can help to monitor and improve speed and stability as well as security aspects of your WLAN.
The package wireless-tools
contains utilities that allow to set wireless LAN specific parameters
and get statistics. See
http://www.hpl.hp.com/personal/Jean_Tourrilhes/Linux/Tools.html
for more information.
kismet (package kismet) is a
network diagnosis tool with which to listen to the WLAN packet traffic.
In this way, you can also detect any intrusion attempts in your network.
More information is available at
http://www.kismetwireless.net/ and in the manual
page.
The performance and reliability of a wireless network mainly depend on
whether the participating stations receive a clear signal from the other
stations. Obstructions like walls greatly weaken the signal. The more
the signal strength sinks, the more the transmission slows down. During
operation, check the signal strength with the
iwconfig utility on the command line (Link
Quality field) or with the NetworkManager applets provided by KDE or
GNOME. If you have problems with the signal quality, try to set up the
devices somewhere else or adjust the position of the antennas of your
access points. Auxiliary antennas that substantially improve the
reception are available for a number of PCMCIA WLAN cards. The rate
specified by the manufacturer, such as 54 Mbit/s, is a nominal
value that represents the theoretical maximum. In practice, the maximum
data throughout is no more than half this value.
The iwspy command can displays WLAN statistics:
iwspy wlan0
wlan0 Statistics collected:
00:AA:BB:CC:DD:EE : Quality:0 Signal level:0 Noise level:0
Link/Cell/AP : Quality:60/94 Signal level:-50 dBm Noise level:-140 dBm (updated)
Typical/Reference : Quality:26/94 Signal level:-60 dBm Noise level:-90 dBmIf you want to set up a wireless network, remember that anybody within the transmission range can easily access it if no security measures are implemented. Therefore, be sure to activate an encryption method. All WLAN cards and access points support WEP encryption. Although this is not entirely safe, it does present an obstacle for a potential attacker.
For private use, use WPA-PSK if available. Although Linux supports WPA on most hardware components, some drivers do not offer WPA support. It may also not be available on older access points and routers with WLAN functionality. For such devices, check if WPA can be implemented by means of a firmware update. If WPA is not available, WEP is better than no encryption. In enterprises with advanced security requirements, wireless networks should only be operated with WPA.
Use strong passwords for your authentication method. For example, the Web page https://www.grc.com/passwords.htm generates random 64 character passwords.
If your WLAN card is not automatically detected, check whether it is supported by openSUSE. A list of supported WLAN network cards is available under http://en.opensuse.org/HCL:Network_(Wireless). If your card is not supported, it may be possible to make it work using the Microsoft Windows drivers with Ndiswrapper. Please refer to http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Ndiswrapper for detailed information.
If your WLAN card fails to respond, check the following prerequisites:
Do you know the device name of the WLAN card? Usually it is
wlan0. Check with the tool
ifconfig.
Have you checked your needed firmware? Refer to
/usr/share/doc/packages/wireless-tools/README.firmware
for more information.
Is the ESSID of your router broadcasted and visible (not hidden)?
The command iwconfig can give you important information about your wireless connection. For example, the following line displays the ESSID, the wireless mode, frequency, if you signal is encrypted, the link quality, and much more:
iwconfig wlan0
wlan0 IEEE 802.11abg ESSID:"guest"
Mode:Managed Frequency:5.22GHz Access Point: 00:11:22:33:44:55
Bit Rate:54 Mb/s Tx-Power=13 dBm
Retry min limit:7 RTS thr:off Fragment thr:off
Encryption key:off
Power Management:off
Link Quality:62/92 Signal level:-48 dBm Noise level:-127 dBm
Rx invalid nwid:0 Rx invalid crypt:0 Rx invalid frag:0
Tx excessive retries:10 Invalid misc:0 Missed beacon:0You can also get the previous information with the iwlist command. For example, the following line displays the current bit rate:
iwlist wlan0 rate
wlan0 unknown bit-rate information.
Current Bit Rate=54 Mb/sIf you want an overview how many access points are available, it can also be done with the iwlist command. It gives you a list of “cells” which looks like this:
iwlist wlan0 scanning
wlan0 Scan completed:
Cell 01 - Address: 00:11:22:33:44:55
Channel:40
Frequency:5.2 GHz (Channel 40)
Quality=67/70 Signal level=-43 dBm
Encryption key: off
ESSID:"Guest"
Bit Rates: 6 Mb/s; 9 Mb/s; 12 Mb/s; 18 Mb/s;
24 Mb/s; 36 Mb/s; 48 Mb/s
Mode: Master
Extra:tsf=0000111122223333
Extra: Last beacon: 179ms ago
IE: Unknown: ...Modern laptops usually have a network card and a WLAN card. If you configured both devices with DHCP (automatic address assignment), you may encounter problems with the name resolution and the default gateway. This is evident from the fact that you can ping the router but cannot surf the Internet. The Support Database features an article on this subject at http://old-en.opensuse.org/SDB:Name_Resolution_Does_Not_Work_with_Several_Concurrent_DHCP_Clients.
Several drivers are available for devices with
Prism2 chips. The various cards work more or
less smoothly with the various drivers. With these cards, WPA is only
possible with the hostap driver. If such a card does not work properly
or not at all or you want to use WPA, read
/usr/share/doc/packages/wireless-tools/README.prism2.
More information can be found on the following pages:
The Internet pages of Jean Tourrilhes, who developed the Wireless Tools for Linux, present a wealth of useful information about wireless networks.
Useful hands-on information about mobile computers under Linux.
More information about Linux on laptops.
Lists supported WLAN network cards.
Offers a work-around for running unsupported WLAN cards with the Microsoft Windows using Ndiswrapper.
Contents
NetworkManager is the ideal solution for laptops and other portable computers. It supports state-of-the-art encryption types and standards for network connections, including connections to 802.1X protected networks. 802.1X is the “IEEE Standard for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks—Port-Based Network Access Control”. With NetworkManager, you do not need to worry about configuring network interfaces and switching between wired or wireless networks when you are moving. NetworkManager can automatically connect to known wireless networks or manage several network connections in parallel—the fastest connection is then used as default. Furthermore, you can manually switch between available networks and manage your network connection using an applet in the system tray.
Instead of only one connection being active, multiple connections may be active at once. This enables you to unplug your laptop from an Ethernet and remain connected via a wireless connection.
NetworkManager provides a sophisticated and intuitive user interface, which enables users to easily switch their network environment. However, NetworkManager is not a suitable solution in the following cases:
Your computer provides network services for other computers in your network, for example, it is a DHCP or DNS server.
Your computer is a Xen server or your system is a virtual system inside Xen.
On laptop computers, NetworkManager is enabled by default. However, it can be at any time enabled or disabled in the YaST Network Settings module.
Run YaST and go to +.
The dialog opens. Go to the tab.
To configure and manage your network connections with NetworkManager, select .
Click .
After choosing the method for managing network connections, set up your network card using automatic configuration via DHCP or a static IP address or configure your modem (for dial-up connections, use +). To configure an internal or USB ISDN modem, select +. To configure an internal or USB DSL modem, select +.
Find a detailed description of the network configuration with YaST in Section 9.4, “Configuring a Network Connection with YaST” and Chapter 20, Wireless LAN.
After having enabled NetworkManager, configure your network connections with the NetworkManager as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”.
If you want to deactivate NetworkManager and control network the traditional way, choose the option in the field.
After having enabled NetworkManager in YaST, configure your network connections with the NetworkManager front-ends available in KDE and GNOME. The network configuration dialogs for both front-ends are very similar. They show tabs for all types of network connections, such as wired, wireless, mobile broadband, DSL, and VPN connections. On each tab, you can add, edit or delete connections of that type. In the KDE configuration dialog, the appropriate tabs are only active if the connection type is available on your system (depending on hardware and software). By default, KNetworkManager also displays comprehensive tooltips for the input fields and options available on each tab.
![]() | Bluetooth Connections |
|---|---|
At the moment, Bluetooth connections cannot be configured with NetworkManager. | |
To open the network configuration dialog in GNOME, open the main menu and click the entry at the right. Alternatively, press Alt+F2 and enter nm-connection-editor or select + in the GNOME Control Center.
If you use KDE, open the main menu and click . In the section select + to open the network configuration dialog. Alternatively, press Alt+F2 and enter kcm_networkmanagement or .
Alternatively, you can also start the configuration dialogs from the NetworkManager applet in the system tray. In KDE, left-click the icon and select . In GNOME, right-click the icon and select .
![]() | Availability of Options |
|---|---|
Depending on your system set-up, you may not be allowed to configure
connections. In a secured environment, some options might be locked or
require | |
Procedure 21.1. Adding or Editing Connections¶
When configuring network connections with NetworkManager, you can also define
system connections that can be shared by all users.
In contrast to user connections, system connections
are made available right after NetworkManager is started—before any users
log in. For more details about both types of connections, refer to
Section 21.7.1, “User and System Connections”.
Currently, the system connection option is not
available in KDE. To set up system connections, you need to use YaST
in this case.
![]() | Hidden Networks |
|---|---|
To connect to a “hidden” network (a network that does not broadcast its service) you have to know the Service Set Identifier or Extended Service Set Identifier (SSID or ESSID) of the network because it cannot be detected automatically. | |
To add a new connection or edit an existing one, click the tab for the connection type you want to use and click or choose an existing connection and click .
Enter a and your connection details.
You can tie the connection to a certain device, if more than one physical device per connection type is available (for example, your machine is equipped with two ethernet cards or two wireless cards).
If you use KDE, do so by using the option. If you use GNOME, enter the of the device you want to tie the connection to and confirm your settings.
If you want NetworkManager to automatically use a certain connection, activate for this connection.
To turn a connection into a system connection
activate (GNOME). To create
and edit system connections, root permission is required.
After having confirmed your changes, the newly configured network connection appears in the list of available networks you get by left-clicking the NetworkManager applet.
The KDE front-end for NetworkManager is the NetworkManager plasmoid. If the network has been set up for NetworkManager control, the plasmoid usually starts automatically with the desktop environment and is shown as an icon in the system tray.
If your system tray does not show any network connection icon, the plasmoid is probably not started. Click on the and choose . Double-click on the entry and click on the again.
The NetworkManager front-end only shows wireless networks for which you have configured a connection. It hides connections when you are out of range of a wireless network, or when the network cable is disconnected, thus always giving you a clear view of which connections may be used.
If your computer is connected to an existing network with a network cable, use the NetworkManager front-end to manage the network connection(s).
Left-click the NetworkManager icon to show a menu with available and . Connections are being displayed in the right half of the plasmoid window, while interfaces show up in the left half. The connection and interface currently being used is marked with a blue globe.
Click on listed in the right half of the plasmoid window to get detailed information and statistics for that interface. Switch back to the interface overview by clicking on the blue arrow icon.
To disconnect an active connection, click on the red icon for the in the right half of the plasmoid window.
If you want to use a different configuration with the wired network, click and add another wired connection as described in Procedure 21.1, “Adding or Editing Connections”. Click the NetworkManager icon and select the newly configured connection to activate it.
To switch off all network connections, both wired and wireless, click the NetworkManager icon and uncheck .
By default the NetworkManager frontend only lists connections that are already configured. The signal strength of each network is indicated by a series of bars, each one representing 10%. Encrypted wireless networks are marked with a green (WPA) or yellow (WEP) shield, while open networks are marked with a red shield.
Procedure 21.2. Connecting to a Wireless Network
Click to display all visible wireless networks available.
Left-click on the network of your choice to open the network connection dialog. To connect to a network that does not broadcast its service set identifier ((E)SSID), click on and press Enter. Fill in the connection details and proceed with .
Based on your security settings for NetworkManager (see Section 21.7.2, “Storing Passwords and Credentials” for details), you may have to provide your KWallet password.
NetworkManager automatically connects to the configured network.
Procedure 21.3. Managing Active Wireless Connections
Click on listed in the right half of the plasmoid window to get detailed information and statistics for that interface. Switch back to the interface overview by clicking on the blue arrow icon.
To disconnect an active connection, click on the red icon for the .
To completely disable wireless networking, uncheck . This can be useful if you are on a plane or in any other environment where wireless networking is not allowed.
A wireless network that has been chosen explicitly will remain connected as long as possible. If a network cable is plugged in during that time, any connections that have been set to will be connected, while the wireless connection remains up.
If your wireless card supports access point mode, you can use NetworkManager for configuration.
![]() | Availability of Options |
|---|---|
Depending on your system set-up, you may not be allowed to configure
connections. In a secured environment, some options might be locked or
require | |
Start the dialog for configuring network connections as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections” and a connection.
On the tab provide a and an . Set +.
Set the encryption on the tab.
![]() | Unprotected Wireless Networks Are a Security Risk |
|---|---|
If you set to | |
On the tab, make sure the option is set to .
Confirm your configuration with .
In GNOME, NetworkManager can be controlled with the GNOME NetworkManager applet. If the network is set up for NetworkManager control, the applet usually starts automatically with the desktop environment and is shown as an icon in the system tray.
If your system tray does not show any network connection icon, the applet is probably not started. Press Alt+F2 and enter nm-applet to start it manually.
If your computer is connected to an existing network with a network cable, use the NetworkManager applet to choose the network connection.
Left-click the applet icon to show a menu with available networks. The currently used connection is listed on top of the menu, followed by other active connections. Inactive connections are listed under .
Right-click the applet and choose to get detailed information on all active interfaces.
To disconnect an active connection, left-click the applet and choose its entry.
If you want to use a different configuration with the wired network, right-click the applet, choose and add another wired connection as described in Procedure 21.1, “Adding or Editing Connections”. Click the NetworkManager icon and select the newly configured connection to activate it.
To switch off all network connections, both wired and wireless, right-click the applet icon and uncheck .
Available visible wireless networks are listed in the GNOME NetworkManager applet menu under and . The signal strength of each network is also shown in the menu. Encrypted wireless networks are marked with a lock icon.
Procedure 21.4. Connecting to a Wireless Network
To connect to a wireless network, left-click the applet icon and choose an entry from the list of available wireless networks.
If the network is encrypted, a dialog opens. It shows the type of encryption the network uses () and holds a number of input fields according to the respective encryption and authentication settings. Enter the appropriate credentials.
To connect to a network that does not broadcast its service set identifier ((E)SSID) and therefore cannot be detected automatically, left-click the NetworkManager icon and choose .
In the dialog that opens, enter the ESSID and set encryption parameters on the tab if necessary.
To disable wireless networking, right-click the applet icon and uncheck . This can be useful if you are on a plane or in any other environment where wireless networking is not allowed.
A wireless network that has been chosen explicitly will remain connected as long as possible. If a network cable is plugged in during that time, any connections that have been set to will be connected, while the wireless connection remains up.
If your wireless card supports access point mode, you can use NetworkManager for configuration.
![]() | Availability of Options |
|---|---|
Depending on your system set-up, you may not be allowed to configure
connections. In a secured environment, some options might be locked or
require | |
Click the NetworkManager applet and select .
![]() |
Enter a and set the encryption to use with the drop-down list.
![]() | Unprotected Wireless Networks Are a Security Risk |
|---|---|
If you set to
| |
NetworkManager supports several Virtual Private Network (VPN) technologies. For each technology, openSUSE comes with a base package providing the generic support for NetworkManager. In addition to that, you also need to install the respective desktop-specific package for your applet.
To use this VPN technology, install
NetworkManager-novellvpn and
NetworkManager-novellvpn-gnome.
NovellVPN support for KDE is not available yet, but is currently being worked on.
To use this VPN technology, install
NetworkManager-openvpn and
NetworkManager-openvpn-kde4 or
NetworkManager-openvpn-gnome.
To use this VPN technology, install
NetworkManager-vpnc and
NetworkManager-vpnc-kde4 or
NetworkManager-vpnc-gnome.
To use this VPN technology, install
NetworkManager-pptp and
NetworkManager-pptp-kde4 or
NetworkManager-pptp-gnome.
After you have installed the packages, configure your VPN connection as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”.
NetworkManager distinguishes two types of wireless connections, trusted and untrusted. A trusted connection is any network that you explicitly selected in the past. All others are untrusted. Trusted connections are identified by the name and MAC address of the access point. Using the MAC address ensures that you cannot use a different access point with the name of your trusted connection.
NetworkManager periodically scans for available wireless networks. If multiple trusted networks are found, the most recently used is automatically selected. NetworkManager waits for your selection in case that all networks are untrusted.
If the encryption setting changes but the name and MAC address remain the same, NetworkManager attempts to connect, but first you are asked to confirm the new encryption settings and provide any updates, such as a new key.
If you switch from using a wireless connection to offline mode, NetworkManager blanks the ESSID. This ensures that the card is disconnected.
NetworkManager knows two types of connections: user and
system connections. User connections are connections
that become available to NetworkManager when the first user logs in. Any required
credentials are asked from the user and when the user logs out, the
connections are disconnected and removed from NetworkManager. Connections that are
defined as system connection can be shared by all users and are made
available right after NetworkManager is started—before any users log in. In
case of system connections, all credentials must be provided at the time
the connection is created. Such system connections can be used to
automatically connect to networks that require authorization. For
information how to configure user or system connections with NetworkManager, refer
to Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”.
For KDE, configuring system connections with NetworkManager are currently not supported (use YaST instead).
If you do not want to re-enter your credentials each time you want to connect to an encrypted network, you can use the desktop-specific tools GNOME Keyring Manager or KWalletManager to store your credentials encrypted on the disk, secured by a master password.
Under KDE, you can configure if and how to store your credentials. To do so, left-click the NetworkManager icon and select . Click + and select one of the following options:
This is useful if you are working in an environment where storing credentials is considered a security risk.
If you choose this option, your passwords are stored unencrypted in the respective connection file that is created for each connection.
![]() | Security Risk |
|---|---|
Storing your network credentials unencrypted is a security risk. Everybody who has access to your computer can reuse your connectivity and intercept your network connection. | |
If you choose this options, your credentials are stored in KWalletManager.
In the following, find some frequently asked questions about configuring special network options with NetworkManager.
By default, connections in NetworkManager are device type-specific: they apply to all physical devices with the same type. If more than one physical device per connection type is available (for example, your machine is equipped with two ethernet cards), you can tie a connection to a certain device.
To do so in GNOME, first look up the MAC address of your device by using the output of the command line tool ifconfig). Then start the dialog for configuring network connections and choose the connection you want to modify. On the or tab, enter the of the device and confirm your changes.
If you use KDE, start the dialog for configuring network connections and choose the connection you want to modify. On the or tab, use the option to select the network interface to which to tie the connection.
When multiple access points with different wireless bands (a/b/g/n) are available, the access point with the strongest signal is automatically chosen by default. To override this, use the field when configuring wireless connections.
The Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) uniquely identifies each Basic Service Set. In an infrastructure Basic Service Set, the BSSID is the MAC address of the wireless access point. In an independent (ad-hoc) Basic Service Set, the BSSID is a locally administered MAC address generated from a 46-bit random number.
Start the dialog for configuring network connections as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”. Choose the wireless connection you want to modify and click . On the tab, enter the BSSID.
The primary device (the device which is connected to the Internet) does not need any special configuration. However, you need to configure the device that is connected to the local hub or machine as follows:
Start the dialog for configuring network connections as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”. Choose the connection you want to modify and click . If you are using GNOME, switch to the tab and from the drop-down list, choose . If you are using KDE, switch to the tab and from the drop-down list, choose . That will enable IP traffic forwarding and run a DHCP server on the device. Confirm your changes in NetworkManager.
As the DCHP server uses port 67, make sure that it is not blocked by the firewall: On the machine sharing the connections, start YaST and select +. Switch to the category. If is not already shown as , select from and click . Confirm your changes in YaST.
In case a DHCP server provides invalid DNS information (and/or routes), you can override it. Start the dialog for configuring network connections as described in Section 21.3, “Configuring Network Connections”. Choose the connection you want to modify and click . If you are using GNOME, switch to the tab, and from the drop-down list, choose . If you are using KDE, switch to the tab, and from the drop-down list, choose . Enter the DNS information in the and fields. From the drop-down list at the top of the tab, select if you want to . Confirm your changes.
Define a system connection that can be used for
such purposes. For more information, refer to
Section 21.7, “NetworkManager and Security”.
Connection problems can occur. Some common problems related to NetworkManager include the applet not starting or a missing VPN option. Methods for resolving and preventing these problems depend on the tool used.
The GNOME and KDE NetworkManager applets start automatically if the network is
set up for NetworkManager control. If the applet does not start, check if NetworkManager
is enabled in YaST as described in
Section 21.2, “Enabling NetworkManager”. Then make sure that the appropriate
package for your desktop environment is also installed. If you are
using KDE 4, the package is
plasmoid-networkmanagement.
For GNOME users the package is
NetworkManager-gnome.
If the desktop applet is installed but is not running for some reason, start it manually. Under GNOME press Alt+F2 and enter nm-applet. Under KDE click on the and choose . Double-click on the entry and click on the again.
Support for NetworkManager, applets, and VPN for NetworkManager is distributed in separate packages. If your NetworkManager applet does not include the VPN option, check if the packages with NetworkManager support for your VPN technology are installed. For more information, see Section 21.6, “NetworkManager and VPN”.
If you have configured your network connection correctly and all other
components for the network connection (router, etc.) are also up and
running, it sometimes helps to restart the network interfaces on your
computer. To do so, log in to a command line as root and run
rcnetwork restart.
More information about NetworkManager can be found on the following Web sites and directories:
Also check out the information in the following directories for the latest information about NetworkManager and the GNOME and KDE NetworkManager applets:
/usr/share/doc/packages/NetworkManager/,
/usr/share/doc/packages/NetworkManager-gnome/.
Contents
Abstract
openSUSE® comes with support for Tablet PCs. In the following, learn how to install and configure your Tablet PC and discover some useful Linux* applications which accept input from digital pens.
The following Tablet PCs are supported:
Tablet PCs with serial and USB Wacom tablet (pen based), touch-screen or multi-touch devices.
Tablet PCs with FinePoint devices, such as Gateway C210X/M280E/CX2724 or HP Compaq TC1000.
Tablet PCs with touch screen devices, such as Asus R2H, Clevo TN120R, Fujitsu Siemens Computers P-Series, LG C1, Samsung Q1/Q1-Ultra.
After you have installed the Tablet PC packages and configured your digitizer correctly, input with the pen (also called a stylus) can be used for the following actions and applications:
Logging in to KDM or GDM
Unlocking your screen on the KDE and GNOME desktops
Actions that can also be triggered by other pointing devices (such as mouse or touch pad), for example, moving the cursor on the screen, starting applications, closing, resizing and moving windows, shifting window focus and dragging and dropping objects
Using gesture recognition in applications of the X Window System
Drawing with GIMP
Taking notes or sketching with applications like Jarnal or Xournal or editing larger amounts of text with Dasher
The packages needed for Tablet PCs are included in the
TabletPC installation pattern—if this is
selected during installation, the following packages should already be
installed on your system:
cellwriter: a character-based
hardwriting input panel
jarnal: a Java-based note
taking application
xournal: an application for
note taking and sketching
xstroke: a gesture
recognition program for the X Window System
xvkbd: a virtual keyboard for
the X Window System
x11-input-fujitsu: the X
input module for Fujitsu P-Series tablets
x11-input-evtouch: the X
input module for some Tablet PCs with touch screens
xorg-x11-driver-input: the X
input module for input devices, including the module for Wacom devices.
If these packages are not installed, manually install the packages you
need from command line or select the TabletPC
pattern for installation in YaST.
During installation, your tablet or touch device is configured by default. If you have trouble with the configuration of your Wacom device, you use xsetwacom on the command line to change the settings.
To log in to the KDE or GNOME desktop or to unlock the screen, you can either enter your username and password as usual or via the virtual keyboard (xvkbd) displayed below the login field. To configure the keyboard or to access the integrated help, click the field at the left lower corner and open the xvkbd main menu.
If your input is not visible (or is not transferred to the window where you need it), redirect the focus by clicking the key in xvkbd and then clicking into the window that should get the keyboard events.
If you want to use xvkbd after login, start it from the main menu or with xvkbd from a shell.
Use KRandRTray (KDE) or gnome-display-properties (GNOME) to rotate or resize your display manually on the fly. Both KRandRTray and gnome-display-properties are applets for the RANDR extension of the X server.
Start KRandRTray or gnome-display-properties from the main menu, or enter krandrtray or gnome-display-properties to start the applet from a shell. After you have started the applet, the applet icon is usually added to your system tray. If the gnome-display-properties icon does not automatically appear in the system tray, make sure is activated in the dialog.
To rotate your display with KRandRTray, right-click the icon and select . Select the desired orientation from the configuration dialog.
To rotate your display with gnome-display-properties, right-click the icon and select the desired orientation. Your display is immediately tilted to the new direction. The orientation of the graphics tablet changes also, so it can still interpret the movement of the pen correctly.
If you have problems changing the orientation of your desktop, refer to Section 22.7, “Troubleshooting” for more information.
openSUSE includes both CellWriter and xstroke for gesture recognition. Both applications accept gestures executed with the pen or other pointing devices as input for applications on the X Window System.
With CellWriter, you can write characters into a grid of cells—the writing is instantly recognized on a character basis. After you have finished writing, you can send the input to the currently focused application. Before you can use CellWriter for gesture recognition, the application needs to be trained to recognize your handwriting: You need to train each character of a certain map of keys (untrained characters are not activated and thus cannot be used).
Procedure 22.1. Training CellWriter
Start CellWriter from the main menu or with cellwriter from the command line. On the first start, CellWriter automatically starts in the training mode. In training mode it shows a set of characters of the currently chosen key map.
Enter the gesture you would like to use for a character into the respective character's cell. With the first input, the background changes its color to white, whereas the character itself is shown in light gray. Repeat the gesture multiple times until the character changes its color to black. Untrained characters are shown on a light gray or brown background (depending on the desktop's color scheme).
Repeat this step until you have trained CellWriter for all characters you need.
If you want to train CellWriter for another language, click the button and select a language from the tab. the configuration dialog. Click the button and select the key map from the drop-down box at the bottom right corner of the window. Now repeat your training for the new map of keys.
After having finished the training for the map of keys, click the button to switch to the normal mode.
In the normal mode, the CellWriter windows shows a couple of empty cells in which to enter the gestures. The characters are not sent to another application until you click the button, so you can correct or delete characters before you use them as input. Characters that have been recognized with a low degree of confidence will appear highlighted. To correct your input, use the context menu that appears on right-clicking a cell. To delete a character, either use your pen's eraser, or middle-click with the mouse to clear the cell. After finishing your input in CellWriter, define which application should receive the input by clicking into the application's window. Then send the input to the application by clicking .
If you click the button in CellWriter, you get a virtual keyboard that can be used instead of the handwriting recognition.
To hide CellWriter, close the CellWriter window. The application now appears as icon in your system tray. To show the input window again, click the icon in the system tray.
With xstroke, you can use gestures with your pen or other pointing devices as input for applications on the X Window System. The xstroke alphabet is a unistroke alphabet that resembles the Graffiti* alphabet. When activated, xstroke sends the input to the currently focused window.
Start xstroke from the main menu or with xstroke from a shell. This adds a pencil icon to your system tray.
Start the application for which you want to create text input with the pen (for example, a terminal window, a text editor or an LibreOffice Writer).
To activate the gesture recognition mode, click the pencil icon once.
Perform some gestures on the graphics tablet with the pen or another pointing device. xstroke captures the gestures and transfers them to text that appears in the application window that has the focus.
To switch focus to a different window, click the desired window with the pen and hold for a moment (or use the keyboard shortcut defined in your desktop's control center).
To deactivate the gesture recognition mode, click the pencil icon again.
To create drawings with the pen, you can use a professional graphics editor like GIMP or try one of the note-taking applications, Xournal or Jarnal. With both Xournal and Jarnal, you can take notes, create drawings or comment PDF files with the pen. As a Java-based application available for several platforms, Jarnal also offers basic collaboration features. For more information, refer to http://www.dklevine.com/general/software/tc1000/jarnal-net.htm. When saving your contents, Jarnal stores the data in an archive format (*.jaj) that also contains a file in SVG format.
Start Jarnal or Xournal from the main menu or by entering jarnal or xournal in a shell. To comment a PDF file in Xournal, for example, select + and open the PDF file from your file system. Use the pen or another pointing device to annotate the PDF and save your changes with +.
Dasher is another useful application. It was designed for situations where keyboard input is impractical or unavailable. With a bit of training, you can rapidly enter larger amounts of text using only the pen (or other input devices—it can even be driven with an eye tracker).
Start Dasher from the main menu or with dasher from a shell. Move your pen in one direction and the application starts to zoom into the letters on the right side. From the letters passing the cross hairs in the middle, the text is created or predicted and is printed to the upper part of the window. To stop or start writing, click the display once with the pen. Modify the zooming speed at the bottom of the window.
The Dasher concept works for many languages. For more information, refer to the Dasher Web site, which offers comprehensive documentation, demonstrations and training texts. Find it at http://www.inference.phy.cam.ac.uk/dasher/
Occasionally, the virtual keyboard is not displayed on the login screen. To solve this, restart the X server by pressing Ctrl+Alt+<— or press the appropriate key on your Tablet PC (if you use a slate model without integrated keyboard). If the virtual keyboard still does not show, connect an external keyboard to your slate model and log in using the hardware keyboard.
With the xrandr command, you can change the
orientation of your display from within a shell. Enter xrandr
--help to view the options available. To
simultaneously change the orientation of your graphics tablet, the
command needs to be modified as described below:
For normal orientation (0° rotation):
xrandr -o normal && xsetwacom --set "Serial Wacom Tablet" Rotate NONE
For 90° rotation (clockwise, portrait):
xrandr -o right && xsetwacom --set "Serial Wacom Tablet" Rotate CW
For 180° rotation (landscape):
xrandr -o inverted && xsetwacom --set "Serial Wacom Tablet" Rotate HALF
For 270° rotation (counterclockwise, portrait):
xrandr -o left && xsetwacom set --"Serial Wacom Tablet" Rotate CCW
Note that the commands above depend on the output of the
xsetwacom list command. Replace "Serial
Wacom Tablet" with the output for the stylus or the touch
device. If you have a Wacom device with touch support (you can use
your fingers on the tablet to move the cursor), you need to rotate
also the touch device.
Some of the applications mentioned here do not offer integrated online
help, but you can find some useful information about usage and
configuration in your installed system in
/usr/share/doc/package/
or on the Web:
packagename
For the Xournal manual, refer to http://xournal.sourceforge.net/manual.html
The Jarnal documentation is located at http://www.dklevine.com/general/software/tc1000/jarnal.htm#documentation
Find the xstroke man page at http://davesource.com/Projects/xstroke/xstroke.txt
Find a HOWTO for configuring X on the Linux Wacom Web site: http://linuxwacom.sourceforge.net/index.php/howto/x11
Find a very informative Web site about the Dasher project at http://www.inference.phy.cam.ac.uk/dasher/
Find more information and documentation about CellWriter at http://risujin.org/cellwriter/
Information on gnome-display-properties can be found at http://old-en.opensuse.org/GNOME/Multiscreen
Contents
Abstract
If using multiple operating systems (OS) simultaneously, it is often necessary to exchange files among them. Different systems may reside on different partitions on the same machine or on different machines across your network. There are various approaches to file exchange with different basic instructions and possible pitfalls.
![]() | Scenarios for Private Home Networks Only |
|---|---|
Do not use the following scenarios in networks other than your own private and trusted home network that is protected by a firewall. Implementing high security measures for the configurations featured in the following sections is beyond the scope of this document. | |
Exchanging data may encompass either one of the following tasks:
To copy your data means to transfer your data from one system to the other. This results in identical objects on both the source and the target system.
Synchronizing data is a special way to copy data. If you change a file on one computer, it is automatically changed on the other computer after the synchronization. For example, think of a laptop that contains your modified files and you want to have the same contents on your desktop computer.
Sharing your files means establishing a client/server relationship. The server provides files that can be accessed by the client. When changing a file, you modify it on the server, not locally on the client. File servers typically serve a large number of clients simultaneously.
The following list provides a number of possible scenarios involving file transfer:
Many users have an operating system preinstalled by their vendor and run Linux in a separate partition. Refer to Section 23.4, “Accessing Files on Different OS on the Same Computer” for more information.
Save the data to any media (CD, DVD, USB flash drive, or external hard disk) and connect these to the target machine to copy your files. This solution is inexpensive, intuitive, and straightforward. However, you need the appropriate drives or ports on both computers. Additionally the operating systems have to understand the filesystem.
Media are suited to occasional file transfers with limited file size. If you need a more permanent solution, consider connecting them with a network.
Set up a server of any kind on one computer, connect the server and the client, and transfer the files from server to client. Choose from various protocols available and pick the one that best matches your needs and expertise.
The client/server setup requires more expertise and maintenance efforts, but is better suited to routine transfer needs and exchange with multiple systems. If you are looking for a permanent file exchange, choose a client/server-based method. This method does not impose any limits on the amount of data that can be transferred. See Section 23.2, “Access Methods”.
This scenario requires connection of different networks and is beyond the scope of this document. Transfer files as if the computers were not connected to a network.
The following methods and protocols are well-suited to file transfer and sharing.
Use FTP (File Transfer Protocol) if you need to exchange files very often and with different users. Set up an FTP server on one system and access it with clients. There are many graphical client applications available for FTP on Windows*, MacOS, and Linux. Depending on how your FTP server is used, enable read and write permissions. See Section 23.5.4, “Copying Files with FTP” for more details on FTP.
NFS (Network File System) is a client/server system. A server exports one or more directories that can be imported by a client. For more information, see Chapter 14, Sharing File Systems with NFS.
Use NFS if you share files very often and for different users. Generally, this protocol is more common in the Linux world than in the Windows world. An NFS export integrates well into your Linux system and you can browse the imported directory structure like any other folder on your local machine. Depending on your configuration, enable either read or write permissions or both on the server. In general, for a home user it makes sense to allow read and write access.
Use rsync to transfer regularly large volumes of data that does not change considerably. It is available on Linux and Windows. A typical use case for rsync is managing data backups. Refer to the manual page of the rsync command and Section 23.5.2, “Transferring Files with rsync” for more information.
Unison is an alternative to rsync. It is used to regularly synchronize files between different computers but has the advantage to behave bidirectionally. Refer to the manual page of the Unison command and Section 23.5.3, “Transferring Files with Unison” for more information. Unison is available on Linux and Windows.
CSync is an alternative to Unison. Just like Unison it synchronizes files bidirectionally. However, its architecture is modular so it can be extended with plug-ins. See http://www.csync.org for more details.
Samba is a client/server system and an implementation of the SMB protocol. It is usually used in Windows networks, but is supported by several operating systems. Refer to Chapter 15, Samba for more information about Samba.
Use Samba if you need to share files very often and with different users, especially to Windows systems. Samba as a Linux-only solution is uncommon, use NFS instead. For more information about setting up a Samba server, refer to Section 23.8, “Sharing Files between Linux and Windows with Samba”.
SSH (Secure Shell) enables a secure connection between computer. The SSH suite consists of several commands and uses public key encryption to authenticate users. For more information, see Chapter 12, SSH: Secure Network Operations (↑Security Guide).
Use SSH if you copy files occasionally over an untrusted network and if you are the only user doing so. Although there are graphical user interfaces available, SSH is mainly considered a command line utility and is available on Linux and Windows.
This section describes one way to exchange files between two computers using an Ethernet crossover cable.
You need:
Ethernet crossover cable. For further information see: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethernet_crossover_cable
openSUSE on both computers
An established connection.
The SSH daemon running on both machines. To start the service, run the
command rcsshd start as root.
Proceed as follows:
Procedure 23.1. GNOME
Start Nautilus.
Click on +.
Set the to .
Enter the IP address and port of the remote computer (default is 22).
Specify the folder you want to open on the remote Computer.
Click .
Procedure 23.2. KDE
Start Dolphin.
Click on , . Re-attach the pane if it is not available with ++.
Set the type of network to .
Enter any name and the correct user, IP address, port (default is 22) and folder of the remote Computer. It is also possible to create an icon for this connection by enabling the checkbox below. This connection icon appears in the tab in Dolphin.
Click on a dialog box opens and requests the password.
A new window containing the files of the remote computer will be opened.
New computers generally ship with a preinstalled operating system, usually Windows. If you have installed Linux on a different partition, you might want to exchange files between the different operating systems.
Windows cannot read Linux partitions by default. If you want to exchange files between these two operating systems, you have to create an “exchange partition”. For a more direct approach, see http://www.fs-driver.org/ to get a driver supporting an ext2 filesystem on Windows. The following file systems are used by Windows and can be accessed from a Linux machine:
Various flavors of this file system are used by MS-DOS and Windows 95 and 98. You can create this type of file system with YaST. It is possible to read and write files on FAT partitions from Linux. The size of a FAT partition (and even the maximum size of a single file) is subject to restrictions, depending on the FAT version. See http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/VFAT for more information about FAT file systems.
The NTFS file system is used by Windows. openSUSE includes write access support to the NTFS file system. See http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:NTFS for more information about NTFS-3g.
During the installation of openSUSE, your Windows partitions are detected. After starting your Linux system, the Windows partitions usually are mounted. These are possible ways of accessing your Windows data:
Press Alt+F2 and enter sysinfo:/. A new window opens
displaying the characteristics of your machine. lists your partitions. Look at those that are of
the file system type ntfs
or vfat and click these
entries. If the partition is not already mounted, KDE mounts the
partition now and displays the contents.
Just list the contents of /windows to see one or
more directories containing your Windows drives. The directory
/windows/c maps to the Windows
C:\ drive, for example.
![]() | Changing the Accessibility of Windows Partitions |
|---|---|
Initially, Windows partitions are mounted read-only for normal users to
avoid accidental damage to the file system. To grant normal users full
access to a mounted Windows partition, change the mount behavior of this
Windows partition. Refer to the manual page of the
mount command for more information on mount options
for vfat and to the manual page of | |
Linux offers a rich set of protocols you can use to copy files between
computers. Which protocol you use depends on how much effort you want to
invest and whether it needs to be compatible with future Windows
installations. The following sections feature various methods to transfer
files from and to Linux computers. Make sure that you have a working
network connection, because otherwise they will not work. All scenarios
rely on working name resolution in the network. If your network does not
include a name service, use IP addresses directly or add the IP addresses
along with respective hostnames to /etc/hosts on all
clients.
The following example IP addresses and hostnames are used across this section:
|
Target Hostname |
|
|
Target IP |
|
|
Source Hostname |
|
|
Source IP |
|
|
User |
|
The following requirements must be met on both computers that are accessed via SSH:
If you use a hostname, make sure each hostname is listed in
/etc/hosts on both computers (see
Section 9.6.1.6, “/etc/hosts”.) If you use SSH with IP
addresses, you do not need to change anything.
If you use a firewall, open the SSH port. To do so, start YaST, and select +. Go to and check whether is displayed as part of the list. If this is not the case, select SSH from and click . Apply your changes and leave YaST with and .
To copy files from one computer to another, you need to know where the
files are located. For example, to copy the single file
/srv/foo_file from computer
jupiter.example.com to the current directory, use the
following scp command (the dot represents the current
directory as the copy target location):
scp tux@jupiter.example.com:/srv/foo_file .
To copy a whole directory structure, use the recursive mode of scp:
scp -r tux@jupiter.example.com:/srv/foo_directory .
If your network does not provide name resolution, use the server's IP address directly:
scp tux@192.168.2.100:/srv/foo_file .
If you do not know exactly where your files are, use the sftp command. Copying files in KDE or GNOME with SFTP is very simple. Proceed as follows:
Press Alt+F2.
Enter the following at the address prompt (correct it to your own values):
sftp://tux@jupiter.example.com
Confirm the question regarding of authenticity and enter the password
of tux on
jupiter.example.com.
Drag and drop the desired files or directories to your desktop or a local directory.
KDE provides another protocol called fish that can be
used if sftp is not available. The use of this
protocol is similar to sftp. Just replace the
sftp protocol prefix of the URL with
fish:
fish://tux@jupiter.example.com
rsync is useful for archiving or copying data and can also be used as a daemon to provide directories to the network (see Procedure 23.3, “Advanced Setup for rsync Synchronization”).
Before using rsync to synchronize files and directories between different computers, make sure that the following requirements are met:
The package rsync is
installed.
Identical users are available on both systems.
Enough disk space is available on the server.
If you want to benefit from rsync's full potential, make sure that rsyncd is installed on the system to use as the server.
The basic mode of operation of rsync does not require any special
configuration. rsync mirrors complete directories onto another system.
Its usage is not much different from a regular copying tool, such as
scp. The following command creates a backup of the home directory of
tux on a backup
server called jupiter:
rsync -Hbaz -e ssh /home/tux/ tux@jupiter:backup
Use the following command to restore your backup (without option
-b):
rsync -Haz -e ssh tux@jupiter:backup /home/tux/
Start the rsyncd daemon on one of your systems to make use of the full functionality of rsync. In this mode, it is possible to create synchronization points (modules) that can be accessed without an account. To use the rsyncd daemon, proceed as follows:
Procedure 23.3. Advanced Setup for rsync Synchronization¶
Log in as root and install the
rsync package.
Configure your synchronization points in
/etc/rsyncd.conf. Add a point with its name in
brackets and add the path keyword like in the
following example:
[FTP] path = /srv/ftp comment = An Example
Start the rsyncd daemon as root with rcrsyncd
start. To start the rsync service automatically during each
system boot, run insserv rsyncd.
List all files located in the /srv/ftp directory
(note the double colon):
rsync -avz jupiter::FTP
Initiate the transfer by providing a target directory (in this example, the current directory is represented by a dot):
rsync -avz jupiter::FTP .
By default, files are not deleted while synchronizing with rsync. To
force file deletion, add the --delete option. To make
sure that --delete does not accidentally remove newer
files, use the --update option instead. Any conflicts
that arise must be resolved manually.
Before using Unison to synchronize files and directories between different computers, make sure that the following requirements are met:
The package unison is installed.
Enough disk space is available on your local and remote computer.
If you want to benefit from Unison's full potential, make sure that Unison is also installed and running on the remote computer.
In case you need help, run Unison with the -doc topics
option to get a full list of available sections.
For permanent settings, Unison allows the creation of
profiles that specify Unison preferences such as
the directories (roots) to synchronize, which types of files to ignore,
and other options. The profiles are stored as text files in
~/.unison with the file extension
*.prf.
To synchronize different directories with Unison's GUI, proceed as follows:
Start Unison by pressing Alt+F2 and entering unison.
If you run Unison for the first time and without any further options, you are prompted for a source directory. Enter the source directory you want to synchronize and click .
Enter the target directory. It can be either local or remote. If you want to synchronize to a remote directory, choose the method (SSH, RSH or Socket) and enter the hostname and an optional user.
If you have not synchronized these two directories before, a warning dialog appears, informing you that Unison will now compare the contents of those directories. Close the warning with and wait until Unison has collected the information from both directories and displays the differences in the main window.
The left column shows the source directory you have selected, the third column shows the target directory. If there are differences between the directories, the column shows a symbol, proposing an action. A green arrow indicates that a file has been modified, added or deleted in the source or the target directory. The direction of the arrow indicates the direction that the change would be propagated if you performed the synchronization now. A question mark indicates a conflict (both files have been changed and Unison cannot decide which one to overwrite).
To modify the proposals Unison shows for each file (for example, if you want to change the direction), select the file and click or . With , exclude a file from synchronization. The symbol in the column changes accordingly.
To start the synchronization, click .
The next time you start Unison, a dialog box shows the existing profiles, each specifying a pair of directories to be synchronized. Select a profile or create a new profile (for another pair of directories) and perform the synchronization as described above.
Unison can also be operated through the command line. To synchronize a local directory to a remote computer, proceed as follows:
Open a shell and enter the following command:
unison -ui textDIRssh://tux@jupiter.example.com//PATH
Replace the placeholders with the respective values.
Unison asks you what to do with your files and directories, for example:
local jupiter
<---- new file dir [f]Press F if you want to follow Unison's recommendation. For other commands, press ?.
Proceed with y, if you want to propagate your updates.
Before configuring your FTP server, make sure that the following requirements are met:
The package vsftp is
installed.
You have root access to your FTP server.
Enough disk space is available on your computer.
![]() | For Home Networks Only |
|---|---|
This setup is suited for use in home networks only. Do not deploy it to sites unprotected by firewalls and do not enable world wide access. | |
To configure an FTP server, proceed as follows:
Prepare the FTP server:
Open a shell, log in as root, and save a backup copy of
/etc/vsftpd.conf:
cp /etc/vsftpd.conf /etc/vsftpd.conf.bak
Create an access point for anonymous FTP
mkdir ~ftp/incoming chown -R ftp:ftp ~ftp/incoming
Replace the configuration files according to the preferred scenario (refer to the manual page of vsftpd.conf for advanced configuration options):
# listen=YES # Enable anonymous access to FTP server anonymous_enable=YES # local_enable=YES # Enable write access write_enable=YES anon_upload_enable=YES anon_mkdir_write_enable=YES dirmessage_enable=YES # Write log file xferlog_enable=YES connect_from_port_20=YES chown_uploads=YES chown_username=ftp ftpd_banner=Welcome to FTP service. anon_root=/srv/ftp
chroot_local_users=YES
Restart the FTP server:
rcvsftp start
On the client, just enter the URL
ftp:// in your browser
or FTP client. Replace HOSTHOST with the hostname
or IP address of your server. There are many graphical user interfaces
available that are suited to browsing the contents of your FTP server.
For a list of them, just enter FTP at the search prompt of the YaST
package manager.
To transfer files from Linux to Windows using SSH, choose one of the following applications:
PuTTY is a suite of different command line tools for working with an SSH daemon. Download it from http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty.html.
WinSCP is very similar to PuTTY, but includes a graphical user interface. Choose from an Explorer or Norton Commander style. Download it from http://winscp.net.
To copy a file from Windows to Linux with PuTTY, proceed as follows (on the Windows machine):
Start PSCP.
Enter the hostname of your SSH server.
Enter your login and password to the SSH server.
To connect from Windows to Linux with WinSCP, proceed as follows (on the Windows machine):
Start WinSCP.
Enter the hostname of the SSH server and username.
Click and acknowledge the resulting warning.
Drag and drop any files or directories from or to your WinSCP window.
![]() | SSH Fingerprint |
|---|---|
With both PuTTY and WinSCP, you must accept the SSH fingerprint when you log in for the first time. | |
The following sections feature various methods for sharing data. Use one of these if you are looking for a permanent solution for data sharing.
To configure the server, proceed as follows:
Prepare the system:
Open a shell, log in as root, and grant write permissions to
all users:
mkdir /srv/nfs chgrp users /srv/nfs chmod g+w /srv/nfs
Make sure that your user name and user ID is known on the client as well as on the server. Refer to Chapter 10, Managing Users with YaST (↑Start-Up) for detailed instructions about how to create and manage user accounts.
Prepare the NFS server:
Start YaST as root.
Select + (this module is not installed by
default. If it is missing in YaST, install the package
yast2-nfs-server).
Enable NFS services with .
Open the appropriate firewall port with if you are using a firewall.
Export the directories:
Click and select
/srv/nfs.
Set the export options to:
rw,root_squash,async
Repeat these steps, if you need to export more than one directory.
Apply your settings and leave YaST. Your NFS server is ready to use.
To manually start the NFS server, enter rcnfsserver
start as root. To stop the server, enter
rcnfsserver stop. By default, YaST takes care of
starting this service at boot time.
To configure the client, proceed as follows:
Prepare the NFS client:
Start YaST as root.
Select +.
Activate if using a firewall.
Import the remote file system:
Click .
Enter the name or IP address of the NFS server or click to automatically scan the network for NFS servers.
Enter the name of your remote file system or automatically choose it with .
Enter an appropriate mount point, for example
/mnt. If you repeat this step with another
exported file system, make sure you choose another mount point than
/mnt.
Repeat these steps if you need to import more than one external directory.
Apply your settings and leave YaST. Your NFS client is ready to use.
To start the NFS client manually, enter rcnfs start.
![]() | Consistent User Names |
|---|---|
If your home network is used by just a small number of users, set up identical users manually on all machines. If, however, you need a larger consistent user base across a larger home network, consider using NIS or LDAP to manage user data. For further information, refer to Chapter 3, Using NIS (↑Security Guide) and Chapter 4, LDAP—A Directory Service (↑Security Guide). | |
This sections introduces various methods to access files on a Samba server. Both KDE and GNOME ship with graphical tools for working with Samba shares. There is also a command line tool for accessing Samba servers.
Both the KDE and GNOME desktops can access Samba shares through their file browsers. To access your share, proceed as follows:
Press Alt+F2 and enter
smb://jupiter.example.com/.
share
The syntax of this URL is
smb://
with HOST/SHARENAMEHOST representing the hostname
(jupiter.example.com) or IP address
and SHARENAME representing the share. See
Step 3.b.
Log in with the username and password. The password is set in Step 4 or just hit Enter if no password is needed.
Drag and drop any files or directories from or to your window.
If you do not know your workgroup, enter smb:/ to list
all workgroups available in your network. The Smb4K tool (package
smb4k) can also be used to
display all workgroups in your network and mount them on demand.
If you prefer using the command line, use the smbclient command. To log in to your Samba server, run:
smbclient //jupiter/share -U tux
Omit the -U option if you are the current user
tux. After logging
in successfully, use some basic commands like ls
(list contents), mkdir (create directory),
get (download file), and put
(upload file). Use help to display all commands.
Refer to the manual page of smbclient for more
information.
Samba is the first choice for transferring files between Windows and Linux machines. These are the most common use cases for Samba:
In the easiest case you do not have to configure a Linux server. Use
the smb:/ scheme. For more information, see
Section 23.7.2.1, “Accessing Shares with KDE and GNOME”. Make sure that your
workgroup is identical on both systems and that your directories are
shared.
Configure a Samba server on your Linux computer. See Procedure 23.4, “Setting Up a Samba Server”.
![]() | Using Default Registry Entries for Your Windows System |
|---|---|
Some Windows versions (95, 98) require a small change in the registry
for enabling a different password authentication method. Simplify this
step by installing the
| |
Procedure 23.4. Setting Up a Samba Server¶
To set up a Samba server, do the following:
Prepare the Samba server:
Start YaST as root.
Install the samba package.
Create a directory (for example, /srv/share).
Create the server configuration:
Select +.
Select one of the workgroups or enter a new one (for example,
Penguin).
Check
Select if the Samba service should be started every time your computer boots. Otherwise select .
Activate if you use a firewall.
Create your Windows share:
Change to the tab and click .
Select your path (for example, /src/share).
Proceed with .
Activate .
Provide a password for all users that are allowed to use this service:
smbpasswd -a tux
For easier configuration, just hit Enter to leave the password empty. Take into account that the usernames on your Windows and Linux computers are probably different. Configuring a consistent user base for both Windows and Linux is beyond the scope of this document.
Start the Samba server:
rcnmb start rcsmb start
To check if everything has been successfully configured, enter:
smbclient -L localhost
After you hit Enter, you should get something like the following:
Anonymous login successful
Domain=[PENGUIN] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 3.0.22-11-SUSE-CODE10]
Sharename Type Comment
--------- ---- -------
share Disk Shared directory
netlogon Disk Network Logon Service
IPC$ IPC IPC Service (Samba 3.0.22-11-SUSE-CODE10)
ADMIN$ IPC IPC Service (Samba 3.0.22-11-SUSE-CODE10)
Anonymous login successful
Domain=[PENGUIN] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 3.0.22-11-SUSE-CODE10]
Server Comment
--------- -------
SUSE-DESKTOP Samba 3.0.22-11-SUSE-CODE10
Workgroup Master
--------- -------
TUX-NET jupiterThis example network is used across all network-related chapters of the openSUSE® documentation.
![]() |
This appendix contains the GNU General Public License version 2 and the GNU Free Documentation License version 1.2.
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software--to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a). You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change.
b). You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License.
c). If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following:
a). Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b). Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c). Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
one line to give the program’s name and an idea of what it does. Copyright (C) yyyy name of author
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type `show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands `show w’ and `show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than `show w’ and `show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items--whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program `Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License.
Version 1.2, November 2002
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other functional and useful document “free” in the sense of freedom: to assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for modifications made by others.
This License is a kind of “copyleft”, which means that derivative works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license designed for free software.
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free software, because free software needs free documentation: a free program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals; it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this License principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work under the conditions stated herein. The “Document”, below, refers to any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and is addressed as “you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law.
A “Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifications and/or translated into another language.
A “Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter section of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them.
The “Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections then there are none.
The “Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
A “Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy that is not “Transparent” is called “Opaque”.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input format, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for output purposes only.
The “Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats which do not have any title page as such, “Title Page” means the text near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
A section “Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, “Endorsements”, or “History”.) To “Preserve the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a section “Entitled XYZ” according to this definition.
The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which states that this License applies to the Document. These Warranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no effect on the meaning of this License.
You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copying of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and you may publicly display copies.
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other respects.
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages.
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy a computer-network location from which the general network-using public has access to download using public-standard network protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that edition to the public.
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
B. List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you from this requirement.
C. State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher.
D. Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
E. Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright notices.
F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice.
H. Include an unaltered copy of this License.
I. Preserve the section Entitled “History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled “History” in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence.
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was based on. These may be placed in the “History” section. You may omit a network location for a work that was published at least four years before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
K. For any section Entitled “Acknowledgements” or “Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or dedications given therein.
L. Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
M. Delete any section Entitled “Endorsements”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled “Endorsements” or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
O. Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
You may add a section Entitled “Endorsements”, provided it contains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various parties--for example, statements of peer review or that the text has been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a standard.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
You may combine the Document with other documents released under this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled “History” in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled “History”; likewise combine any sections Entitled “Acknowledgements”, and any sections Entitled “Dedications”. You must delete all sections Entitled “Endorsements”.
You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an “aggregate” if the copyright resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative works of the Document.
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invariant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include the original English version of this License and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a disagreement between the translation and the original version of this License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
If a section in the Document is Entitled “Acknowledgements”, “Dedications”, or “History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document except as expressly provided for under this License. Any other attempt to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Document is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number. If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.
To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of the License in the document and put the following copyright and license notices just after the title page:
Copyright (c) YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.2 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.
If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts, replace the “with...Texts.” line with this:
with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being LIST.
If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the situation.
If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to permit their use in free software.